EPLAN NEWS. for Version 2.0

Transcription

1 EPLAN NEWS for Version 2.0

2 Copyright 2010 EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG assumes no liability for either technical or printing errors, or for deficiencies in this technical information and cannot be held liable for damages that may result directly or indirectly from the delivery, performance, and use of this material. This document contains legally protected proprietary information that is subject to copyright. All rights are protected. This document or parts of this document may not be copied or reproduced by any other means without the prior consent of EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG. The software described in this document is subject to a licensing agreement. The use and reproduction of the software is only permitted within the framework of this agreement. RITTAL is a registered trademark of Rittal GmbH & Co. KG. EPLAN, EPLAN Electric P8, EPLAN Fluid, EPLAN PPE, and EPLAN Cabinet are registered trademarks of EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG. Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Access, and Notepad are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. PC WORX, CLIP PROJECT, and INTERBUS are registered trademarks of Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. AutoCAD and AutoCAD Inventor are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. STEP 7, SIMATIC and SIMATIC HW Konfig. are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. InstallShield is a registered trademark of InstallShield, Inc. Adobe Reader and Adobe Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc. TwinCAT is a registered trademark of Beckhoff Automation GmbH. Unity Pro is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric. RSLogix 5000 and RSLogix Architect are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation. All other product names and trade names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. EPLAN uses the Open Source software 7-Zip (7za.dll), Copyright by Igor Pavlov. The source code of 7-Zip is subject to the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). The source code of 7-Zip and details on this license can be found on the following Web site: EPLAN uses the Open Source software Open CASCADE, Copyright by Open CASCADE S.A.S. The source code of Open CASCADE is subject to the Open CASCADE Technology Public License. The source code of Open CASCADE and details on this license can be found on the following Web site:

3 Table of Contents Table of Contents Preface Notes for the reader More User-friendly Interface New Icons with Greater Color Depth Faster Access via New Mini Toolbars New Repeat Action Menu Option Adjustable Display in the Title Bar Clearer "Display" and "Format" Tabs in the Properties Dialog New Functionalities for Graphical Elements New Editing Functionalities Trimming graphical elements Cutting off elements Changing lengths of lines and arcs Filleting / chamfering corners Drawing a Rectangle through Center Drawing Assistance with Perpendicular and Tangential Points Perpendicular and tangential points Perpendicular or tangential mode when drawing Drawing perpendicular or tangential lines Defining a radius through a tangential point Line projection Input Box for Editors Using the input box Functions with input-box support Activating the input box Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes Elliptical Text Boxes Elliptical Alignment Boxes and Leader Lines New Features in Dimensioning New Project-wide Settings for Dimensioning New Settings in the Properties Dialog New Features in the Page Navigator Page Filter with Schemes Specifying page filters via default filter EPLAN NEWS 2.0 3

4 Table of Contents Specifying page filters via detailed selection Selection in the Page List Takes Place when Scrolling Pages Automatic Page Names when Inserting Pages or Macros Customizing the Displayed DT for Location Boxes when Inserting Pages or Macros Determining Number of Pages / Page Name per Property Using Terminals Using Main Terminals Managing terminal strips Managing terminal strips as in the previous versions Definition of multi-level terminals Converting older projects and macros Terminal Strip and Terminal Accessories Defining alignable accessories for terminals New Features in Editing Terminal Strips Assigning alignable accessories when editing terminal strips Information about terminal connection points Generating saddle jumpers manually External / internal saddle jumpers New Features in the Terminal Strip Navigator Display in the navigator Generating new terminals Sorting terminals of a terminal strip New Function Definitions for Terminals New properties for characterizing terminals Online Numbering of Terminal Sort Codes Online numbering of terminal and pin designations Extended Reports for Terminals Output terminal connection point in addition to target Terminal report generation in relation to connection points or targets Optimized Database Structure for Projects Restoring Deleted Projects from the Recycle Bin PDF Export in Archiving Format Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Managing Accessory Parts in Parts Management Clear identification of parts as accessories Displaying accessory parts in parts management EPLAN NEWS 2.0

5 Table of Contents Using accessory lists Assigning accessories to a main part Data transfer on update of the parts database Accessory Parts in Device Selection Changes in the "Device selection" Dialog Selecting accessories Check Run for Missing, Required Accessory Parts Changes to the Device Selection Settings New "EPLAN Pro Panel" Add-On Protected Devices Assigning Protection Protecting functions or connections Protecting devices Removing device protection Using Protected Devices Creating macros / copies of protected devices Deleting functions Using existing functions / assigning functions Actions in the graphical editor Managing Unplaced Auxiliary Functions at the Main Function Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on Defining Multi-line Connections on a Single-line Connection Point Defined multi-line connections in the connection navigator New messages for defined multi-line connections Graphical Device Tag List Simple Graphical Device Tag Lists Customizing forms for device tag lists Specifying settings Jumping to the schematic Graphical Device Tag Lists with Overviews Symbols for display in reports Data for reports Conditional forms Symbols for Complex Devices New Device Connection Points Storing a Symbol Macro at the Function Template EPLAN NEWS 2.0 5

6 Table of Contents Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Improved Views in the PLC Navigator Channel display in the PLC navigator Inserting PLC Cards Macro Placement Assigning Functions Taking account of the representation type Using existing PLC connection points blockwise New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Nets with Net-based Connections Defining net-based connections Disabling target specification of connection symbols Specifying Nets with Net-based Connections Inserting net definition points Defining daisy chains Displaying Nets and Net-based Connections Net-based connections in the connections navigator Displaying nets in the potential navigator Highlighting nets Editing Nets with Net-based Connections Connecting nets Modifying nets Net-based connection reports Correcting connections New messages for net-based connections New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration EPLAN EMI Add-ons Importing Mechanical Data Mechatronics Navigator Recognizing assignment status New filtering options in the navigator Updating the mechanical model Assigning data Transfering data to Inventor Inserting a device tag into Inventor drawings Creating and reading information Calculating the connection length EPLAN NEWS 2.0

7 Table of Contents Inserting a Model View for EPLAN EMI Settings for EPLAN EMI Addition for length calculation New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal Unique Part ID for Parts in the EPLAN Data Portal Settings for the EPLAN Data Portal Integration into the EPLAN platform New Features in Device Numbering Subcounters in Offline Device Numbering New Numbering Formats for Busbars Safety-relevant Functions Connections and Connection Numbering Applying Predefined Values for Connection Colors and Cross-section / Diameter Determining Connection Sources and Targets Aligning Connection Definition Point Placements with Each Other Resetting the Counter for Connection Numbering per Structure / Page Defining the counter reset range Numbering Card Power Supplies and Bus Cables with General Connection Numbering Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Optimizing Performance by the Use of Modern Processors Use of multi-core processors Use of more updated processors Project Editing New projects with current creation date and creator Automatic data format checking EPLAN 5 / fluidplan Data Import Symbol library sequence in the settings EPLAN 21 Data Import Including net-based connections Inherit black box structures to interruption points Data Backup Distribution of directory information during data backup Extended PDF and DXF / DWG Export of Pages Saving PDF settings as a scheme New user-specific settings for export EPLAN NEWS 2.0 7

8 Table of Contents PDF export with linked documents Exporting pages in PDF format Outputting 3D models in the PDF export Finding and Replacing Jumping forwards and backwards in the jump sequence of crossreferenced functions Go to part assemblies Including objects in the layout space in the search Influencing the Value and Unit Display New display properties Using the new display properties New project setting for output of the unit Enhancements to the EPLAN API Graphical Editor Rapid opening of page properties Extending the search for path function text Setting the displayed language of multilingual texts blockwise using actions Multilingual texts for designation of hyperlinks Property texts for boxes when changing scale Plug DT and channel designation retained when moved Expansion of special characters Devices Extension to user-defined property arrangement Changing the graphic of black boxes and similar components via the properties dialog Properties dialog for bundle connection points Jump functions for location boxes Plug DT for device connection points Considering part placements in global editing Adopting properties of the P&I diagram functions during synchronizing Assigning structure identifiers for part definition points Allowing identical connection point designations for devices Edit in Table Shortcut key to close edit in table Project Data Navigators New jump functions in the connection navigator Placing macros Placing all functions of a device Adjusting the column width Device group DT on associated devices EPLAN NEWS 2.0

9 Table of Contents Defined Devices Taking account of macro variants Representation types for unplaced functions Part Selection Part selection with scheme selection Do not show conflict dialog Modifications to part management during part selection Symbol Editor Reorganizing symbol libraries Displaying variants when paging in the symbol editor Form Editor Combining overview reports Combining parts in enclosure legends Conditional areas in dynamic forms Suppressing blank data lines Renamed placeholder texts for the device tag list Outputting function data for the device tag list and symbol overview Regenerating headers without sorting Outputting only connected connection points in connection diagrams Essential customization of user-defined connection diagram forms New placeholders for cable charts in terminal and plug diagrams Macros Description text for automatically generated page macros Group macro boxes and associated objects Specifically assigning objects to macro boxes Placeholder Objects Properties dialog and new symbol for placeholder objects New properties for placeholder objects Simplified assignment Reports Connection diagrams for wiring diagrams Appending reports to the end Sorting cable overviews according to source and target Using page structure identifiers for reports Creating report templates Copying and pasting function-related embedded reports Breaking up modules Outputting part assemblies in labeling EPLAN NEWS 2.0 9

10 Table of Contents Parts Management Improved full-text filter Additional selection option using the "Combination" tab Creating subtrades for fluid power Data field for the part number of an ERP system Entering barcodes for parts Clip-on height for placements on mounting rails Entering outline drawings in parts management New "Documents" tab Assigning cables / connections to an image file Protecting data fields before updating New synchronization of parts Updating parts when opening a project Additional menu items for the part master data navigator Message Management Improved ergonomics New trade-specific filter settings New "Prevent errors" check type for error checking Setting option for module-specific checks Separate filters for running error checking New check run for checking the online numbering format New Features in the "Revision Management" Add-on Renamed revision control operation Dividing menu items for improved ergonomics Project completion enhancement Generating a report when completing a project and pages Numbering the revision index Differing graphical markers for change tracking Alternative properties comparison Comparing the properties of projects Displaying results of properties comparison New settings for the property comparison of projects Project-specific databases for the comparison results Deleting revision data of the property comparison Displaying deleted objects Layout spaces in revision control New Features in the "Multi Language Translation" Add-on Distinguishing between source language and displayed language Upper-/lower-case letters for the source language Text-based line breaks in translations EPLAN NEWS 2.0

11 Table of Contents Changed translation behavior on input Exporting the missing-word list based on the dictionary New messages for the translation New Features in the "User Rights Management" Add-on Assigning new rights New Features in the "Mounting Panel" Add-on A clearer view in the navigator Placing terminal strips on the mounting panel Displaying the handles of part placements Same legend item for identical devices Settings New action for importing settings Preceding sign for interruption point names New settings for displayed units of measure Renamed settings for graphical editing Properties User-defined property configurations Renamed project property New properties for device tags Other New Features in Utilities Extensions for automated editing Improved registration for add-ons Improved display of system messages Licensing Extensions to EPLAN License Manager Special Topics EPLAN Electric P Terminals / Plugs Terminal / pin and connection point descriptions Displaying saddle jumpers for "Interconnect devices" New Features in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Configurable PLC connection points Channels with several I/O connection points Blockwise use of existing PLC connection points and PLC boxes Interface for PLC data exchange with Rockwell Simplified data display when importing PLC data Extended part allocation when exporting and importing bus configurations Cables Highlighting cable connections Ignoring subordinate DTs for nested targets EPLAN NEWS

12 Table of Contents Inserting insulated wire terminations Devices Inserting cable parts as devices Device Selection Device selection for wires Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Navigators for the 3D Mounting Layout Logical structure in the layout space navigator Devices displayed in the layout space navigator Project structure in the 3D mounting layout navigator Filters in the navigators Creating and Opening a Layout Space Placing Mounting Panels and Enclosures Placing mounting panels Placing free mounting panels Placing enclosures with mounting panels Placing Components on Mounting Panels or Mounting Surfaces Activating mounting surfaces / items automatically Activating mounting surfaces directly Placing mounting rails and wire ducts Inserting devices as defined devices Defining locked areas Changing the 3D View of the Layout Space Showing / hiding components from the layout space navigator Showing / hiding individual components in the 3D view Simplifying the object display Setting colors and / or transparency Editing Objects in the Layout Space Rotating objects about an axis Changing the length of objects in the layout space Measuring distances in the layout space Displaying mounting clearances Macros for the 3D Mounting Layout Importing a 3D graphic Uniting objects in the layout space Managing 3D macros in the macro project Creating 3D macros Inserting 3D macros Changing the rotation angle when inserting 3D macros EPLAN NEWS 2.0

13 Table of Contents Editing the Device Logic Interactive points, lines, and areas in the device logic Defining the device logic Model Views for the 3D Mounting Layout Inserting a model view Updating the model view Modifying the contents of the model view Outline Editor for Extrusions Creating outlines Editing outlines Importing and cleaning up outlines Checking outlines Device Structure for Mechanical Devices Online Numbering for Mechanical Devices Special Topics EPLAN PPE Compressing and Reorganizing Projects Redesigned Import of Loops and Consumers Including Parts from EPLAN PPE for Bills of Materials New Identifier for Measurands without Supplementary Letters Labeling and Scripts for EPLAN PPE P&ID Special Topics EPLAN View User Settings for Multi-user Operation New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on Direct Access to Parts Management Data Access to Function Templates All Revision Control Functions are Available Other New Features in the EPLAN API New Features in the Master Data Enhanced Information in the Master Data Editor Master Data: Symbols Master Data: Function Definition Library Master Data: Plot Frames Master Data: Settings for Messages and Check Runs Master Data: Identifiers Master Data: Projects and Templates Master Data: Workspace EPLAN NEWS

14 Table of Contents Master Data: Schemes Other New Features and Information Customer Queries and Messages Validation Code Retrieving the validation code online Installation and Subsequent Operation Steps Directory structure after installation Automatically importing the settings of the previous version Synchronization with original EPLAN master data Software Requirements and Approvals General requirements Client operating systems Server operating systems EPLAN Mechatronic Integration Database systems for parts management / selection Microsoft Office Excel versions Internet browsers for the EPLAN Data Portal Unsupported operating systems EPLAN software no longer supported Other software no longer supported Hardware Requirements Workstation hardware requirements Recommended workstation configuration Minimum net requirements Minimum multi-user requirements EPLAN NEWS 2.0

15 Preface Preface Dear EPLAN users, We are delighted to introduce the new EPLAN platform 2.0. The focus is on practical orientation: this latest development contains well over 1,000 new features, many of them requested by customers. The result is an EPLAN platform which has been optimized across the board to support consistent, time-efficient, and cost-saving engineering and cross-disciplinary cooperation. Focus on ergonomics: with a new dialog layout, advanced filtering techniques, high-quality CAD functions, and redesigned toolbars, project design is now even easier. Focus on quality: device data from preplanning can now be protected against unauthorized changes. This critical element for quality assurance in engineering also complies with the requirements of the new Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC). In addition, the new export format PDF/A supports additional requirements relating to the archiving of EPLAN project documentation. Focus on engineering: the new "Net Based Wiring" add-on can be used to define detailed connections within a network at database level. It's an ideal way of creating clear schematic layouts or simple daisy chains in production. Keyword "mounting panel assemblies": these can now be defined in 3D in electrical engineering and fluid power design and be integrated directly into the EPLAN platform. The convenience of 3D the simplicity of 2D. This News document highlights many additional features of the new version. We wish you every success with the new EPLAN platform 2.0. Your EPLAN Software & Service team EPLAN NEWS

16 Preface Notes for the reader Important information: Before installing the new version please read the information in "Other New Features and Information" from page 439 onwards. In particular please read "Software Requirements and Approvals" on page 454. Before opening old projects please read the information in "Optimized Database Structure for Projects" on page 69. For reasons of space the printed version of the News does not cover all topics exhaustively. The installation DVD includes a PDF of the complete version of the News. Before you begin reading, please note the following symbols and styles used in this document: Warning: Text preceded by this symbol contains a warning; you should be absolutely sure to read this warning before proceeding! Note: Text preceded by this image contains extra notes. Example: Examples are highlighted by this symbol. Tip: Useful tips to facilitate your interaction with the program are presented after this image. 16 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

17 Preface Administrator: The text introduced by these pictograms contains important information for the administrator. You must always read the sections marked with pictograms before working with the new version (see pages 307 and 444). Project editor: The texts introduced by these pictograms contain important information for the "normal" users working on projects. You must always read the sections marked with pictograms before working with the new version (see pages 53, 69, and 236). User interface elements are marked in bold (and blue) so they can immediately be located in the text. Italic text provides particularly important information that you should definitely pay attention to. Code examples, directory names, and direct input (among other elements) are displayed in a non-proportional font. Function keys, keyboard keys, and buttons within the program are shown in square brackets (e.g., [F1] for the "F1" function key). To improve the flow of the text, we often use "menu paths" in this document (for example, Help > Contents). In order to find a particular program function, the menus and options shown in a menu path must be selected in the sequence shown. For example, the menu path mentioned above calls up the EPLAN help system. In combination with settings or fields (e.g., check boxes) which can only be switched on or off, in this document we often use the term "activate" (after which the setting is active ) and "deactivate" (after which the setting is inactive ). EPLAN NEWS

18 More User-friendly Interface More User-friendly Interface We have significantly changed the appearance of EPLAN in some areas and made it more user-friendly for you. The changes include the following new features: New icons with greater color depth Mini toolbars in the editors (see page 19) Repeat menu option in the editors' popup menus (see page 20) Adjustable display in the title bar (see page 21) Clearer Display and Format tabs in the properties dialog (see page 22). New Icons with Greater Color Depth New, updated icons with a greater color depth are now used for toolbars, for the cursor, and for the display of objects in the navigators and other dialogs. The color depth with approx million colors now permits detailed illustrations giving the user a very natural impression. Benefit: The program functionalities assigned to the icons are clearly recognizable, making use of the program via the icons substantially more intuitive. A decisive advantage, especially for the occasional user, is the adjustment of the icons to the Windows standard (same icons => same functionalities). Example: The following figure shows the "old" Standard toolbar for an opened project. And in comparison, here is the "new" Standard toolbar. 18 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

19 More User-friendly Interface Faster Access via New Mini Toolbars There are now new mini toolbars when working in the editors (graphical editor, symbol editor, etc.) for text and graphical elements. Benefit: With the help of the mini toolbars you can edit text and graphical elements fast and directly without having to navigate through the main menu. If the Mini toolbars option is activated, a semi-transparent toolbar is displayed in miniature format when you check a corresponding individual element. Move the cursor away from the checked element and the mini toolbar disappears. If you place the cursor above the toolbar it becomes fully visible and you can carry out the desired settings. Example: Mini toolbars let you select line settings options such as Line thickness and Color and / or copy or apply a format to the selected line. The mini toolbars give you access to the following functionalities: Text elements: Font size, Font style, Copy format, Assign format, Color. Graphical elements: Line type, Line thickness, Copy format, Assign format, Color. You can decide in the Options menu whether to display mini toolbars or not with the new Mini toolbars menu option or switch them on or off with the new button in the View toolbar. The new "Mini toolbars on / off" right has been incorporated into the rights management for this menu option. EPLAN NEWS

20 More User-friendly Interface The mini toolbars are displayed only when an individual element is selected. If the selected element is blocked due to access to multiusermode or if the project has been opened with write-protection (e.g. for a filed project), the fields and symbols of the mini toolbars are grayed out. Notes: Note that you can use either the Mini toolbars option or the Direct editing option. Working with mini toolbars is activated by default. The Mini toolbars option is switched off when you activate direct editing. It is also possible to deactivate both options. If direct editing is activated temporarily, however, using [F2], then both the mini toolbar and the direct editing box are visible. The respective values in this field are checked and can be directly edited. Click on the mini toolbar or on the page in the graphical editor to deactivate "temporary" direct editing. You can set the degree of transparency of the mini toolbars using the same settings as for the input boxes (Transparency level (without focus) / Transparency level (with focus)). The menu path is as follows: Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > Input box / Mini toolbars. New Repeat Action Menu Option The popup menus of the different editors (graphical editor, symbol editor, etc.) have been amended to include the Repeat menu option. You can use this menu option to repeat the last action performed in the editor. Benefit: The quick combination of two mouse clicks one right-click (to request the popup menu), one left-click (to select Repeat) enables users to repeat the last performed action as many times as required. This enables you to greatly accelerate a sequence of repeated actions. 20 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

21 More User-friendly Interface The Repeat menu option is always the first option in the popup menu and the action to be repeated is displayed after the colon (e.g. Repeat: Angle down, right). Undo, Undo list, Redo, Redo list, and Cancel action can not be repeated. These actions are therefore not listed in the Repeat menu option. Adjustable Display in the Title Bar EPLAN lets you define which information you wish to have displayed in the title bar of your EPLAN application in addition to the program name. Benefit: You can set the display in the title bar individually. You can be kept fully informed about the current open project via the optional display of a project path to prevent you from inadvertently editing the wrong project. You can choose the settings in the new Display in title bar drop-down list. The menu path to the corresponding settings dialog is: Options > Settings > User > Display > User interface. You can choose between the following options: Project path+project+page: If you select this option, the title bar displays the project name with the file path and the page. Project+Page: If you select this option, the title bar displays only the project name and page. Page: If you select this option, the title bar displays only the page. In this case the name of the current open page is displayed in square brackets in the title bar (e.g. [=EB3+ET1/1]). If there is no page open in the graphical editor, no page name will be displayed. EPLAN NEWS

22 More User-friendly Interface Clearer "Display" and "Format" Tabs in the Properties Dialog The Display and Format tabs for the properties dialogs of graphical symbols and texts have been redesigned for the new version. All properties settings (Font size, Color, Border, etc.) are now shown in a new table with a tree structure. Benefit: All display or format settings are now clearly listed. These properties settings are now quicker and easier to change. If, for example, you have checked a property for a general device on the left-hand side in the Component or Connection points tab, e.g. DT (displayed), you can edit its display properties in the Property / Assignment table on the right-hand side. 22 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

23 More User-friendly Interface To change the value assigned to a property, click in the corresponding cell of the Assignment column and select another value from the dropdown list using or select the relevant check box. Since the different "Settings areas" such as Format, Border, Value / unit or Position are displayed in the table as hierarchy levels, the secondary Border dialog for the device and the Language and Border tabs for texts are now superfluous. Under Format you can find display properties such as Font size, Layer, Language, etc., and under Border you can find properties such as Draw text box, Activate alignment box, etc. The new Value / unit area contains properties for the display of values and units. The properties under Position all relate to a main property. EPLAN NEWS

24 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements New Functionalities for Graphical Elements The following new functionalities are now available for editing and drawing graphical elements in the editors (graphical editor, symbol editor, etc.): Cut off (see page 25) Change length (see page 26) Fillet corners and Chamfer (see page 27) Rectangle through center (see page 29) New Perpendicular and Tangential snap points and modes for drawing graphical elements (see page 30) Input box for editors (see page 33). New Editing Functionalities The four new functionalities, Cut off, Change length, Fillet corners, and Chamfer have been added to the Edit menu together with the existing editing functionalities Rotate, Mirror, Scale, and Stretch under the new Graphic menu option. Benefit: The new editing functionalities enable the simple and rapid change of graphical elements for the precise construction of component contours and graphical macros. Trimming graphical elements Trim functionalities are tools which let you change the lengths of graphical elements retrospectively. The two trim functionalities Cut off and Change length let you cut off, extend, or shorten graphical elements. It is not possible to select multiple elements. Nor can a group of graphical elements be trimmed. To trim an individual element you first need to disable the grouping. 24 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

25 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements Note: Note that the trimming of graphical elements does not take into account splines. Nor can you cut ellipses from splines and ellipses. Cutting off elements When cutting off, determine with a mouse click which part of a graphical object is to be "cut off" (erased). The part to be removed can be defined for a line as follows: Via one or two intersections Beispiel: A section is cut off at the tangential point. Via an intersection and an end point Beispiel: Several sections are cut off between the intersection and end points. Via two end or corner points. EPLAN NEWS

26 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements Cutting off sections is possible for the following elements: Line Polyline Polygon Rectangle Circle Arc Sector Ellipse. Graphical elements comprising just a line and not intersecting with other elements are fully erased. To cut a section off a graphical object, select the Edit > Graphic > Cut off menu option (or click on the (Cut off) button in the Edit graphic toolbar). Click on the desired section of a line or a graphical object. The selected section is removed. The trim functionality remains active until you select Popup menu > Cancel action. Changing lengths of lines and arcs You can use the Change length functionality to extend or shorten lines and arcs. One end of the element to be trimmed always remains unchanged; the other end is moved to make the trimmed element shorter or longer. Example: The end of a line is extended in the left-hand illustration and reduced in the right-hand illustration. 26 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

27 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements To change the length of a line or an arc, select the menu option Edit > Graphic > Change length (or click in the Edit graphic toolbar on the (Change length) button). Click on the end of the line to be changed. By moving the cursor in a particular direction you extend or shorten the corresponding line. The trim functionality remains active until you select Popup menu > Cancel action. Tips: You can also open the input box when changing the length and extend / shorten the line by entering positive / negative values (see the section "Input Box for Editors" on page 33). If the Object snap option is activated, then ends, snap points, and intersections with other lines are used as snap points when extending / shortening. The lines are then automatically connected to these snap points when trimming. Filleting / chamfering corners Use the Fillet corners functionality to fillet enclosed angles of less than 180. Angles between open lines can not be filleted, i.e. lines cannot be connected via the filleting function. Example: A corner of a rectangle is filleted with a radius of 16 mm. You can use the Chamfer functionality to chamfer the corners of different elements symmetrically. This functionality can be used on enclosed angles which are less than 180. In this case the original lines are shortened symmetrically by a value (the so-called chamfer width) which is measured from the angle point. EPLAN NEWS

28 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements Example: A corner of a rectangle is chamfered with a chamfer width of 16 mm. Filleting / chamfering is available for the following elements in EPLAN: The corner of two radiating lines The corner between a line and a polyline The corner between two polylines The corners of polylines (open and closed) Rectangles. Filleting / chamfering rectangles will result in the rectangle being converted into a polygon with four segments (starting point of the first polyline segment = start point of the rectangle). To enable this, the Polyline tab has been amended to include the field Radius. You can also use this field to change a fillet radius or fillet a "straight" polyline segment. 28 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

29 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements To fillet a corner select the menu option Edit > Graphic > Fillet corners. To chamfer a corner select the Chamfer menu option in the same menu. Alternatively click on the (Fillet corners) / (Chamfer) button in the Edit graphic toolbar. Click on the corner to be filleted/ chamfered. Click to set the fillet radius / chamfer width. The corner is correspondingly filleted / chamfered. Once defined, a fillet radius / chamfer width is applied until you cancel the action. Notes: If it is not possible to apply a selected fillet radius you will receive a system message. You can also fillet or chamfer corners of single elements in a group of elements. Tip: Once you have chosen the corner to fillet or chamfer, you can also use the opened window of the input box to set the fillet radius or the chamfer width (see the section "Input Box for Editors" on page 33). Drawing a Rectangle through Center You can now also use the center and a corner point to define a rectangle. To do this select the menu option Insert > Graphic > Rectangle through center. Start by defining the center of the rectangle and click with the left-hand mouse button. Drag the rectangle out from the center and click with the left-hand mouse button to set a corner point for the rectangle. Click on the new Graphic toolbar. button to select this functionality from the EPLAN NEWS

30 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements Tip: Rather than using the mouse you can also set the center and corner points of the rectangle via the input box (see page 33). Since relative coordinates are used when entering the second point and the input relates to the center, the point entry for a corner point of the rectangle (e.g ) corresponds to half the width and height of the rectangle (e.g. 40 mm 40 mm). Drawing Assistance with Perpendicular and Tangential Points When drawing graphical elements in the editors (graphical editor, symbol editor, etc.) you are now assisted by new snap points (perpendicular and tangential points). Benefit: Drawing using tangential points assists you particularly when constructing slotted holes which you define via two drill holes connected by lines placed on the circle tangents. You then use the Cut off functionality to erase the inner circle segments. The result is a fast, simple, and cleanly-constructed slotted hole. Perpendicular and tangential points If the Object snap option is activated when drawing graphical elements, a perpendicular or tangential point is displayed at the cursor as soon as a perpendicular or tangential line element is possible. If the Object snap option is deactivated, then these (and other) points are not treated as snap points and are accordingly also not displayed. 30 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

31 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements Perpendicular or tangential mode when drawing Irrespective of whether the Object snap option is selected, the two new modes Perpendicular and Tangential are available in the popup menu when drawing particular graphical elements (lines, circles, etc.). These functionalities can help you draw a perpendicular line or a tangent. Once you have selected a mode in the popup menu, the icon at the cursor changes. The respective modes are available for the following graphical elements: Perpendicular mode (cursor: ): for lines, polylines, and polygons Tangential mode (cursor: ): for lines, polylines, polygons, circles, arcs through center, and sectors. Drawing perpendicular or tangential lines With the help of the Perpendicular and Tangential modes you can draw a line perpendicularly or tangentially to an object. Defining the start point for a line When drawing lines (polylines) you can use the new modes once to define the start point for a line (polyline). Once you have selected the relevant menu item in the Insert > Graphic menu (Line, Polyline, Polygon), you can e.g. select Popup menu > Perpendicular. The icon at the cursor indicates that the Perpendicular mode is active. Next click on the respective object (line, rectangle, circle, etc.) to which you wish to draw a perpendicular line. Provided you have not defined the end point yet, the start point is variable and the line can be moved up and down vertically to the selected line segment of the object. Click once more to determine the end point of the line (the next corner point of the polyline). EPLAN NEWS

32 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements Defining the end point for a line You can also use these modes to set the end point of a line (the next corner point of a polyline). To do this, once you have defined the start point, select the mode via the popup menu (e.g. Perpendicular). Then move the cursor to the object to which you wish to draw a perpendicular line. As soon as you have reached a perpendicular point, the possible line is displayed. Click to draw this perpendicular line. Defining a radius through a tangential point Tangential mode additionally lets you define the radii of circles, arcs, and sectors in your drawing. Once you have selected the corresponding menu item in the Insert > Graphic menu (Circle, Arc through center, Sector), start by clicking with the left-hand mouse button to define the center. Then select Popup menu > Tangential. The icon at the cursor indicates that Tangential mode is active. Now move the cursor to the object to which you wish to draw a tangent. Once you have reached a tangent point the possible arc is displayed. Click again to draw the circle / arc / sector. Line projection It is now possible to define a projection for lines. Benefit: This new feature lets you produce a DIN-compliant center line, i.e. with projection. If this is required for a line, open the respective properties dialog on the Format tab and activate the Projection check box. A projection is then drawn at the start and end point of the line. This is calculated according to DIN on the basis of the line thickness and drawn with a length of "12 d" (wherein d = dashed line diameter (Line thickness)). 32 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

33 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements Note: The line's snap points and dimensions are not changed by inserting a projection. Input Box for Editors The new input box in EPLAN offers you the option for various functionalities in the editors (graphical editor, 3D view, etc.) of entering values via the keyboard. Benefit: The input box permits fast, clear input of values. You can define all the required dimensions for a high-quality production document without use of the grid. If the input box is activated, a small text window for inputting numbers appears at the cursor for these functionalities (e.g. for inserting a line). This window exhibits a predefined level of transparency which you can change in the settings. Tip: You can use the input box in combination with the base point shift e.g. to construct recesses in an enclosure door quickly and easily. To do this select Options > Move base point and click on the bottom left corner of the enclosure door. This defines the auxiliary point for the relative input. Then select Insert > Graphic > Rectangle. If the Input box option is activated the input box text window is displayed at the cursor. EPLAN NEWS

34 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements Input two values to set the position of the first corner of the rectangle. This point entry relates to the movement of the reference point on the bottom left corner of the door. Enter one more point in the input box and the rectangle is drawn to the exact preset size as a recess. Using the input box The input box text window consists of two heading rows and the actual input box. The first header row shows the respective action (e.g. Start point for line) and the second row shows the required input as comment text. The numbers input via the keyboard are displayed in the input box. The sequence of values to be input is defined in the system for each functionality. Thus, e.g. in the case of the line, two entries are possible in the order "X and Y value of a coordinate" or "Angle and length". In the case of the point entry the input of two values separated by a space is interpreted as the X and Y values of coordinates (start or end point). In this case the input values relate to the graphical coordinate system with its origin at the bottom left and which is specified in "mm" or "inch" depending on the unit presetting. Note: Note that only the first point entry uses absolute values while the subsequent point entries use relative coordinates. You input one value to define the angle of a line. Use "Value<Value" to input the angle and the length of a line. Negative values are also admissible. To set decimal places, enter the decimal separator used in the operating system ("," or "."). Click on [Enter] to apply the values entered to the respective functionality; the input box is then cleared. The input box is closed after the last input or after exiting the action. 34 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

35 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements You can not request other functionalities with the relevant shortcut keys when the input box is open. Press [Esc] to cancel the input box. Functions with input-box support Input-box entries are permissible for the following EPLAN platform functionalities: Inserting graphical elements: line, polyline, rectangle, circle, arc, sector, text. Inserting dimensioning. Editing graphical elements: rotate, duplicate, move, mirror, scale, stretch, cut off, change length, fillet corners, chamfer. Inserting 3D items: mounting rail, wire duct (cable duct), enclosure, mounting panel, locked area, logic item. Editing 3D items: Place via adopt length, change length, rotate around axis, define mounting point and handle. Activating the input box You can configure the EPLAN user settings so that the input box is always displayed for the functionalities listed above. To do this, select the Always show input box (2D) and Always show input box (3D) check boxes in the new Settings: Input box / Mini toolbars dialog. Under Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > Input box / Mini toolbars you can also change the transparency of the text window for the input box. Along with this setting you can, however, also activate / deactivate the input box depending on the selection of a functionality. To do this the Options menu now includes the new Input box menu item and the View toolbar has a new button. EPLAN NEWS

36 New Functionalities for Graphical Elements Note: The setting for activation and deactivation of the input box is synchronized. I.e., if you activate the input box in the settings and then deactivate it in the editor, it is also deselected in the settings. Keys for input boxes Irrespective of whether or not you activate the input box when running the functionalities listed above, you can also open the text window for the input box with the [C] key. In this case the cursor is located immediately in the input box of the text window. The same applies for the number keys and for the [+] and [-] keys which also open the input box. Note: For this reason the View menu no longer has the default settings of the [+] key for zoom In and the [-] key for zoom Out. And the shortcut key for zoom to 100% has been changed to [Alt] + [3]. Tip: With the help of the number keys and the [+] and [-] keys you can input values via the input box even during an interaction and even if the Input box option is deactivated. If you draw, e.g., a circle with Insert > Graphic > Circle and have already placed the center, the subsequent input of a value (e.g. "1") opens the input box and you can input the radius, for example "10". 36 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

37 Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes EPLAN now allows you to set elliptical and circular text and / or alignment boxes for texts. It makes no difference what type of text this is (simple "graphical" text, property text, special text, etc.). For placed property texts you can also show leader lines. Example: Our example shows circular alignment boxes for various part placements on a mounting panel. The leader lines show which legend item belongs to which part placement. Benefit: You have more flexibility in laying out text boxes. Leader lines between a device and the associated property placements make the schematic easier to read. EPLAN NEWS

38 Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes Elliptical Text Boxes You can set the options for elliptical text boxes as follows: Project-wide by means of an appropriate setting in layer management: You can now select the values for the Text box property from a dropdown list. Select "Ellipse" from this list if you want texts or device tags on the layer concerned to be surrounded by an elliptical border throughout the entire project. Individually by means of the corresponding properties dialog: The setting options for borders have been extended for this purpose. As already mentioned in "Clearer "Display" and "Format" Tabs in the Properties Dialog" on page 22, the relevant settings are no longer located on the separate tab or in the subsequent Border dialog but in a table on the Display / Format tab. To obtain an elliptical text box for an individual device tag or text, select the new "Ellipse" option from the Draw text box drop-down list in the Border area of this table. 38 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

39 Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes Example: The illustration below shows the new settings in the properties dialog for a component on the Display tab. Using the new Size from project setting check box you can specify that the static size of the text box is taken from the new Text box project setting. To access this setting select Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical editing > General. Equal values for the Width and Height fields will produce a circular text box. If the Size from project setting check box is not selected, the size of the box is determined by the text. Elliptical Alignment Boxes and Leader Lines If you want texts or device tags to have elliptical alignment boxes and / or leader lines, you can specify the relevant settings individually in the associated properties dialog. EPLAN NEWS

40 Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes If you also select the new Activate leader line check box, a leader line is drawn from the placed property text to the center of the associated component. If the property text is moved, the position of the leader line is adjusted accordingly. No leader line is drawn for simple "graphical" texts or special texts. To draw an elliptical alignment box you must first select the Activate alignment box check box. This activates the new Draw alignment box drop-down list, and you can specify whether a graphic is displayed for the alignment box and what shape this graphic should be. For an elliptical box select the "Ellipse" option. Equal values for the subsequent Width and Height fields will produce a circular alignment box. 40 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

41 New Features in Dimensioning New Features in Dimensioning New Project-wide Settings for Dimensioning There are new setting options for dimensioning, making the creation of dimensions in EPLAN more versatile and convenient. Benefit: You have new representation options so you can dimension drawings for customers in Europe and North America according to local standards: - Display dimension value as fraction - Dimension value centered in dimension line - Horizontal dimension value. You can use the Distance 1st dimension help line and Distance 2nd dimension help line settings to create a gap between the graphic and the dimension help lines. Clear dimensioning enables you to create high-quality production documentation. You therefore lay the foundation for smooth production and assembly processes while still in the engineering phase. To open the relevant Settings: Dimensioning dialog, select the menu path Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical editing > Dimensioning. EPLAN NEWS

42 New Features in Dimensioning Display two units: If this check box is selected, the dimension value is displayed as a metric unit (mm, cm, etc.) and in inches. The dimension value with the second unit (i.e. the one that is not set in the Unit field) is displayed in square brackets immediately after the first dimension value with the first unit (e.g. 88 mm[3,46 ]). The dimension value for the second unit is shown to the same accuracy as the first dimension value; however, a maximum of two decimal places is displayed. If the check box is not selected, the dimension value is displayed with the unit specified in the Unit field only. Note: Two units cannot be displayed for an angular dimension. In this case, the Display two units check box in the properties dialog is grayed out. 42 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

43 New Features in Dimensioning Display dimension value as fraction: If this check box is selected, decimal numbers such as "0.5", "0.25", "0.125", "0.0625", or multiples thereof will be displayed as a fraction. Possible values for fractions are therefore "1/2", "1/4", "1/8", "1/16", and multiples thereof. Other decimal numbers are not shown as fractions. Horizontal dimension value: If this check box is selected, the dimension value is always displayed horizontally, irrespective of the dimension direction. If this check box is not selected, the dimension value is displayed according to the dimension direction. This means that for vertical dimensions, for instance, you no longer need to rotate the dimension value in the properties dialog. To do this, on the Dimensioning tab, you must first deselect the Center dimension value check box and then change the setting in the Angle field on the Format tab. Dimension value centered in dimension line: If this check box is selected, the dimension value is placed in the center of the dimension line and the dimension line is interrupted. With this setting, the dimension value is always displayed horizontally and centered. Any set distance from the dimension line is ignored. Furthermore, no format settings for alignment and angle can be specified in the relevant properties dialog for dimensioning. EPLAN NEWS

44 New Features in Dimensioning Example: Linear dimension on a rectangle with Dimension value centered in dimension line selected: Note: Note that the Horizontal dimension value and Dimension value centered in dimension line settings are ignored in incremental dimensions. Dimension line interrupted by dimension value: If this check box is selected, the dimension line is interrupted if the dimension value intersects with it. If the check box is not selected, the dimension line is never interrupted, irrespective of the position of the dimension value. Display start value for incremental dimension: If this check box is selected, the start value, i.e. the value at the first measuring point, is also displayed for incremental dimensions. If the check box is not selected, this value is not displayed. 44 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

45 New Features in Dimensioning Note: The Display start value for incremental dimension setting is not a property but just a display aid. Therefore this setting can not be specified for a dimension in the properties dialog, but only project-wide. New Settings in the Properties Dialog In addition to the project-wide default setting, you can also specify all the properties described above individually for a dimension. To do this, in the graphical editor click on the relevant dimension line to open the Properties dialog. Dimensioning tab: The Dimension value group box on this tab contains new check boxes as follows: Display two units Display dimension value as fraction Horizontal dimension value and Dimension value centered in dimension line. Lines tab: For the sake of clarity, the settings for the dimension help line and dimension line termination have been moved to the new Lines tab. EPLAN NEWS

46 New Features in Dimensioning This tab also contains the new Dimension line interrupted by dimension value check box. It also contains the option of setting shorter dimension help lines. For this reason, the Dimension help line group box has two new fields: Distance 1st dimension help line and Distance 2nd dimension help line, in which you enter the distance between the measuring point and the start of the dimension help line for the dimension help line in question. The dimension help line is shortened for positive values and extended for negative values. 46 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

47 New Features in the Page Navigator New Features in the Page Navigator Page Filter with Schemes There are two different options in the page navigator to define a page filter: By defining filter criteria in the "Filter" dialog This new option is a field-based default filter which you will already recognize from other navigators, for example. Here, you can use various page properties as filter criteria and store them in a scheme. Via detailed selection in the "Select pages" dialog This option corresponds to the page filter used to date. Here, you can compile the desired pages manually in a tree structure, with support from a prefilter and a postfilter. Benefit: When using the default filter, the page filter now no longer has to be updated after creating new pages. You are always given the current view of the subset of project pages defined via the page filter. Consistent use of the familiar filter technology facilitates operation of the program. Specifying page filters via default filter Predefined filter schemes can be selected via the new Filter drop-down list. If you then click the [...] button next to the drop-down list, this takes you to the Filter dialog. Here, you can create new schemes and make changes to the relevant filter criteria. EPLAN NEWS

48 New Features in the Page Navigator As this is a default technique in EPLAN, we will not be looking at this in greater detail. For more information on this, see the EPLAN online help in the section entitled "Filters". Specifying page filters via detailed selection To specify a page filter via the Select pages dialog, select the new Detailed selection menu item in the page navigator popup menu. Once you have made your settings in this dialog, the filter specified here is automatically stored in a scheme and given the name "Selection_<project name>". If you make another page selection via the detailed selection, the scheme "Selection_<project name>" is overwritten with the current settings. As the selection filter is saved to a scheme, it is retained even when the project is closed. Filters of this kind can be changed or deleted in the Filter dialog for the page navigator, like any other filter scheme. Tip: When printing / exporting pages, if you want to output only the current pages of an activated page filter, you have to activate the Selection option in the Print dialog, and you must not activate the Apply to entire project check box in the export dialogs. Other changes You can also access the default filter in the Copy pages dialog when copying pages between different projects. Both types of filter are saved according to user. This has made removal of the page filter via the Compress project dialog superfluous. For this reason, the Page filter setting has been removed from the Remove project data area in the compression settings. 48 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

49 New Features in the Page Navigator Selection in the Page List Takes Place when Scrolling Pages When you "scroll" through the pages of a project in the graphical editor, e.g. by clicking the [Image down] / [Image up] buttons, the page currently opened is now selected in the page navigator list. Benefit: The selection behavior in the list is now clearer, so navigation in the list takes place more quickly and more easily. With the Tree and List tabs, optimal views are available for various project planning tasks. Automatic Page Names when Inserting Pages or Macros When inserting copied pages or page macros, a functionality is now available to you with which the new page names are automatically suggested. To do this, you can activate the new check box Automatic page name in the Pages tab in the Adapt structure dialog. If this check box is enabled, the highest page number available for the structure is determined and the second-highest number / numbers suggested for the Page name column. Example: You have opened the EPLAN-DEMO sample project and selected the page =EB3+ET1/1 with the page description Power supply in the page navigator. You then insert a single-page macro. The page name of the created page macro is initially the default setting in the Adapt structure dialog on the Pages tab (e.g. 5). When you have activated the Automatic page name check box, the page name as the highest page number assigned in the partial structure is 8 is changed to 9. EPLAN NEWS

50 New Features in the Page Navigator Customizing the Displayed DT for Location Boxes when Inserting Pages or Macros If there are also location boxes on the copied pages or page macros, you can now not only change the page structure of the pages to be inserted, but also the displayed device tag of the location boxes before insertion. Benefit: The displayed device tags of location boxes can now be adapted during copying. This removes manual editing after insertion. Automatic adaptation of the device tags saves project planning time and ensures quality when working with macros. For this purpose, the Adjust page structure dialog has been extended and renamed Adapt structure. The fields and buttons for editing the page structure are now located in the Pages tab. If there are also location boxes in the page / page macro to be inserted, the Location boxes tab is also displayed. In the table under this tab, the displayed device tags for the source location boxes, their placement and the displayed target device tags for the location boxes are displayed. To change a displayed DT, click the appropriate field in the table and enter the new tag manually. 50 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

51 New Features in the Page Navigator If you have input structure identifiers which are not yet present in the target project, the familiar Place identifiers dialog is opened before insertion. If the settings are set to default for online numbering, numbering of the devices then takes place using the Insertion mode dialog. The components in the location boxes are also taken into account here. Determining Number of Pages / Page Name per Property The new menu item Number of pages / Page name per property in the Page menu allows you to determine the number and names of the pages which have the same value of a specific property. When you have selected this menu item, a reporting run is started which calculates the number and names of the pages with the same value and writes the result to the new Number of pages per property <11062> and Page names per property <11063> properties. Benefit: This functionality allows you to (e.g.) determine the number of pages in the project which have the same structure identifier for the "higher-level function" and print this information on the pages. This provides you with an easy overview of the scope of the individual documentation sections, even in larger projects. You define the property used for comparison in the report run via the project-specific settings for the pages (under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Pages). In the Settings: Pages dialog, the new Number of pages / Page name per property field is available. The Higher-level function (main identifier) property is set as the default here. You can use the [...] button next to the field to open the familiar Property selection dialog and select a different property. EPLAN NEWS

52 New Features in the Page Navigator Using the also new setting Automatically execute 'Number of pages / Page name per property' before generating the table of contents under this, you can set EPLAN so that the Number of pages / Page name per property report run is started automatically before generating and updating a table of contents. The two properties Number of pages per property and Page names per property can be displayed in the page properties for a page or entered in a plot frame as Special text - page properties. The semicolon is used by default as a separator for several output page names, as is in the case of combined values the character sequence "...". For this, the separators for this functionality are transferred from the form properties of the set table of contents form (properties: Separator for multiple values and Separator for combined values). For more information on this, see section "Combining overview reports" on page 228. To check these properties, a number of new messages is available to you in the settings for messages and error checking. The message class "Other" has been extended to include the messages "022014", "022015", and "022016". With the aid of these project checks, you can determine whether the property selected in the Number of pages / Page name per property setting is blank on one page of the project, whether the pages combined via this setting are not consecutive, or whether letters are contained in a page name. 52 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

53 Using Terminals Using Terminals Project editor: As a project editor, you must read this section before you work with the new version. Using Main Terminals If you insert a terminal, this component is now inserted by default as a main terminal. Benefit: The default use of main terminals offers complete device management for terminals. So you can now store device definitions for terminals in parts management and insert terminals as devices, for example. You can also carry out device selection at main terminals. Multi-level terminals that have been defined using main terminals are no longer separated if they are edited (moved, copied, etc.). The new function definitions for terminals mean that the field of application of a terminal can be defined with much greater precision and flexibility. You can edit saddle jumpers centrally in the Edit terminal strip dialog. This makes configuring a terminal strip clear, quick, and easy. The changed behavior is indicated by selection of the new Main terminal check box on the Terminal tab in the properties dialog. EPLAN NEWS

54 Using Terminals If this check box is selected, the terminal is a main terminal and behaves in the same way as a main function. For example, if parts with function templates are assigned to a main terminal of this type, these function templates are now also displayed in the terminal strip navigator. Parts can be entered at a main terminal if it has the representation type "Multiline". If the check box is not selected, the terminal is an auxiliary terminal. In this case, the Parts tab is hidden in the properties dialog and no parts can be stored. If a part with function templates is entered at a main terminal, these templates overlay the terminal auxiliary functions belonging to the main terminal. 54 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

55 Using Terminals Managing terminal strips Terminal strips are managed as before using terminal strip definitions. However, these now only contain specific terminal strip parts, e.g. labels, rails, etc. However, the terminal parts are now stored at the individual main terminals rather than at the terminal strip definition as before. In this case, the terminal strip is divided into "independent areas", with each main terminal defining an independent area. Managing terminal strips as in the previous versions If the entire terminal strip is to be defined purely by the terminal strip definition as previously (before EPLAN 2.0), then the terminal strip can only consist of one independent area. This means that either the terminal strip must contain no main terminals or the property Do not use main terminals must be selected for the terminal strip definition. If this new property with ID <20229> is selected for a terminal strip definition, main terminals are treated in the same way as "normal" terminals. The function templates of the parts entered at the terminals are not used, but the parts are output in reports. Note: This procedure is only supported by the program for compatibility reasons. We recommend managing parts at the main terminals in future. Definition of multi-level terminals In EPLAN, multi-level terminals are displayed with "normal" terminal symbols. Terminals inserted into the schematic are part of a multi-level terminal if they carry the same DT, they directly follow one another in the sorting order, and if they have ever increasing values for the level. EPLAN NEWS

56 Using Terminals The changed behavior when inserting terminals has to be taken into account in the definition of multi-level terminals too. Each multi-level terminal can only contain one main terminal. The other associated terminals must be auxiliary terminals. To define a terminal as a multi-level terminal when editing or inserting terminals, enter a value > 0 in the Level field on the Terminal tab in the properties dialog. The main terminal can be the terminal with either the lowest or the highest level. Deselect the Main terminal check box if it is an auxiliary terminal. When you click [OK] to close the properties dialog, the value set for the terminal is accepted. The level set is shown in the terminal strip navigator tree in square brackets (e.g. [1] for the lowest level). Previously the levels of a multi-level terminal could only be sorted in ascending order. However, the use of main terminals means that the levels can now be sorted in descending order too: If the main terminal is level "1", then the levels are sorted in ascending order. The function templates of the associated part are moved into ascending order. If the main terminal level is > 1, then the levels are sorted in descending order. The function templates of the associated part are moved into descending order. Storing multi-level terminals in parts management Multi-level terminals with a part number and multiple function templates can be created in parts management. The multi-level terminal then placed in the schematic consists of a main terminal (with the part number and function templates) and multiple auxiliary terminal functions. The main terminal should normally be assigned to the first function template. If this is not the case, this is reported by the new check run. 56 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

57 Using Terminals A multi-level terminal defined in this way is an independent device for which a device selection is also possible. Converting older projects and macros When you open projects and insert macros from older EPLAN versions, they are automatically converted. This has the following consequences: For terminal strip definitions The new property Do not use main terminals <20229> is activated at terminal strip definitions from older projects. A terminal strip of this type is only defined by the terminal strip definition. Main terminals are then treated in the same way as auxiliary terminals. For terminals Terminals with level "0" or "1" are converted into main terminals when they are opened or inserted. At the corresponding terminals the Main terminal check box on the first tab is selected. Terminals with higher level values become auxiliary terminals. At terminals for which the Main function property was enabled, the corresponding check box on the Symbol / function data tab is deselected. This automatic customization safeguards the previous behavior in terminal editing (before EPLAN 2.0) and you can generate reports for your old projects in the usual way. Notes: When you open older projects, a prompt now asks you whether you wish to convert the project to the current version (see page 69). Note that the terminals / terminal strip definitions are converted even if you close this prompt with [No]. EPLAN NEWS

58 Using Terminals If you have already consistently entered the terminal parts at the terminals in your old projects, then all you need to do is to deselect the Do not use main terminals check box at the terminal strip definitions in order to activate the new behavior. If function templates are stored in parts management for the parts entered at the terminals, these are displayed immediately and the terminal functions are overlaid by the templates. Terminal Strip and Terminal Accessories Up to the present version, the terminal strip accessories were stored as parts at the terminal strip definition. If you now use main terminals, then you enter the parts for the accessories at the appropriate main terminal. A distinction is made here between accessories for terminals and for terminal strips: Alignable accessories Alignable accessories are attached to the terminal strip. They can be positioned before or after a terminal. These accessories are entered as parts at the appropriate main terminal. Non-alignable accessories Non-alignable accessories belong to either a terminal or a terminal strip and are attached to this, e.g. labels. These accessories are entered as parts at the terminal or at the terminal strip definition. Non-alignable accessories are not shown in reports or in the Edit terminal strip dialog. Defining alignable accessories for terminals Previously certain product subgroups of the terminal accessories were given a fixed definition of "alignable" in EPLAN. In the new version you can now choose whether an accessory part for terminals is alignable or not. 58 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

59 Using Terminals In order for an accessory part to be reported as an alignable accessory, the Alignable check box on the Terminal data tab must be selected for this part in parts management. Terminals are always alignable, i.e., for the "Terminals" product subgroup the Alignable check box is selected and cannot be changed. Possible parts for alignable accessories A part can be an alignable accessory if it belongs to one of the following product subgroups: Cover Terminator General End angle Terminal label Strip label Cross-connector Rails Plug housing Plug accessories Test accessories Mounting rail Partition Undefined Other labels Tools. If you select the product subgroups "Terminator", "End angle", or "Partition" for a part, the Alignable check box is selected by default. For all other product subgroups it is deselected by default. EPLAN NEWS

60 Using Terminals All other parts are simple parts in the terminal or terminal strip and are not represented as accessories in reports or in the Edit terminal strip dialog. Note: If you convert an older parts database (pre-version 2.0), the Alignable check box is selected for all parts in the "Terminals" product group which belong to one of the following product subgroups: Cover Terminator End angle Terminal Strip label Rails Plug accessories Test accessories Mounting rail Partition Other labels Tools. New Features in Editing Terminal Strips All settings and data for a highlighted terminal strip are shown in the Edit terminal strip dialog. The new features in this dialog are listed below. Assigning alignable accessories when editing terminal strips The changed behavior in terminal editing is also evident in the Edit terminal strip dialog. A check box in the new Main terminal column shows you whether a given terminal is a main terminal. 60 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

61 Using Terminals In connection with the new features for alignable accessories, the previous popup menu items Add strip accessories, Display strip accessories, and Delete strip accessories have been renamed accordingly. Displaying alignable accessories In order for alignable accessories to be displayed in the dialog, the Alignable accessories visible option must be enabled. If you select Popup menu > Alignable accessories visible, the accessories are shown in a separate row. Adding alignable accessories If you open the Part selection dialog via Popup menu > Add alignable accessories, then only parts from the product subgroups which also qualify as alignable accessories are displayed. Once you have selected a part, the accessory is inserted as a separate hatched row below the current cursor position. You can move the row as you wish. In the Row column a small arrow indicates the position in which the accessory is added, before or after a terminal. Using the new Alignable accessories following popup menu item you can choose whether to add the accessory before or after a terminal. When you click [Apply] the accessories are assigned to the terminal and the parts are entered at the terminal. The terminal and accessories and the function templates belonging to a terminal are now grouped together in a block similarly to the multi-level terminals and can be moved together. The row numbers are grouped together in one field in the Row column. Disconnecting accessories / multi-level terminals To disconnect a block of this type, select Popup menu > Disconnect. This allows you to move an accessory or a level of a multi-level terminal to another terminal. EPLAN NEWS

62 Using Terminals Note: If you wish to continue using the previous behavior in terminal editing (before EPLAN version 2.0), then you can continue to enter accessories at the terminal strip definition. To do this activate the Do not use main terminals property on the terminal strip. In this case, the parts added in the Edit terminal strip dialog are entered at the terminal strip definition. The rows for the accessories and the direction arrows for sorting are unaffected. Information about terminal connection points In addition to the targets, now you can also display information about the terminal connection points. The Edit terminal strip dialog contains the following two new columns for this purpose: Terminal connection point (external) Terminal connection point (internal). The connection point designation in these columns indicates the terminal connection point to which a given external / internal target is connected. Note: The Terminal connection point (external) and Terminal connection point (internal) columns are not displayed by default in the Edit terminal strip dialog to start with. Instead they must first be added by selecting Popup menu > Configure columns. Generating saddle jumpers manually In the Edit terminal strip dialog you can now also define saddle jumpers via the popup menu. Using the Manual saddle jumper menu item you can generate a manual saddle jumper between the highlighted terminals or remove an existing one. 62 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

63 Using Terminals The menu item is only active if multiple adjacent terminals are highlighted. If manual saddle jumpers have already been defined for some (but not all) terminals within the highlighted block, a continuous saddle jumper is generated. If manual saddle jumpers have already been defined for all terminals within the highlighted block, the saddle jumper for the highlighted area is removed; it is retained for the terminals included in the non-highlighted area. External / internal saddle jumpers A distinction is now made in EPLAN between external and internal saddle jumpers in the same way as for wire jumpers. Existing displays in the Edit terminal strip dialog or in the reports are not affected by this. The existing Saddle jumpers column in the Edit terminal strip dialog and the Graphic for saddle jumpers placeholder in the reports continue to group external and internal saddle jumpers together. If you want to know whether a saddle jumper is external or internal, you can show the information in the editing dialog using the two new columns: Saddle jumpers (external) and Saddle jumpers (internal). And for output to reports (e.g. terminal diagram, terminal connection diagram, etc.) the two new properties Graphic for external saddle jumpers <13066> and Graphic for internal saddle jumpers <13065> have been added to the Terminal properties placeholder element. EPLAN NEWS

64 Using Terminals Notes: The Saddle jumpers (external) and Saddle jumpers (internal) columns are not displayed by default in the Edit terminal strip dialog to start with. Instead they must be added first by selecting Popup menu > Configure columns. Please note that this additional feature means that it is possible to display or to output a saddle jumper twice i.e. as both a "normal" and an external / internal saddle jumper. New Features in the Terminal Strip Navigator Display in the navigator The main and auxiliary terminals of a terminal strip are displayed in the navigators (device navigator, terminal strip navigator) at the same hierarchy level. Main terminals as is usual for main functions are indicated by a "shopping cart" in front of the terminal. The levels of multi-level terminals are shown here in square brackets (e.g. [1] for the lowest level). Generating new terminals The popup menu of the terminal strip navigator now includes the menu option New terminals (devices). The dialog that this option opens allows you to generate multiple unplaced terminals for a new or existing terminal strip in accordance with a defined numbering pattern. Unlike the New functions menu option, a function definition is not selected in the Generate terminals (devices) dialog. Instead a part is entered in the Part number field or selected using the [...] button. In order for a terminal to be able to be inserted in this way, the selected part must have at least one terminal function template. Once you have clicked [OK] to close the dialog, the terminals are generated from the function templates of the selected part, the terminal designations being determined by the numbering pattern. 64 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

65 Using Terminals Sorting terminals of a terminal strip The new Sort terminal strip menu item means that you can now automatically sort all terminals of a terminal strip according to certain criteria in the terminal strip navigator too. The sort options offered in the submenu correspond to the known functionality for sorting terminals from the Edit terminal strip dialog. If you highlight a terminal in the navigator, the entire terminal strip is sorted according to the selected sort criterion. In this way you can now delete terminal sort codes, for example in the terminal strip navigator, by selecting Popup menu > Sort terminal strip > Default. Note: Multi-level terminals and other independent areas are retained when the terminals are sorted. The properties of the first terminal in the area (usually the main terminal) influence the sort order. The main terminal always has the lowest sort code within its independent area. New Function Definitions for Terminals The new EPLAN version offers many new function definitions for terminals. These new function definitions have been greatly simplified, and their structure is improved in comparison to those previously used. They offer greater variability in terms of numbers of connection points and can map up to eight connection points and more. We recommend that you no longer use the old function definitions for terminals in project planning. If you use the function definition library supplied with this version, the "old" function definitions are no longer offered for selection in the Function definitions dialog. EPLAN NEWS

66 Using Terminals New properties for characterizing terminals The new function definitions for terminals mean that terminals are described by the number of their connection points and by predefined connection points for saddle jumpers. To enable you to characterize inserted terminals more precisely, the following new properties are included in the Settings category in the properties dialog: Terminal category <20230> The drop-down list for this property allows you to characterize a terminal more precisely. A terminal could be a feed-through terminal, isolating terminal, switching terminal, diode terminal, etc. Terminal with LED <20231> You can use the check box for this property to indicate that a terminal has an LED. Terminal opened <20232> You can use the check box for this property to indicate that the terminal is open. You can show the state of an isolating terminal in this way, for example. All of these properties are available in terminal reports and can be used there to output terminal graphics using the form property Assignment: Property / value to graphic [1-10]. Online Numbering of Terminal Sort Codes Existing terminal sort codes can now be taken into account in online numbering. In this way on insertion of macros and copies, the sort codes in the terminal strips existing in the source are determined and the sort code of the newly inserted terminals incremented. To this end the Numbering formats dialog on the Designations tab now includes a Terminal sort codes check box. 66 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

67 Using Terminals Note: This setting only affects existing terminal sort codes on insertion of macros and copies. On symbol insertion or on creation of terminal strips in the terminal strip navigator, sort codes are not generated automatically. If the check box is selected and if in addition one of the numbering options is chosen in the Insertion mode dialog, then existing sort codes are automatically numbered on insertion. The highest sort code in the terminal strip is identified and incremented by one. Therefore, the newly inserted terminals are always sorted at the end of the terminal strip. If several terminals have a sort code, their sequence is retained by ascending sort code values. The numbering does not separate consecutive terminals. If the check box is deselected, the sort codes of the inserted terminals are not changed. The terminals are then sorted between the existing terminals according to their sort code or terminal designation. This can mean that terminals that were previously consecutive (e.g. multi-level terminals) can be separated. Online numbering of terminal and pin designations If you copy and insert terminals / pins, then the inserted terminals / pins are now numbered in the logical sequence and not in the graphical sequence any more. In this case, multi-level terminals are now retained in online numbering rather than being separated. EPLAN NEWS

68 Using Terminals Extended Reports for Terminals Output terminal connection point in addition to target In reports for terminals (terminal diagrams, terminal connection diagrams) you can now choose to output information about the terminal connection points to the targets too. To enable this to be taken into account in the report, the new placeholder elements Terminal connection point external and Terminal connection point internal are now available for the corresponding forms. These placeholder elements allow you to output the connection point designation of the terminal connected to a given external or internal target, for example. Terminal report generation in relation to connection points or targets Using the new form property Connection point-specific output <13113> you can determine whether terminals in terminal diagrams or terminal connection diagrams are output in relation to connection points or to targets. If this property is activated, a row is generated in terminal diagrams and terminal connection diagrams for each pair of connection points. Terminals with more than two connection points are automatically split across multiple rows. In addition, terminal connection points that are not connected are output. If the form property Connection point-specific output is disabled, terminals are reported in relation to targets. In target-specific reports the external and internal targets of the terminal are output. 68 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

69 Optimized Database Structure for Projects Optimized Database Structure for Projects Project editor: As a project editor, you must read this section before you work with the new version. The new version of the EPLAN platform supports a new, improved database structure for projects. Benefit: The additional data and new functions of the new EPLAN version can only be supported with the new database structure. The consequences for the opening of projects are as follows: New projects New projects are now always created in the new database structure. It does not matter how the projects were generated (e.g. via project management, via data transfer, or via the EPLAN Engineering Center). Old projects In order for old projects to be edited in the new EPLAN version, the application of the new database structure is absolutely essential for these projects. When you open an old project in EPLAN, a prompt is displayed asking whether you want to convert the project to the new version. If you confirm this prompt with [Yes], the project is updated. The project is given the new database structure and is then opened. This process also creates a backup copy of your project in the project directory. The name of this backup project includes the old project name and the conversion date. EPLAN NEWS

70 Optimized Database Structure for Projects If you choose [No], the project retains the old database structure. Although the project is opened it cannot be edited, only viewed. In this case the project can continue to be opened and edited with old EPLAN versions. The prompt will appear each time you open the project in the new EPLAN version. Warning: New projects and old projects that have been updated will no longer be able to be opened with old EPLAN versions. 70 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

71 Restoring Deleted Projects from the Recycle Bin Restoring Deleted Projects from the Recycle Bin If you now delete a local project, the project file and project directory, with all the data in them, are moved to the recycle bin of the operating system. The relevant project may as is usual with Microsoft be restored from the recycle bin. Benefit: The option of restoring accidentally deleted projects via the Windows recycle bin provides you with protection against unintentional loss of project data. Occasional users get up and running with projects more safely and more quickly. Here, it does not matter whether a project is deleted in project management or by selecting Project > Delete. This also applies to revised EPLAN projects (*.elr). Even when overwriting projects (e.g. when copying or renaming), the project already in existence will be moved to the recycle bin. Note: If you have deleted a project from a network drive, then you can no longer restore that project due to the behavior of the operating system. EPLAN NEWS

72 PDF Export in Archiving Format PDF Export in Archiving Format When exporting PDFs it is now also possible to output PDF files in the archiving format PDF/A. This format is a standard for the long-term archiving of electronic documents in accordance with the ISO standard. Benefit: The PDF/A archiving format safeguards the long-term display and use of your documentation. A new user-specific setting has been added to enable you to output PDF files in the archiving format. Select Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > PDF export. Then in the settings dialog switch to the General tab and select the new Archiving format PDF/A check box. If this check box is selected, then the output data is saved in PDF/A-1b format. In this case, it is not possible to generate a write-protected PDF. You cannot select the corresponding Read-only check box. The generated PDF files still have the *.pdf extension. Notes: Note that if the Archiving format PDF/A setting is selected, 3D models and linked documents belonging to the project are not output on export. If they are opened with Adobe Reader 9, such documents are displayed by default in PDF/A mode. In this mode you cannot use the hyperlinks output by EPLAN to navigate within the PDF document. If PDF/A mode is disabled, then the hyperlinks in the PDF are available for use again. 72 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

73 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists The management of accessory parts has been optimized with the new EPLAN version. Individual accessory parts and / or accessory lists can be assigned to a main part via a separate tab. If accessory parts are stored for a main part, they too are offered for selection in device selection. Benefit: Accessory lists are useful when you are selecting optional parts. In addition, EPLAN shows you absolutely essential parts during project planning. In this way, you can assign accessories more quickly and more accurately. Managing Accessory Parts in Parts Management Clear identification of parts as accessories Accessory parts are now clearly identified in parts management. The part types "Assembly", "Component", and "Module" are now available for all parts on the new Accessories tab. EPLAN NEWS

74 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Identification of a part as an accessory is no longer carried out using the Accessory code property but on the Accessories tab. To clearly identify a part as an accessory, select the Accessories check box on this tab. A part for which the check box is deselected is a main part. You can distinguish between main and accessory parts as follows: Accessory part The Accessories check box is selected. Accessory parts and accessory lists cannot be assigned to this type of part on the Accessories tab. The table of accessory parts is grayed out accordingly. Main part The Accessories check box is deselected. Both individual accessory parts and accessory lists can be assigned to a main part on the Accessories tab. Displaying accessory parts in parts management Using field-based filters for accessory parts The "Accessories" filter scheme is used by default for field-based filters. If this filter scheme is selected, then the Accessories property <22054> is used as a filter criterion and only accessory parts are displayed on the Tree, List and Combination tabs of parts management. In addition to the accessory parts, the tree view also shows data from the hierarchy levels "Construction", "Connection points", etc. If you want to know the main parts for which a particular accessory part is used, then you can use the new Is used as an accessory property <22963>. To do this, create a new filter scheme with this property as the criterion and enter the part number of the accessory in question as the value. 74 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

75 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Note: You can also access the field-based filter schemes for parts management from the part master data navigator and from the Part selection dialog. Accessory parts in tree view To make it easier to distinguish accessory parts from "normal" parts in the parts management and parts selection tree views, etc., you can adapt the tree configuration accordingly. To do this, select the Accessories property <22054> as an additional main node when editing the tree configuration. Parts for which the Accessories check box has been selected are then displayed under an Accessories hierarchy level. Parts which have not been identified in this way are listed under a Main part hierarchy level. Example: If the tree configuration has been adapted in this way, a superior "Product group" hierarchy level is subdivided into the "Main part" and "Accessories" hierarchy levels. The illustration shows an example of the subdivision of the "Relays, contactors" product group. EPLAN NEWS

76 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Here the default tree configuration has simply been extended. The Accessories property was added to the bottom of the properties list in the Tree configuration Main nodes dialog. Using accessory lists In EPLAN parts management, you can now create various lists for accessory parts. These accessory lists make it easy to manage alternative accessory parts. Using these lists you can select a part from a list of possible alternatives in device selection. Example: You want to create an illuminated pushbutton. The main element a component is the rim of the button that is used to fix it in the front of the enclosure, and a contact that is already screwed on. The following colored caps are then created in an accessory list: Red Green Yellow Blue Orange. This list is defined as a necessary list, i.e., a part must be selected from this list for the pushbutton to be complete. Creating an accessory list Accessory lists form their own highest hierarchy level in the parts management tree view. To create a list of this type, select the "Accessory list" entry on the Tree tab and then choose Popup menu > New. The two tabs Accessory list and Parts then appear on the right-hand side of parts management. 76 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

77 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists On the Accessory list tab enter a unique name and a description for the accessory list. This name appears in the parts management tree view and in the selection of accessory parts on the Accessories tab, for example. The other two fields, Creator and Last change, are filled out automatically by EPLAN. On the Parts tab, choose the accessory parts to be included in the accessory list. Click the (New) button on the toolbar above the table to generate a new line. In the Part number field you can select parts in the same way as for an assembly. To do so, click [...] in this field. The Part selection dialog opens. Only the previously defined accessory parts are displayed here. Choose the accessories you wish to include. Once you have created an accessory list, you can assign this list to a main part as an accessory. Exporting and importing accessory lists You can export and import accessory lists in text format, in XML format, and in CSV format. The new file type CSV for accessory lists is available for data exchange in CSV format. If this file type is selected in the Export records dialog, all settings relating to the part type and trade are grayed out and the data for all accessory lists are exported. To export the data for a specific accessory list, highlight it in the "Accessory list" hierarchy level and then select Popup menu > Export. Assigning accessories to a main part To assign an accessory to a main part, click the (New) button on the Accessories tab. A new row then appears in the accessories table. EPLAN NEWS

78 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Part number / name: Click [...] in the relevant field in this column to select a part or part variant from part selection. If the field-based filter "Accessories" is selected, only defined accessory parts are displayed. You can also access the accessory lists here. Required: Select the appropriate check box in this column if the part is to contain a required accessory part. Variant: The corresponding variant number of the part is displayed in this column for an accessory part. You can overwrite this if required. Part type: The Part type ("Component" or "Accessory list") is entered automatically. The field is for information only and is grayed out. The accessory parts stored here are displayed in the device selection for the main part and can be selected there as accessory parts. Data transfer on update of the parts database If the parts database is in an older version, you are prompted to update the database on opening parts management. If you answer this prompt with [Yes], the parts database is updated. If you click [No], then the parts database is not updated. The parts management data fields will then remain empty and cannot be edited. Other program components which also access the data in the parts database (e.g. device selection) will output an equivalent message if the parts database does not correspond to the current version. 78 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

79 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists When the database is updated, a data transfer for accessory parts from the "Relays, contactors" product group takes place in the background. All parts from this product group which have an accessory code and no "Coil" type function template are accepted as accessories. This means that on the new Accessories tab the check box of the same name is selected for these parts. The parts to which this applies can be seen in the System messages dialog. Note: As automatic recognition of other accessory parts is not possible during the update, accessory parts from other product groups will be disregarded when the data is transferred and will have to be assigned manually. Accessory code in the list view To enable you to identify the former accessory parts more easily after a data transfer, the Accessory code property <22025> can be used in the column configuration for the parts management list. If you select the associated check box in the Column configuration dialog, the "old" accessory code appears in the list. You can then select the corresponding parts in the list and mark them as accessory parts using the Accessories tab. Accessory Parts in Device Selection The changes made in parts management in relation to accessory parts and the addition of accessory lists have implications for device selection too. These are described in the next section. EPLAN NEWS

80 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Changes in the "Device selection" Dialog To make it easier to distinguish the parts in the list on the left-hand side from the accessory parts, the name of this list has been changed to Main parts. This list displays all the parts from the Parts management module that are suitable for the selected device and for which the Accessories check box on the Accessories tab is not selected. If you select a main part in the list on the left-hand side, then all associated accessory parts are now displayed on the right-hand side. These accessory parts must have previously been assigned to the main part in parts management by entering them in the table on the Accessories tab there. The following new features have also been introduced in the Device selection dialog: New device selection In a new device selection the most recently selected parts are now highlighted in the Main parts list. Devices with the "graphic" function definition For devices with function definitions from the "Graphic" group, all parts which have function templates with the "graphic" function definition are displayed when the device is selected. In addition, all parts without function templates and accessory parts are displayed. This allows you to select parts from the "Mechanics" generic product group, for example. Parts without function templates In the new EPLAN version parts without function templates are now also displayed in the Selected parts: Functions / templates list. These may be accessory parts or parts which have been assigned to the device using part selection, for example. 80 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

81 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Device selection for special functions Functions which are only needed for defining a device are handled in a special way in device selection. These include black boxes, PLC boxes, terminal strip definitions, plug definitions, cable definitions, and shields. If device selection is performed for a device which consists only of such functions and is otherwise empty, then all parts which have at least one function template for this function are displayed when the device is selected. Example: For example, if you carry out a device selection at an empty PLC box, only parts which have a function template with the function definition "PLC box" (plus any number of function templates for the PLC connection points) are displayed. Parts which only have function templates for the PLC connection points and none for the PLC box, however, are not displayed. Benefit: A device selection can also be carried out now for "empty" PLC boxes, terminal strip definitions, etc. As the most recently selected main parts are highlighted at the same time, an appropriate accessory part can be selected immediately. This makes device selection faster. Selecting accessories In order to be able to transfer an accessory part to the Selected parts: Functions / templates list, you must first select a part number for the accessory in question. To do this click in the Selection column in the appropriate accessory row. To transfer an accessory part with a part number to the Selected parts: Functions / templates list (and hence to select it), click as before on the button (Select accessory part), for example. EPLAN NEWS

82 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Note: The procedure described above applies if the default settings are selected for device selection. If the Overwrite old parts with current selection check box is selected in the Settings: Device selection dialog, then a main part can be selected in the Device selection dialog with just one click. A part included in the Selected parts: Functions / templates list is deleted and replaced with the highlighted main part. The same applies when selecting an accessory. As soon as a part number is entered for an accessory, the accessory too is accepted with just one click. Accessory lists as accessories If the highlighted accessory is an accessory list, clicking in the Selection column opens a selection dialog. Here you can select the part number of the accessory part you require. Required accessory If you have defined an accessory part as "required" in parts management, then the part number of this accessory is automatically copied to the Selection column. For "required" accessory lists the part number is not copied automatically. In the Selection column click on [...] to open a selection dialog in which you can select the part you require. When you click [OK] to close device selection, the part numbers for the selected main and accessory parts are copied to the Parts tab of the properties dialog. Note: If the parts database is in an older version, you are prompted to update the database on opening device selection. If you click [Yes], the parts database is updated and you can access new accessory parts in the device selection. If you click [No], the device selection is still opened but no accessory parts appear in the Accessories list. 82 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

83 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Check Run for Missing, Required Accessory Parts You can use the new check run to check devices to determine whether the required accessory parts assigned to a main part are present. If a main part is entered on the Parts tab for a device but the required accessory part is missing, then this message is displayed. Changes to the Device Selection Settings Changes have also been made to the Settings: Device selection dialog, which can be opened from device selection for example using the [Settings] button. The Use previous run setting has been renamed and its function has changed. Old name: Use previous run New name: Automatic device selection If the check box for this setting is selected, during device selection the data for the part entered at the function are compared with the criteria set for device selection. The Device selection dialog is only opened if a new device selection is required (because an error such as over-allocation has been found) or if no part has been entered at the function yet. If on the other hand the part meets the criteria set for device selection, the Device selection dialog is not opened. If you are carrying out a device selection for multiple devices, then the devices to which an appropriate part has already been assigned are skipped. If an appropriate part has already been entered at a function but the technical data for the part is missing (e.g. because the part number was entered manually or via external editing), then this part data is automatically added during device selection. The data for the function templates stored at the parts is also transferred. EPLAN NEWS

84 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists If the check box is not selected, the Device selection dialog is opened for all selected devices, regardless of whether an appropriate part has already been assigned. The automatic addition of technical data for an existing part is not possible in this case. Note: If this check box is selected, the Device selection dialog is opened under the following conditions: No part has been entered at the device. The Use available function data check box is selected. The function data differs from the corresponding parts data. The device is under-allocated with functions. The Minimize unused functions check box is not selected. The device is over-allocated with functions. The Minimize unused functions check box is selected. The device is over-allocated with functions, and the number of unused functions exceeds the value set in the Number of unused functions field. Consider accessories: This check box no longer exists. Now if you highlight a main part in device selection, all associated accessory parts are always displayed. Only consider main function: This check box is deselected by default. In this case only those devices that cover all functions, i.e. both the main function and all auxiliary functions, are now offered. Devices that match the selected main function and have any number of accessories are also offered. (No check is made as to whether the accessory matches the functions.) If the check box is selected, then as before all parts that match the selected main function are offered, regardless of which auxiliary functions are available. 84 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

85 Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists Use available function data: In the tabs under this check box you can specify which available function data should be used as selection criteria for device selection. Some new criteria have been added on the various tabs. For general devices, for example, the Connection point description, Plug DT, and Relevant to safety check boxes have been added. The Wire tab is also new. This new feature has been introduced for the device selection for wires (see section on page 339). EPLAN NEWS

86 New "EPLAN Pro Panel" Add-On New "EPLAN Pro Panel" Add-On The EPLAN Pro Panel add-on is used for placing electrical engineering and fluid power devices from the EPLAN project, from the EPLAN parts management, or from the EPLAN Data Portal, as required. In conjunction with mechanical components such as cable ducts, mounting rails, mounting panels, or entire enclosures, EPLAN Pro Panel simplifies the construction of complex 3D mounting layouts dramatically. Benefit: EPLAN Pro Panel makes it easy to construct complex 3D mounting layouts. The user is supported by means of intelligent placement aids, implicit locked areas, information on minimum distances, predefined handles, and mounting surfaces of the components used known as EPLAN etouch Technology. 86 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

87 New "EPLAN Pro Panel" Add-On Qualified production and mounting diagrams in conformance to standards can be created automatically on the basis of the 3D model information. The correct display of hidden lines and associated customizations to the drawing if changes are made to the 3D structure are both taken into consideration. Finally, the EPLAN reporting process allows detailed legends to be added to drawings and order lists and bills of materials to be created for the pre-cut part, even for variable-length parts. Note: The EPLAN Pro Panel add-on is available as an option for EPLAN Electric P8 Compact, EPLAN Electric P8 Select, and EPLAN Electric P8 Professional, and for EPLAN Fluid Compact and EPLAN Fluid. Some mechanical components can have several individually selectable mounting surfaces, allowing the placement of other items. These include mounting panels, doors, walls, profiles, and also electrical engineering and fluid power devices, which are represented by a 3D graphical macro. Other mechanical components have only an internally defined mounting surface for devices, which cannot be changed and which are therefore not shown in the tree view of the layout space navigator. These components include mounting rails and pole rails of busbar systems. You can generate 2D model views of the mounting panels and enclosures mounted in the layout space, and these are saved on project pages. These model views can include dimensions and other information and can be used as production documents. Reports in the form of enclosure legends and bills of material help you with calculating and planning materials requirements. EPLAN NEWS

88 New "EPLAN Pro Panel" Add-On The following two new navigators are the central tools for the project planning of 3D mounting layouts: The layout space navigator lists the layout spaces and their structure. The 3D mounting layout navigator lists the intended equipment items. More details about the functions of this add-on can be found in "Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel" in the complete PDF version of the News (see page 342). Extensive and more detailed information can also be found in the online help in the "EPLAN Pro Panel" section. Note: Just like pages, layout spaces defined in EPLAN Pro Panel belong to an EPLAN project. If layout spaces are defined in a project, then they can be opened in the EPLAN platform and viewed in 3D even without a license for the EPLAN Pro Panel add-on. In this case you can use the new Layout space menu option in the menu bar with its corresponding functions and the layout space navigator. The same applies to EPLAN View. 88 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

89 Protected Devices Protected Devices Devices can now be protected from being changed in EPLAN. You can use protected devices to identify already completed parts of a plant, for example. A graphical editing operation such as "Delete pages", for example, will not remove these devices from the project. They are retained as unplaced devices and continue to be displayed in the navigators and reports (e.g. parts lists). Benefit: Protected devices allow you to protect information stored on items and components in preplanning from being accidentally deleted. The protected devices are a fixed element of your project and information stored there is permanently retained. Multiple entries are avoided. All preplanning information is available to all project participants for the entire lifetime of the project, ensuring transparency and high-quality project documentation. The new Protected function property <20475> is assigned to protect a placed or unplaced function. This protection mainly applies to parts that have been assigned to a function, but it also prevents the function from being deleted. The protection also extends to any function templates that may be stored on a part. It is also possible to assign protection to all functions of a device simultaneously, thereby protecting the entire device. You can find out more in the following sections: "Assigning Protection" on page 90 and "Using Protected Devices" on page 93. In addition, the new Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main function property allows you to edit the entire device when working with macros and copy functions. More information on this is provided in the section "Managing Unplaced Auxiliary Functions at the Main Function" on page 94. EPLAN NEWS

90 Protected Devices Note: Device groups are not protected as a single entity; each device in a device group must be protected separately. Assigning Protection You can protect individual functions and connections or a complete device. Protecting functions or connections To protect a function, first select it in the graphical editor or in a navigator dialog. You should select a connection to be protected in the connections navigator. Then open the appropriate properties dialog and switch to the first tab (e.g. Plug definition, Connection, etc.). In the Properties table, display the Protected function property. To do this, click (New) and select the property in the Property selection dialog. Select the check box for the Protected function property. As soon as you select this check box, the function or connection is protected. In this case, the function can no longer be deleted from the project. In addition, assigned parts can no longer be used. This means that device selection or part selection or actions such as "Exchange part", "Edit part", or "Add part" cannot be executed. 90 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

91 Protected Devices Protecting devices Under Project data > Devices there are now two new menu options, Activate protection and Deactivate protection, which can be used to switch protection of one or more selected devices on or off. Protection for a device can only be switched on or off at a main function or main terminal. Highlight one or more appropriate functions in the graphical editor or in a navigator dialog and then select Project data > Devices > Activate protection. All functions of the device are then given the property Protected function. The device or individual functions of the device cannot be deleted. The parts assigned to the device cannot be changed. In this case too, a device selection or part selection or actions such as "Exchange part", "Edit part", or "Add part" are not possible. EPLAN NEWS

92 Protected Devices Changing properties With both protected functions or connections and protected devices, it is still possible to change properties on the first tab, <Function category> or Connection. Tip: You can extend device protection by defining the check type "Prevent errors" for the new check run In this way, you can prevent the over-allocation of a protected device, the addition of further functions, or the modification of data transferred to the functions from the parts. Displaying protected devices in the navigators In the tree view of the navigators protected functions are indicated by an orange circle. The following icons are displayed for protected functions: Icon Meaning Protected, placed main function. Protected, unplaced main function. Protected, placed auxiliary function. Protected, unplaced auxiliary function. Filter for project data In the navigators, you can also filter by protected or unprotected functions. In the criteria selection for the various filters you can now access the new property Protected function <20475> for this purpose. The new property can also be displayed as an additional column in the list view in the navigators (via Popup menu > Configure columns). Removing device protection To remove protection for one or more devices again, highlight the corresponding main functions or main terminals in the graphical editor or in a navigator dialog and then select Project data > Devices > Deactivate protection. 92 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

93 Protected Devices This removes the device protection. The Protected function property is deactivated again for all functions of this device. Using Protected Devices To use the functions of protected devices when editing schematics, you must assign the Protected function property to all functions of a device that you wish to protect. A new check run, number , allows you to determine whether a device contains both protected and unprotected functions. Creating macros / copies of protected devices If you create a macro or a copy in the schematic of a protected device, then the Protected function property is stored with the main function in the macro or copy. When you insert such a macro or copy, the Protected function property is inserted along with the main function. Deleting functions Protected functions cannot be deleted completely from the project; only the placement can be deleted. This has the following implications: For the graphical editor: If you delete a placed, protected function in the graphical editor, only the placement is deleted. This means that after deletion protected functions remain as unplaced functions in the project and in the bill of materials. For the navigator dialogs: Placed or unplaced protected functions cannot be deleted in the navigator dialogs. In the Edit menu and in the Popup menu, the Delete menu option is disabled for protected functions. EPLAN NEWS

94 Protected Devices Using existing functions / assigning functions The "Use existing" option for functions in the DT selection dialog is not available for protected functions. Similarly, a device tag or function cannot be assigned to a protected function in the graphical editor. The target function must always be an unprotected function. If on the other hand the protected function is the source for a "Use existing" or "Assign" action with regard to an unprotected function, the editable properties of the source function (together with the Protected function property) are copied to the target function in their entirety and the source function is then deleted. Actions in the graphical editor For actions in the graphical editor, e.g. moving or inserting additional functions, for which DT adoption would be possible, the original full DT is not changed by protected functions. If a protected device is affected by such an action, then the identifying device tags of all components on the page in question are protected against a DT change. Managing Unplaced Auxiliary Functions at the Main Function The new property Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main function <20476> is now available at main functions. If this property is activated at a main function, the assigned, unplaced auxiliary functions are managed together with the main function. For auxiliary functions this property shows the value of the associated main function. Benefit: The association between main function and unplaced auxiliary functions makes handling even complex device configurations easier and speeds up project planning for these components. 94 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

95 Protected Devices Using this new property you can save all functions of a device to a macro or a copy, for example, even if only some of the functions are placed in the schematic. If only the placed auxiliary functions of a device are selected in the schematic, the associated main function is also written to the macro or the copy as an unplaced function. It makes no difference if the main function has not been placed or not been selected in the schematic. Creating macros / copies If you have activated this property for a main function and you create a macro or a copy of this main function in the schematic, then the unplaced auxiliary functions are also written to the macro or the copy. On inserting corresponding macros / copies, the unplaced auxiliary functions are inserted along with the main function. The unplaced auxiliary functions thus behave in exactly the same way as function templates in these actions. Renaming functions If main functions are renamed (e.g. in the properties dialog or by moving them to a different location box), the unplaced auxiliary functions are automatically renamed at the same time. Deleting functions If the main function is deleted, then the associated unplaced auxiliary functions are also deleted. Using existing functions / assigning functions The behavior of the unplaced auxiliary functions when using existing functions or assigning functions depends on whether the Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main function property is activated at the source function and / or at the target function. EPLAN NEWS

96 Protected Devices Property activated at source function and target function at the source function only at the target function only Behavior on using existing / assigning The source function comes with its unplaced auxiliary functions. The unplaced auxiliary functions of the target are deleted along with the main function. The source function comes with its unplaced auxiliary functions. The unplaced auxiliary functions of the target are retained. The source function does not come with any unplaced auxiliary functions. The unplaced auxiliary functions of the target are deleted along with the main function. Note: The Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main function property can be used both separately and in combination with the Protected function property. 96 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

97 Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on Note: The "Single Line" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN Electric P8 Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional. The "Single Line" add-on permits the production and logical management of single-line schematics. It substantially simplifies e.g. the creation and integration of plant overviews in your project documentation. EPLAN now permits a purely single-line documentation of the schematic. This can be useful if the connections between the equipment are largely standardized and therefore no further detail in the form of a multi-line diagram is necessary (e.g. two modules connected via a serial interface). If the single-line plan is followed by further project planning stages based on multi-line connections (reports, e.g. connection lists), you need to create multi-line connections from the single-line connection schematic. A new functionality (described next) now lets you define multi-line connections in the single-line diagram. Benefit: From now on you can use intuitive, single-line diagrams to plan detailed information for component circuitry. The number of schematic pages and their complexity is reduced while detailed documents for production and assembly are available as usual. EPLAN NEWS

98 Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on The following preconditions must be in place for this: The multi-line functions of the device (e.g. the pins) must be present in the project as unplaced functions. The single-line function of the device (e.g. of the plug connector) placed in the single-line diagram must be a main function. The Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main function property should be activated for this function (see also the corresponding section on page 94). You can define the multi-line connections on single-line connection definition points. To this end the properties dialog for connection definition points has been amended to include the new Interconnect devices tab. This tab is the same in structure and functionality as the possibly familiar Interconnect devices dialog. Defining Multi-line Connections on a Single-line Connection Point Once you have created single-line connections in the single-line diagram by inserting macros / symbols, place a connection definition point on the desired autoconnecting line in the single-line schematic. In the Properties (components): Connection definition point dialog, switch to the Symbol / function data tab and in the drop-down list for the Representation type field select the "Single-line" setting. The Interconnect devices tab is then also displayed in the properties dialog. 98 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

99 Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on Device source: The device which is the source of the single-line connection is automatically displayed in this field. The device connection points are displayed in the Connection point column in the table below. In this case only connection points of unplaced multi-line functions are displayed. Device target: The device which is the target of the single-line connection is automatically displayed in this field. For the device target again, only connection points of unplaced multi-line functions are displayed in the Connection point column. These two fields do not let you select a device as in the Interconnect devices dialog. EPLAN NEWS

100 Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on Note: If a cable is assigned to the single-line connection (e.g. via a manual cable definition), the Interconnect devices tab displays information about this cable (in the fields Cable DT, Cable type, Statistics). You cannot create a new cable. Generating connections To generate multi-line connections, select the same number of connection points in the left-hand and right-hand dialog areas and click on [Generate connections]. The multi-line connection points are generated and the targets for the respective connection points displayed in the table. Cable connections are generated if a cable is assigned to the singleline connection, otherwise conductor / wire connections are generated. Editing connections As you may be familiar from interconnecting devices, you can edit the properties of the connections, delete connections, insert insulation, etc. in the Interconnect devices tab. You can then e.g. use Popup menu > Properties to edit the properties of a connection and for example define the connection color and the connection designation. The multi-line connections and your connection data are saved at the connection definition point. Copying or moving connection definition points If a complete schematic section (i.e. the connection definition point and the relevant graphical symbols) is copied and pasted or moved, all connection data stored at the connection definition point is retained. The same defined connections are created even if the pasted devices are renumbered. If only the connection definition point is copied and pasted or moved to another existing single-line connection, the connection data is retained only if this applies to the new connection points. 100 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

101 Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on Benefit: Using this copy function you can duplicate schematic-sections with minimum effort and you need only define the detailed wiring. In similar system parts, duplicating pre-defined partial circuits saves you project planning time and increases the quality of the project documentation in terms of detailed connection information. Defined multi-line connections in the connection navigator In order to recognize the newly-produced multi-line connections in the connection navigator you need to configure the columns of the navigator such that the Connection type property <31075> is displayed. The defined multi-line connections are characterized by the new "Multi-line (automatic)" connection type. New messages for defined multi-line connections The settings for messages and check runs contain several new messages with which you can check the defined multi-line connections. The following messages have been added to the "Connections" message class: Message "Connection point has a multi-line connection in both single- and multi-line representation" Message "More than one multi-line connection definition at a single-line connection" Message "Multi-line connection definition does not match source / target" Message "Connection point is not contained in the multi-line connection definition". EPLAN NEWS

102 Graphical Device Tag List Graphical Device Tag List Graphical device tag lists are a particular form of device tag list. This display generally contains the device schematic, references to the position of the associated functions in the schematic (device crossreferences), and technical and commercial data. This display, which is common in the power supply industry, is now supported in EPLAN. Benefit: The EPLAN platform automatically creates the graphical device tag list display, which is widely used in the power supply industry, from prepared master data. This automatic creation means that all reports are always up to date and always provide a 1:1 reproduction of the configuration and connection point conditions of the devices. High-quality device tag lists create transparency and ensure a uniform level of information between all project participants. Simple Graphical Device Tag Lists To obtain the desired display, you need to use a dynamic form for device tag lists (*.f03) and customize it accordingly. 102 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

103 Graphical Device Tag List Example: The illustration below shows an extract from a simple graphical device tag list. Customizing forms for device tag lists We recommend selecting the following properties in the form properties of the relevant forms and setting them accordingly: Combine in a line by <13111> Here you indicate the form properties for which identical data should be combined in one line. For example, you could combine the part numbers of the device for the device tag list. Dynamic line adjustment <13009> You must activate this property in order for a separate line to be created for each device. Align graphics to insertion point (without alignment box) <13112> This property applies to graphical device tag lists with overviews. EPLAN NEWS

104 Graphical Device Tag List It applies to all placeholders for graphics for which the alignment box is deselected. For symbols inserted by means of such a placeholder, the handle is positioned on the insertion point of the placeholder text. This means that the symbol graphic is not adjusted to fit the alignment box. Customizing the form's data areas Next you must prepare the data header area and data area of the dynamic form for output. To do this, place placeholder texts in the form's data header area for the parts data and for the component graphic. The best way to do this is to split the data header area into two halves one half for the technical data and one half with the device symbols and separate these two parts using graphical auxiliary lines. In the data header area of device tag lists you can now also output the subtotal of subsequent data lines in a summation. Previously this was only possible for the data area. In this way you can show the total number of parts for the devices which are listed in the following lines in the header. In the data area of the form you insert placeholder texts for output of the device tag and for display of the placement. The resulting device tag list then contains references to the placement of the associated function in the schematic. Specifying settings After creating a form for the graphical device tag list, select this form in the Settings: Output to pages dialog for the Report type "Device tag list". Before you generate a report for this report type, you must first ensure that in the project-specific settings for the part in the Include parts group box the Device without part number check box is not selected. 104 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

105 Graphical Device Tag List You can then generate the graphical device tag list. To do this, select the "Device tag list" report type in the Select report dialog. The example above shows one possible result. Jumping to the schematic From a graphical device tag list you can jump back to the schematic again. To do this, position the cursor on the desired device tag, press the [Shift] key, and then click the DT in the report page. If only the device is highlighted, select the menu option Find > Go to > Graphic to jump to the component for the main function in the schematic. Graphical Device Tag Lists with Overviews If you use overviews (internal schematics) for complex devices in your projects and you want this overview to be retained in the output graphical device tag list, you must store data for the report in parts management and define "subforms" for your dynamic form. EPLAN NEWS

106 Graphical Device Tag List Example: The illustration below shows an extract from a graphical device tag list with overviews. Symbols for display in reports You may need to create the symbols for the overview of the complex devices first. We recommend that you create a separate symbol library for this. Note: Do not select a basic symbol library in the Symbol library properties dialog, as the newly created symbols from this library will only be used for graphical purposes. When you create the new symbols, in the Symbol properties dialog select the new list entry "Graphic" for the Symbol type drop-down list. This gives you the option of inserting macros and image files. The components in a macro are converted into graphical objects. You can also copy components in the schematic and insert them as graphical objects. 106 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

107 Graphical Device Tag List Note: When you use a symbol, remember that there must always be a complete symbol library in the project. For symbols with lots of image files this can lead to large volumes of data. Check the file sizes of the image files used. When using symbols with image files, use multiple symbol libraries if this will enable you to reduce the volume of data for the project. Data for reports The overview symbol that is to be output in the graphical device tag list is stored by default at the main part of the device in parts management. (This is the first part on the Parts tab in the properties dialog.) You can use the new Data for reports tab in parts management for this. You can also assign an "Identifier for reports" for the part here. Using this identifier you can specify in the form editor which subform is to be used for the part (using the Conditional forms function). This tab is available for the part types "Component", "Assembly", and "Module". Identifier for reports: Select the appropriate identifier for the reports from the drop-down list, or enter a new identifier manually. You can use this identifier in a dynamic form to define the subform to be evaluated. EPLAN NEWS

108 Graphical Device Tag List Symbols: In this table click [...] to open symbol selection and select the symbol to use to display the device. Notes: Note that identifiers for reports are managed in a single language only and that the values for the report are case-sensitive. Note that only the symbols from the symbol libraries stored in the project are displayed in symbol selection here. Conditional forms Conditional forms allow you to define a "subform" for a dynamic form. The output of a subform is associated with certain conditions. This produces a so-called "main form" and the "conditional forms" assigned to it. The conditional forms must be the same form type as the main form. For the output of a graphical device tag list this means that both the main form and the subforms must be of the "Device tag list" type (*.f03). The conditional forms and the conditions are defined in the form editor using Insert > Conditional forms. The icon for conditional forms is then attached to the cursor and can be placed by clicking anywhere in the desired main form. The Conditional forms dialog is then opened. 108 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

109 Graphical Device Tag List Form name: If subforms have already been defined, this list shows their names. Click (New) to select a suitable form from the Select form dialog. If the list contains several forms with different conditions, these forms are displayed in groups and, if the condition changes, separated by a line. To open a subform, select it in the Form name list and then click on (Open form). The form is then opened in the form editor and the Conditional forms dialog is closed. Filter: In this table, you specify filter criteria for the forms. In the toolbar for the filters click on (New) to go to the Criteria selection dialog and select the criterion you require for the conditional forms. For graphical device tag lists select the property Identifier for reports <20858>. EPLAN NEWS

110 Graphical Device Tag List Note: Note that you can also use any other available criterion for conditional forms. If you use the function definition as a criterion, for example, you could define subforms for PLC boxes in this way and hence output them separately in the device tag list. Value: Enter the comparison value that is to be compared to the selected property in this column. If the condition specified here is met when the report is generated, then the associated subform is used. To output graphical device tag lists enter the corresponding value of the property Identifier for reports in this column. For certain other properties or function data (e.g. function definition) you can click [...] to open a selection dialog and select the value you require. Editing conditional forms To edit conditional forms, double-click in the open main form on the placed icon for the conditional forms. You cannot insert more than one icon for conditional forms in a main form. Generating reports of conditional forms The subforms selected in the Conditional forms dialog must be dynamic forms too. If several forms with filter criteria are entered in this dialog, then on generating reports each object is checked to determine whether the defined conditions match one or more subforms. All matching forms are reported in succession (in the order in which they appear in the dialog); only the dynamic areas "Data header area", "Data area", and "Data footer area" from the subform are reported. 110 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

111 Graphical Device Tag List Form properties, graphics outside areas, and the dynamic areas "Header", "Conditional area", and "Footer" are disregarded and taken from the main form. You can design the subforms in any way you want. If you want to use full-page symbols for the report, then you must make this area in the data header area of the subform big enough. Example: Example of the design of a subform for a graphical device tag list with a full-page overview. Here A and B represent the data header area of the form (A: area containing placeholder texts for the part reference data, B: area in which the symbol for the report (overview) is output). The data area C is where the device tag and the function placements are output when the report is generated. EPLAN NEWS

112 Graphical Device Tag List If the defined conditions do not match any subform when a report is generated for an object, then this object continues to be reported with the main form. Outputting symbols on multiple pages If several subforms match an object, you can choose to split large symbols for overviews. In order to do this you must store several symbols at the part in parts management. Then create several subforms with placeholder texts for the various part symbols. For instance, you could place the property Parts data [1] / Symbol for report [1] on the first subform, the property Parts data[1] / Symbol for report [2] on the second form, and so on. On generating reports these forms are used one after another, and if the symbols are full-page symbols, several pages are generated. The desired display is thus created automatically for each device and can be updated at any time. 112 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

113 Symbols for Complex Devices Symbols for Complex Devices Switchgear and protective gear from electrical engineering are often planned in two different displays. These devices have a large number of complex functions and are therefore displayed in an overview. By contrast, the individual functions in the multi-line schematic are often used in a distributed manner in the project. Until now, special complex symbols created by users themselves were used for the individual functions. To make it easier to display the functions of complex devices in future, we have included many new "standard symbols" in the new version. These symbols, consisting only of 1 to 4 connection points, can be customized with graphics in any way you want. For consistent project planning in EPLAN the symbols are saved as symbol macros and stored in parts management. Benefit: The new standard symbols reduce the number of symbols needed to display complex devices. This makes creating and managing symbols for complex devices easier and more efficient. You have much more freedom in the graphical design of schematics, yet at the same time the logic is standardized. Example: The illustration below shows the overview of a complex switchgear. EPLAN NEWS

114 Symbols for Complex Devices Procedure To create an individual function of a complex device, start by selecting one of our new standard symbols in the Symbol selection dialog (see "New Device Connection Points") and insert this symbol in the schematic. Add your choice of graphic to the symbol. Then set the appropriate function definition at the inserted symbol. If the complex symbol is to represent an NO contact, for example, then select a corresponding function definition for the inserted symbol in the Symbol / function data tab (e.g. "NO contacts, thermal releases"). Then save the edited symbol as a symbol macro and store it at the corresponding function template for a part in parts management (see "Storing a Symbol Macro at the Function Template" on page 117). The function definition at the symbol in the symbol macro must match the function definition of the template at the part. Such a part can then be inserted as a device in the schematic. New Device Connection Points New standard symbols have been provided for creating symbol macros. In the SPECIAL symbol library under Electrical engineering// Electrical engineering special function// Device connection point// Device connection point, variable you can select many new device connection points with 2, 3, and 4 connection points. The following device connection point types are available: Static device connection points: In these device connection points all connection points are a fixed distance apart and point in the same direction. 114 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

115 Symbols for Complex Devices Example: The illustration below shows the static device connection points S2DCP (variant F), S3DCP (variant D), and S4DCP (variant F). Dynamic device connection points: In these device connection points the connections point in opposite directions. Example: The illustration below shows the dynamic device connection points D2DCP, D3DCP, and D4DCP (all variant A). EPLAN NEWS

116 Symbols for Complex Devices If you have selected a dynamic device connection point, then the first click defines the insertion point and the position of the first connection point. The other connection points remain attached to the cursor and can be placed by pointing the mouse at a selection area. A second click then defines the position of these connection points. All these device connection points have the function definition "Device connection point, variable". New device connection points with just one connection point In addition, the following four symbols (with plugs) have been added to the existing device connection points with just one connection point: DCPP3 DCPPJIC DCPPO DCPPOJIC. So device connection points are now available in all connection point variants with one to four connection points. 116 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

117 Symbols for Complex Devices Storing a Symbol Macro at the Function Template To enable the created symbol macros to be stored at the function templates in parts management, on the Function templates tab the Symbol macro column has been added to the Device selection (function templates) table. Click [...] to go to the Select macro dialog and select the desired symbol macro. Selecting a symbol macro deletes the content of the Symbol cell and vice versa. If a corresponding part is entered as a device, then the symbol macros stored at the function templates are used on placement. If this is done using the menu options Insert > Device, then you can browse through the functions (templates) using the [N] key and select the one you want. EPLAN NEWS

118 Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Note: The "PLC & Bus Extension" is an optional add-on for EPLAN Electric P8 Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional. Channel-oriented operation allows fast assigning of PLC connection points from the navigator to the placed functions in the schematic. Assignment via a channel display in the tree is thereby facilitated. Benefit: Channel-oriented operation of the PLC connection points significantly simplifies and speeds up editing of the PLC connection points. You will see immediately which connection points belong with a channel, and you can edit the connection points together. The following sections deal with channel display in the tree, and with a possible procedure: "Improved Views in the PLC Navigator" on page 119 "Inserting PLC Cards" on page 123 "Macro Placement" on page 123 "Assigning Functions" on page EPLAN NEWS 2.0

119 Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Improved Views in the PLC Navigator The tree view in the PLC navigator has been extended to add the Channel-oriented view so that channels can be displayed. In addition, the two views mentioned previously have been renamed as follows: Old name: Schematic-oriented PLC-oriented New name: DT-oriented Address-oriented In addition, the address-oriented view has been adapted to fit with the other views and now also displays PLC boxes and other PLC data. This means that all PLC data present in the project is now displayed in all views, i.e. PLC boxes, all PLC connection points and function templates. Thus empty PLC boxes are also displayed, such as PLC boxes which contain only function templates. If you want to restrict the display to specific data, this can be done by means of a filter. Example: If you want to display just the I/O connection points which have a PLC address in the address-oriented view as in the earlier versions, you need to filter by the criterion Properties > PLC address. To do this, go to the PLC - <project name> dialog, click [...] next to the Filter field, and specify the following settings in the Filter dialog: Active Negated Criterion PLC address <> Operator Value If only I/O connection points are displayed in the address-oriented view (i.e. also I/O connection points without addresses), filter by the function group PLC connection point, I/O, 1 connection point. EPLAN NEWS

120 Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on To do this, specify the following settings in the Filter dialog: Active Negated Criterion Function group = Operator Value PLC connection point, I/O, 1 connection point The following views are now available in the popup menu in the PLC navigator: DT-oriented: The PLC data is ordered by their device tags according to the project structure. Address-oriented: The PLC data is arranged by addresses within the project structure. That is, the I/O connection points are displayed under the PLC address. The associated power supplies are only also displayed under the PLC address if the corresponding PLC address is entered at the power supply. In addition, the PLC boxes and connection points are grouped under the relevant CPU if this property is entered at the associated PLC box. Channel-oriented: The PLC data is ordered by channel within the project structure (see the following section on page 120). Channel display in the PLC navigator To switch to channel-oriented view, select the menu path Popup menu > View > Channel-oriented in the navigator tree. All the PLC connection points belonging to a channel are summarized and displayed under the channel ( icon). That is, the I/O connection points and associated power supplies are displayed under the channel designation. The icon for the channel shows whether there is a safetyrelevant connection below. In addition, the preceding icon indicates whether the channel contains unplaced I/O connection points. 120 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

121 Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on PLC connection points which do not have a channel designation which has been either determined or manually input will be arranged according to their DT. The following icons are some of the ones displayed in the PLC navigator tree view: Icon Icon Meaning (Unplaced) (Placed) Device PLC box (main function with representation type "Multi-line" or "P&I diagram") Superimposed PLC box (main function) Channel Channel with safety-relevant connection point Function template Multi-line auxiliary function (here: PLC connection point) Superimposed function (here: multi-line PLC connection point) EPLAN NEWS

122 Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Example: The illustration below shows the channel-oriented view for the sample project EPLAN-DEMO. Here, the tree structure level has been opened with the channel Out0 for the PLC box with the DT A7 and a PLC connection point for Out1 has been set to Relevant to safety. 122 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

123 Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Inserting PLC Cards Before actual assigning, first add the PLC card that you want to use in the project as a device to the PLC navigator (via Popup menu > New device). If the part selected has only function templates and not macros, a PLC box will be generated which only contains function templates. If, on the other hand, the part also has macros, the function templates will be superimposed via the multi-line macros from the macro file registered for the part. Note: If you would like to assign the functions individually, it is wise to use parts which contain no part macros so that no superimposed functions arise. DT inheriting is taken into account during assigning. If you assign a single function, you may find that additional, as yet not assigned PLC connection points inherit the DT from this function. These PLC connection points then appear twice under the channel as an unplaced function with an inherited DT ( icon), and as a placed, superimposed function ( icon). As soon as all PLC connection points have been assigned, only placed, superimposed functions will be displayed. Macro Placement With the procedure described here, the next thing you will do is insert the multi-line macros in the schematic. These serve as target functions for assigning. The macros should include only PLC connection points (without PLC boxes) to PLC functions where possible, as only PLC connection points will be assigned from channel-oriented view during assigning. If the macros do indeed include PLC boxes, these must not have a part as they will otherwise represent devices themselves, i.e., their PLC connection points have already been assigned automatically. EPLAN NEWS

124 Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Tip: When placing the macros, use the Number with flag "?" mode in order to identify PLC target functions. All other functions included in the macro (wiring of the PLC connection points) can be subsequently numbered later using DT numbering. Assigning Functions Once the macros have been placed, assign the unplaced functions or PLC card function templates to the component. To do this, mark the channel in the PLC navigator and select the Popup menu > Assign menu item. All PLC connection point functions or function templates belonging to the channel marked can be assigned individually to the PLC connection points placed in the schematic. As soon as a channel contains a placed multi-line I/O connection point through assigning, the channel will no longer be identified in the PLC navigator via the additional icon for unplaced functions which precedes the channel. Moreover, the icon for the target functions in the schematic is no longer displayed in the PLC navigator as the original function of the PLC connection point is replaced by the unplaced function. Note: During assigning, a check is carried out to find out whether the unplaced function or the function template (source function) has the same function group as the PLC connection point in the schematic (target function). If the function groups of source and target function do not match, a message is displayed. 124 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

125 Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Tips: Simultaneous assigning of all functions / function templates belonging to a channel is possible via a multiple choice of target functions. To do this, after selecting the Assign menu item click in the schematic and draw a frame around the required PLC connection points. Another option is to group the PLC connection points in the schematic prior to assigning (one group per channel). The unplaced functions or function templates are then assigned in the order in which they are displayed in the PLC navigator. The appropriate target functions are sought in the schematic according to their graphic sequence. You can also assign a function using drag & drop, by holding down the key combination [Ctrl] + [Shift] and dragging the desired function from the PLC navigator to the target function in the schematic. Taking account of the representation type If the selection in the PLC navigator contains only one representation type for the source function, this will be assigned to the appropriate target function (with the same function definition) independently of the representation type. The target function retains its representation type. If you have selected several representation types of a specific source function in the PLC navigator, the function will be assigned which has the same representation type as the appropriate target function. If there is no identical representation type for appropriate source or target functions (with the same function definition), an appropriate source function will be selected using the sequence for global editing. With this type of multiple choice, the representation type of the function which is attached to the cursor will be displayed by means of additional text on the cursor. Use [Tab] to toggle between the representation types. EPLAN NEWS

126 Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Using existing PLC connection points blockwise As an alternative to assigning, you can also use the Use existing PLC connection points blockwise action to allocate the PLC connection points. To do this, first mark the target functions in the schematic and then select the Project data > PLC > Use connection points blockwise menu items. As part of the extensions noted previously, the dialogs for blockwise use of existing data now also display the Channel designation (automatic) column by default. In addition, in the list representation of the Select PLC connection points to place them blockwise dialog, it is possible to configure the dialog columns and select the Channel designation (automatic) property as the column header. 126 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

127 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Note: The "Net Based Wiring" add-on is available for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional as an optional extra. The order in which components are connected in EPLAN Electric P8 is defined by default as soon as the connections are drawn. This is done through the choice of the appropriate connection symbol (T-node, jumper, double junction, etc.), in which the logic model for the target specification is stored. Net-based connections in the new add-on module "Net Based Wiring" enable a schematic to be created without having to immediately define how the connections are arranged. EPLAN notes the internal flow of the connections, irrespective of how they are graphically represented in the schematic. Benefit: You can generate the schematic without taking into account the precise wiring. When the spatial arrangement of the components and their optimal wiring is clarified, this information can be added as required. Connections can easily be represented in the schematic even in the case of complex wiring sequences. The plans become more legible, particularly with potentials over more than one page which are distributed throughout the entire project. Simple net connections in the schematic and detailed reports of the connections via connection lists can also meet the requirements of the new machine guideline in respect of clear, readily legible machinery / plant documentation with minimal effort. EPLAN NEWS

128 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Example: The following illustrations clarify how the connections in the schematic are represented simply and clearly, even in the case of a complex wiring sequence, by using net-based connections. Prior progression of the autoconnecting lines for the connections of a potential with target specification. New progression of the autoconnecting lines for a net with net-based connections. The connections defined at the net definition point NBW are also shown in the illustration. 128 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

129 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Nets with Net-based Connections In EPLAN Electric P8, it is now possible to define nets with net-based connections. Unlike a "normal" net with automatic connections, the connection sequence within the net here is not determined via the connection symbols in the schematic; it must be specified later in the properties dialog of the associated net definition point. The following is possible for nets with net-based connections: Working methods employing both target specification and net-based connections can be mixed within a project. A mixture of connections with target specification and net-based connections can also occur within a net. In net-based connections, connectors are always drawn as connection points. Net-based connections are defined using a net definition point. Which connection points of the net are connected to each other is stored in the net definition point. The connections and their order can be retrospectively edited without having to modify the drawing. Net-based connections can be automatically designated in the same way as normal connections using connection numbering. Interruption points enable net-based connections to be continued on different pages. The connection properties of net-based connections can also be modified using "external editing". The connection itself cannot be modified using "external editing". Net-based connections are also taken into account on data transfer from EPLAN 21 (see the relevant section on page 180). EPLAN NEWS

130 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Note: Cable definition lines can not be used for net-based connections. The connections under a cable definition line are not recognized as cable conductors in a net with net-based connections. Defining net-based connections Net-based connections are defined using a net definition point. Which connection points of the net are connected to each other is stored in the net definition point. The connection points are identified by a connection point ID that is unique within the net. The IDs are automatically assigned but can be changed manually. These IDs are also copied when a net is copied, so the connections stored in the net definition point are retained. Example: In a "normal" net with automatic connections, the potential L1 is connected with the four fuses (-F1 to -F4). For the connection sequence at the T-nodes, the 1st target right, 2nd target below directions have been defined. 130 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

131 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module The following four connections are shown in the connections navigator: Connection (source) L1 L1 L1 L1 Connection (target) -F1:1 -F2:1 -F3:1 -F4:1 At the T-nodes, the Specify targets check box is unchecked and a net definition point with the net name N1 is added. After defining the net connections in the net definition point, the following connections appear for the five connection points: Connection point ID Connection (source) Connection (target) L1 1 L1 -F1:1 -F1:1 2 -F1:1 -F2:1 -F2:1 3 -F2:1 -F3:1 -F3:1 4 -F3:1 -F4:1 -F4:1 5 To achieve a complete net, the connection points can also be connected with one another in different sequences. EPLAN NEWS

132 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module In practice, the sequence of the relay is compliant with the optimized wiring sequence (for example) in the enclosure. Disabling target specification of connection symbols If you want to define a net in a project in which only net-based connections appear, or only partially net-based connections appear, you have to disable target specification of the associated connection symbols (T-nodes, jumpers, double junctions) to do this. For this, you have the following two options: Disable target specification manually: To disable target specification at an individual connection symbol with a branch option, the relevant properties dialogs now control the Specify targets check box. 132 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

133 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module If this check box is deactivated, the target order for the relevant connector will not be evaluated and the connector will be shown as a point. In this case the connections are not automatically generated and have to be specified manually. If the Specify targets check box is selected, EPLAN automatically generates connections. Disable target specification by default: To do this, go via Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > Connection symbols to the Settings: Connection symbols dialog and select the new Deactivate 'Specify targets' property when inserting a net definition point check box. If this is the case, the Specify targets property in the corresponding connection symbols is deselected when net definition points are inserted. Note: If you do not have a license for the "Net Based Wiring" add-on module, the Specify targets check box will normally not be displayed. If you open a project in this instance in which this check box has been deselected for a connection symbol, the check box still appears in the dialog but you cannot cancel deactivation of the target specification. Specifying Nets with Net-based Connections To define a net with net-based connections, you first have to insert a net definition point. Inserting net definition points Using a net definition point, you can assign properties to the connection running via this point (such as Connection designation, Cross-section / diameter, etc.) and give the net in question a unique name. EPLAN NEWS

134 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module To do this, select the Insert > Net definition point menu items. The symbol for the net definition point hangs on the cursor. Click in the schematic to place the net definition point. The Properties (components): Net definition point dialog is opened. Net name: Enter the name of the net defined via the net definition point. The new EPLAN410, Property placement.net names layer is used to display the net name. 134 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

135 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Notes: Remember that the net name must be unique within a project. To check this, you can use the new message in the check runs. No potentials and signals can be defined at net definition points. The potentials and signals must be defined via a potential definition point or a potential connection point in the project. The net has a higher priority than the signal or the potential. For forwarding properties to a connection, this means that the properties stored in a net definition point take precedence over the properties stored in a potential definition point. Tip: As an alternative to insertion via the menu item, you can also insert a (Net defi- net definition point via a symbol button. To do this, click the nition point) button on the Connections toolbar. Then on the Net connections tab, define the connections within the net. Defining daisy chains A net with net-based connections will not be complete until all connection points have been connected. This takes place at the net definition point on the Net connections tab. This generates a list of connection points which are connected to one another pairwise in sequence a so-called "daisy chain". In the Properties (components): Net definition point dialog, select the Net connections tab. The Connection points table displays all the connection points in the net. Select Popup menu > Create daisy chain. Click the connection point at which the daisy chain is to begin. The connection point is shown in the Connections table. EPLAN NEWS

136 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Click in sequence on the other connection points that are to be included in the daisy chain. The connection points in the daisy chain are shown in the Connections table. Select Popup menu > End daisy chain. A horizontal line is added to the Connections table to indicate that the daisy chain is complete. If not all connection points are connected with one another, you can repeat this action in order to define another daisy chain. Click [Apply] to save the defined daisy chains. Note: If a net has more than one daisy chain, these must also be interconnected in order to create a complete net. Tips: As an alternative to creating and ending daisy chains via the popup menu, you can also click the (Create daisy chain) and (End daisy chain) button in the Connection points table. Double-clicking on a connection point in the Connection points table starts a new daisy chain. If a daisy chain has already begun, doubleclicking ends the daisy chain so begun. 136 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

137 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Connection points: All connection points for the net are shown in this table. Selecting the popup menu item Properties or (Edit) allows you to change the connection point ID (the property ID for net-based connections). Using the popup menu item Change target order, it is also possible to change the order of the targets for the selected connection point. Connections: In this table, each daisy chain is displayed as a list of connection points. You can also display and edit the properties of the connections. Double-clicking on the popup menu item Properties or the (Edit) button here opens the properties dialog for the connection between the connection point selected and the connection point following this in the list. Clicking on (Delete) removes a selected connection point. To move selected connection points, use the (Move up / Move down) buttons. All of these actions also change the connections. Connection sources and targets The first connection point of a daisy chain is the source of the first connection. The second connection point of the daisy chain is the target of the first connection. Similarly, the second connection point in the daisy chain is the source of the second connection, and the third connection point is the target of this connection. The same applies to all further connections in a daisy chain. You can modify the order of the source and target of a connection stored in a net definition point by activating the Exchange source and target property in the properties dialog for that connection. EPLAN NEWS

138 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Other connections You can use the Other connections popup menu item of the Connections table to open a subsequent dialog. Here, the other connections for this net are displayed that are not stored in the net definition point. These include connections that are defined using connectors with target specification or via other net definition points. Tip: You can select the complete daisy chain by clicking on the separator underneath it. This allows you to move the entire daisy chain using the arrow buttons, for example, or to delete it using the button. Displaying Nets and Net-based Connections Note: Net-based connections, defined nets, and net tracking are displayed even if you do not have a license for the "Net Based Wiring" add-on module. In this instance, the properties dialog of a net definition point already inserted in the project can in fact be opened, but the net definition cannot be edited. Net-based connections in the connections navigator The connections stored in the net definition point are not immediately visible in the connections navigator. Connections are not generated from the information contained in the net definition point until the connections are updated. Only then will these connections be displayed in the connections navigator. Displaying nets in the potential navigator The nets defined in a project are displayed in addition to the defined potentials and signals in the tree and list view of the potential navigator. 138 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

139 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Tree view In this view, a defined net and its net name are displayed under the tree structure levels "Potential" and "Signal". A tree structure level under this shows the net definition points with their placement. The following icons are displayed in the tree view of the potential navigator: Icon Meaning Identifies the project level. This icon is only displayed when several projects are open. Potential Signal Placed potential definition point Net Placed net definition point Example: The illustration below clarifies the representation of a net (here with the net name N1) and net definition point in the tree view of the potential navigator. EPLAN NEWS

140 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module List view In this view, the net name is also shown as a column header in addition to the potential and signal names and for placement. When selecting a net name in tree or list, the corresponding net definition point is displayed in an opened preview (Graphical preview dialog, Property preview dialog). Note: Nets without net names or net definitions are not displayed in the potential navigator. Highlighting nets In addition to potentials or signals, nets can now also be temporarily highlighted in color to allow a quick overview of their extent. The currently selected net is then colored according to the colors you have defined in the user settings. Benefit: The color identification allows you to quickly check selected nets in the graphical editor. This provides you with security when defining net-based connections and enhances the quality of your work results. Select View > Net tracking. Click a connection symbol or connection line. EPLAN searches for the associated net and colors this completely (i.e., also over page boundaries). Click another connection to remove the highlighting of the first net and color the net associated with this connection. Again select the View > Net tracking menu items to remove the highlighting of the net. 140 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

141 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Notes: The color settings for potential, signal and net tracking are defined jointly under Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > 2D in the same Track potential drop-down list. Color highlights for potentials, signals, or nets can only be removed when the connections are active. Once potential, signal or net tracking has been terminated by pressing [Esc] or selecting Popup menu > Cancel action, tracking has to be disabled and enabled again (e.g. by selecting View > Net tracking) before you can remove the color highlights from a potential / signal / net again. Tip: You can also enable and disable net tracking by clicking on the (Net tracking) button in the View toolbar. Editing Nets with Net-based Connections Connecting nets In EPLAN, a net is a subset of a signal. It consists of connection points that are connected directly to each other and the connections between these connection points. Normally, a net in the graphical editor ends at a function. Most functions have net isolation as standard. In the new version, you now have the option of identifying a function (e.g. a terminal) as "net-connecting" and thereby extending a net. Potential connection points are always netconnecting. EPLAN NEWS

142 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module For this purpose, the new Net-connecting check box is available in the properties dialog for components in the Symbol / function data tab in the Function data (logic) group box. Select this check box if the function is to be net-connecting. Example: It may sometimes be necessary to continue a net via a terminal or a pin. If, for example, the Net-connecting property is assigned to the terminal -X100, the lamps -H10 and -H20 will be part of the same net and can be connected to each other using a net-based connection. Modifying nets The connections stored in the net definition point are managed using the connection point ID (ID for net-based connections property). Renaming a function If functions within the net are renamed, the connections are retained, as the connection point IDs will not have changed. 142 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

143 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Removing a function from a net If a function is deleted from a net, its connection points and the connections to these remain stored at the net definition point but will be flagged as invalid in the Connections table. The invalid connections must then be deleted either manually in the properties dialog of the net definition point or automatically when the project is compressed. For this, the new Remove invalid connections setting is available in the Settings: Compression dialog under Net definition points. Replacing a deleted function If you insert a new function in a net and assign the same connection point IDs as those of the previously deleted function to the connection points, the connections are retained and lead to the new function. If the new function has different connection point IDs, these connection points will not be connected and the net will be incomplete. Further editing options and examples are provided in the EPLAN online help. For more information, see the section entitled "Net-based connections". Net-based connection reports Net-based connections can also be taken into account in the reports. On the one hand, you have the option of placing the connection property Net name <33007> as placeholder text in various forms (e.g. connection list, parts list, etc.). Secondly, net-based connections can be output in reports sorted by nets and daisy chains. The following new properties can be used for this purpose: Net index <31076>: Identifies the net in the case of net-based connections. EPLAN NEWS

144 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Daisy chain index <31077>: Identifies the daisy chain within a net in the case of net-based connections. Connection index <31078>: Identifies the connections within a daisy chain in the case of net-based connections. In addition, the Connection type property <31075> can be used as a filter criterion in reports so that only connections with the value "netbased" are output. Correcting connections To be able to automatically correct errors which may occur when working with net definition points, the correction run for connections has been extended. Now, when you select the menu path Project data > Connections > Correct, the new Correct connections dialog will open in place of the previous prompt. For correction of net definition points, the following check boxes are available here: Merge net definition points: If this check box is activated, a number of net definition points within a network are combined to form a single net definition point. The remaining net definition point contains all the connections and properties that were defined in the other net definition points. In the event of a conflict, the first graphical net definition point "wins". Remove superfluous net definition points: If this check box is activated, the net definition points that are not required to define the connections are removed. This will be the case, for instance, if the connections of the net are defined using connectors with target specification. If additional properties are stored in the net definition point, a connection definition point with identical properties is placed here instead of the net definition point. 144 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

145 New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module Note: If you do not have a license for the "Net Based Wiring" add-on module, the Correct connections dialog will not be displayed. In this instance, the Merge connection definition points action is directly executed after a prompt. New messages for net-based connections To check nets with net-based connections, a number of new messages is available to you in the settings for messages and error checking. The following messages have been added to the "Connections" message class: Message "Incomplete net" Message "Net definition point contains incomplete connections" Message "Net contains connection symbols with the 'Specify targets' property" Message "More than one net definition point on a net" Message "Duplicate ID for net-based connections within a net (%1!s!)" Message "Different nets with identical net name (%1!s!)" Message "Several signal definitions on one signal" Message "Conflict between net and potential or signal" Message "Net definition point with incorrect potential" Message "Net definition point with incorrect signal". EPLAN NEWS

146 New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration The new EPLAN EMI technology (EPLAN Mechatronic Integration) allows mechanical and automation engineering to access common design data. The basis for this is the shared storage of EPLAN data and design data from AutoCAD Inventor in the EPLAN platform. This makes it possible to edit a project in parallel in different engineering disciplines, allowing a mechatronic workflow to be displayed. Benefit: EPLAN EMI allows data exchange between the different engineering disciplines. Information from one team can also be used "across the disciplines" by other teams involved in the design process. This two-directional data exchange accelerates the design process. It helps to avoid errors and inconsistencies, reinforces information exchange between departments, improves the quality of documentation, and encourages collaboration between departments. EPLAN EMI Add-ons EPLAN Mechatronic Integration now provides the following add-ons: EPLAN EMI Collaboration for AutoCAD Inventor: This module enables AutoCAD Inventor to be connected to the EPLAN platform at item level. It allows the user to synchronize item lists in both directions and import as yet unplaced mechatronic items directly into their planning environment. EPLAN EMI Cabling for AutoCAD Inventor: This module allows cable data to be exchanged between EPLAN Electric P8 and AutoCAD Inventor. The electrical engineer can use the 3D model, the virtual prototype, to calculate cable lengths and therefore create the production documents for cabling in EPLAN Electric P8 early in the project. 146 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

147 New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration EPLAN EMI Piping for AutoCAD Inventor: Fluid power, instrumentation & control and process engineers can use this module to import the length and diameter of pipes and tubes into EPLAN Fluid and / or EPLAN PPE from the 3D model in AutoCAD Inventor. Note: The EPLAN EMI add-ons are available as an option for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional, EPLAN Fluid, and EPLAN PPE. Importing Mechanical Data To import model data from Mechanics into the EPLAN platform you must first open the mechatronics navigator using Project data > Mechatronics > Navigator. Then select Popup menu > Import mechanical model. In the next dialog, open the AutoCAD Inventor file to be imported using the [Open] button. When the mechanical model has been imported into the project, the mechatronic data is displayed in the mechatronics navigator. The model can be displayed in the 3D view of the EPLAN platform. The mechanical model can also be placed on a project page as a model view (see the section "Inserting a Model View for EPLAN EMI" on page 154). Mechatronics Navigator When the mechanical model has been imported into the project, the data is displayed in the mechatronics navigator. This navigator visualizes the essential mechatronics data which is used in both disciplines (EPLAN platform and AutoCAD Inventor). EPLAN NEWS

148 New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration Tree view In the tree view of the navigator, all the components from the 3D model are displayed in a hierarchical structure. The tree structure reflects the assembly topology of Inventor's assembly view. The icons displayed in the tree view of the mechatronics navigator include the following: Icon Meaning EPLAN project Inventor file (assembly) Inventor file (item) General fluid item General electrical engineering item Pipe / tube Inventor item, mechanical Inventor assembly, mechanical Cable Terminal Note: Please note that the icons shown here for the Inventor files (assemblies *.iam, items *.ipt) may differ from the icons displayed in your mechatronics navigator. The icons displayed here depend on which symbols are linked to the relevant file extensions in your operating system. 148 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

149 New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration Recognizing assignment status The different status icons are also used to show whether an item is being used in the 3D model and synchronously in the relevant schematic, is not in either the model or the schematic, or is redundant. In this document, items which are used synchronously will be referred to as "linked", while items which only appear in one of the disciplines and are missing (as yet) in the corresponding area will be referred to as "not linked". It is also possible to reject links in order to document that a suggested link is not wanted. This is the case, for example, if there is no need to import a mechanics item into the automation engineering schematic. The following icons are available: Icon Meaning "Not linked mechanics": The mechanical item can / must be linked to a schematic object, but the link has not yet been made. "Not linked schematic": The schematic object can / must be linked to a mechanical item, but the link cannot be made because the mechanical item is missing. "Linked": The mechanical item has been assigned to a schematic object. "Link rejected". New filtering options in the navigator In the mechatronics navigator you also have the option of restricting the amount of data displayed by using a filter. You can use the filters that are available for selection in the Filter dropdown list to set up the navigator so that each editor only sees the components that are relevant to his specialist area. EPLAN NEWS

150 New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration The following filters are available as standard: "Processing list": This filter can be used to provide an overview of all the items that are relevant to the schematic. Their status may be "Linked", "Not linked", or "Rejected". "Electrical engineering", "Fluid power", and "PPE": With this filter, only the mechanics items that are relevant to the corresponding trade are displayed in the navigator; all other components are hidden. The components that have been filtered out are displayed transparently in 3D display and cannot be selected. "Information": With this filter, only components which contain information for tracking are displayed. "Not linked", "Outdated mechanical models", and "Linked": These filter options are used to monitor the level of assignment between the mechanical model and the schematic. Updating the mechanical model You can use Popup > Check for more up-to-date data to check that all the models loaded are up to date. If discrepancies are found, the models are selected accordingly. To update the data in the mechanical model, select Popup menu > Update mechanical model. All the changed 3D components are then reloaded for the selected 3D model. The components and their assignments to the devices in the schematic are also updated. The note "Data updated" is automatically entered in the Information dialog for the relevant main assembly so that all the editors working on the project can see that the status of the model has changed. 150 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

151 New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration Assigning data The data in the mechatronic navigator initially has no references to the devices in the corresponding EPLAN project. The data for the different disciplines must be assigned to one another. Assigning from the device navigator In this version, if you want to assign mechatronics data in the mechatronics navigator you must first select this data in the device navigator. Then press [Ctrl] + [Shift] and drag the function required to a suitable component in the mechatronics navigator using drag & drop. If the objects assigned do not match, EPLAN will display a message to this effect. Assigning and placing from the mechatronics navigator In this version, you also have the option of assigning mechatronics items to a suitable object in the schematic from the mechatronics navigator. To do this, select the relevant model, press [Ctrl] + [Shift], and drag it to the component in the schematic using drag & drop. You can also use the Assign popup menu item. If the objects assigned do not match, EPLAN will display a message to this effect. To place an object which is not yet in the schematic from the mechatronics navigator, select Place from the popup menu or drag it into the schematic using drag & drop. Transfering data to Inventor Unlinked schematic objects (icon: ) are objects that you have dragged into the mechatronics navigator from the schematic but which do not yet have the appropriate mechanics items / assemblies in the 3D model. Under certain conditions, you can transfer these unlinked schematic objects to Inventor. EPLAN NEWS

152 New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration In order to do this, an Inventor assembly or an Inventor item must be specified at the part of this schematic object. You can enter a corresponding Inventor construction file in the 3D macro field in parts management, on the Mounting data tab. To transfer 3D data, select the unlinked model, then select Popup menu > Place in Inventor. Tip: If the conditions listed above have been met, the mechanical model for this type of part can be dragged directly into the open Inventor using drag & drop and placed in an assembly there. Inserting a device tag into Inventor drawings The mechatronics navigator offers the Popup menu > Insert device into drawing functionality for inserting device tags into Inventor drawings. Select this menu item, then in the next dialog, select the Inventor drawing (*.idw) for the imported mechanical model into which the device tags are to be written. The default for the file to be opened is the file name of the associated main assembly. When you click [Open], the selected file is opened and all the components of the main assemblies which have been given a device tag by means of assignment from the schematic are found in the drawing. If device tags are present, a guide line text with the DT entry is generated and placed in the drawing close to the drawing component for each device tag found. Intersections with other drawing elements are not taken into account. If the EMI model does not contain any assigned device tags, the process is canceled with an appropriate message. 152 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

153 New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration Creating and reading information A new information dialog gives you the option of saving texts at Inventor components, e.g. to make additional information available to other editors (mechanics, electrical engineering, fluid power, etc.). To open the Information dialog, select Popup menu > Create / read information in the mechatronics navigator. Enter your new information in the Create new information field. Close this dialog by clicking [OK]; the new information is then carried over to the Information for tracking field. Next time the dialog is opened, the information will be shown in the Information for tracking field. In the mechatronics navigator, items with information for tracking are marked with this icon. When the information has been read and acted on, select the Information completed check box. Completed information is then only visible in the information history. All the information saved to date is displayed in the relevant Information history field and cannot be changed. Calculating the connection length Using the EMI "Cabling" and "Piping" add-ons you can calculate tube and pipe lengths in addition to cable lengths; the Calculate cable length menu item under Project data > Mechatronics has therefore been renamed. Old name: Calculate cable length New name: Calculate connection length This functionality is now also available in the popup menu in the mechatronics navigator. EPLAN NEWS

154 New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration For length calculation, select the relevant cables or tubes in the graphical editor (multiple selection is possible) then select the Calculate connection length menu item to calculate the new lengths. The connection lengths are also updated. Inserting a Model View for EPLAN EMI The data in the mechanical model are now accessed independently of the representation on the project pages. Therefore the former preview screen of the mechanical model has been replaced by a model view. Benefit: The model view offers greater flexibility. You can decide whether a mechanical model is represented on project pages and the appearance of this view. You can place this model view on project pages, as before. However, the model view is not required to represent the mechanical model in the 3D view or to assign electrical engineering data to mechanical data. To insert a model view for EMI on a project page, select Insert > Graphic > Model view (EMI). Then place the corners of the model view by opening an area. The Model view dialog then opens; select the 3D object to be represented and specify the properties of this model. Settings for EPLAN EMI Addition for length calculation EPLAN now has a settings dialog where you can specify an additional length for connection length calculation. You can open the Settings: General (mechatronics) dialog via Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name " > Mechatronics > General. 154 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

155 New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration Benefit: Accurate length calculation based on the 3D model combined with the optional additional length means that cables and tubes can subsequently be installed during production without complications (e.g. unwanted tension) and there is no need to build a physical prototype. Specify the addition length for the calculation of cable / tube lengths for EMI in the Addition for cable length calculation / Addition for tube length calculation group boxes. Enter an absolute extra length which will be added to the calculated length once per cable / tube in the appropriate Value field. The result will then be rounded up to the "full" value of the unit in use. Select the unit to be used for the additional length from the Unit drop-down list. EPLAN NEWS

156 New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal At the same time as the release of the new version of the EPLAN platform, a new version of the EPLAN Data Portal with increased functionality has also been released. Our Internet portal for device data the EPLAN Data Portal provides you with categorized master data of major manufacturers for direct transfer to the EPLAN platform. In addition to alphanumeric parts data, among other information this master data also contains schematic macros, multilingual parts information, preview images, documents, etc. The data is directly integrated into the EPLAN platform when downloaded. Benefit: The EPLAN Data Portal enormously simplifies parts selection for the designer. While planning, he or she can directly access master data that has been classified and checked for EPLAN compatibility, without time-consuming searching of manufacture catalogs, which thus reduces the project planning time. High-quality master data makes it easier to use throughout EPLAN and increases the quality of the project documentation, from the schematic, through detailed reports, to integration of manufacturer documentation (data sheets, operating manuals) in high-quality manufacturing specifications. Detailed item data is of crucial significance even in downstream use of documentation during servicing and maintenance work. To productively access the portal, you require the "EPLAN Data Portal" add-on module and a valid Software Service Contract for your EPLAN license. 156 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

157 New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal This add-on can be used with the following variants of the EPLAN platform: EPLAN Electric P8 (Version 2.0) EPLAN Fluid (Version 2.0) EPLAN PPE (Version 2.0) EPLAN Education for Classrooms (Version 2.0). Notes: You must be connected to the Internet in order to use the EPLAN Data Portal, and you must make sure that access is not prevented by a firewall or any other security mechanism! If you have problems, you should first check your firewall, virus scanner, or proxy settings. Note that the EPLAN Data Portal has been released for Microsoft Internet Explorer 7. After installation via the usual EPLAN installation wizard, the add-on module and its dialogs (navigator, settings, etc.) are integrated into the user interface of the EPLAN platform. Once a user account has been created, open the EPLAN Data Portal navigator by selecting the new Data portal navigator menu item from the Utilities menu. The menu item for the navigator has been moved. It can now be found directly below the Parts menu item. An overview of the main new features of the EPLAN Data Portal: New data The amount and scope of item data in the EPLAN Data Portal is constantly growing. Additional manufacturers have been newly added to the list of 20 component manufacturers. Manufacturers already established in the portal are constantly expanding the scope of their data in the EPLAN Data Portal. EPLAN NEWS

158 New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal Unique part IDs for all parts All parts in the EPLAN Data Portal now have a "Unique part ID". This means that two parts with different part numbers can now be placed in relation to one another (see the section "Unique Part ID for Parts in the EPLAN Data Portal" on page 158). Stronger integration into the EPLAN platform With the new version, the EPLAN Data Portal has been integrated more strongly into the EPLAN platform. So now, for example, the settings for the portal can be input via the EPLAN settings dialog (see the section "Settings for the EPLAN Data Portal" on page 159). Find out about all of the new features at our website Information on new functionalities is also available in the online help function of the EPLAN Data Portal server. Unique Part ID for Parts in the EPLAN Data Portal All parts in the EPLAN Data Portal are now identified by means of "Unique part IDs". Using this ID, it is possible to place two parts with different part numbers in relation to one another. When importing a part from the EPLAN Data Portal, the "Unique part ID" is used for identification of the part in question. Benefit: If the part number for a part has changed, it is still possible with the help of the Unique part ID property to provide the desired part with data during part import. For all other parts in the EPLAN parts database, issuing this kind of identification is optional, i.e. a part does not have to have this property. So that the Unique part ID property cannot be changed accidentally, this can not be created or changed via the parts management interface. 158 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

159 New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal Tip: By means of the "API Extension" add-on module, the property Unique part ID can be used to assign a part or read it. Settings for the EPLAN Data Portal Integration into the EPLAN platform For the new version, the EPLAN Data Portal has been integrated more strongly into the EPLAN platform. So now you can make the settings for the EPLAN Data Portal via the EPLAN settings dialog. The menu path to the dialog Settings: Data Portal is as follows: Options > Settings > User > Management > Data Portal. EPLAN NEWS

160 New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal The settings options are split across three tabs: Portal, Connection, and About. The [Reset] button has been removed from the Portal tab. If you now want to restore altered default settings (e.g. the website address of the EPLAN Data Portal in the Portal URL field), click in the relevant field and select the familiar Go to default menu item from the popup menu. This change also makes it possible to export and import the settings for the EPLAN Data Portal, e.g. via the and buttons. This facilitates the exchange and synchronization of these settings between several EPLAN workstations. 160 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

161 New Features in Device Numbering New Features in Device Numbering Subcounters in Offline Device Numbering A new setting for format elements in offline device numbering is now available. With this setting you can specify that a counter should behave like a subcounter. Benefit: Automatically assigning device tags in the desired format saves a considerable amount of time and ensures that the identifiers assigned are correct and unique. With the new settings, EPLAN supports standardization without generating additional project planning work. If you select a counter as a format element in the Settings: Numbering (offline) dialog, in the next dialog opened you can specify that the counter should behave like a subcounter. If you select the new Counter is a subcounter check box, the counter is incremented again from the start value as soon as the other numbering changes. If the check box is not selected, the counter is incremented independently of the other characters. EPLAN NEWS

162 New Features in Device Numbering Example: For offline numbering of a project, the numbering format specified is Page + Identifier + Column + Counter, consecutive by columns. If the Counter is a subcounter check box is not selected, in offline numbering with a start value of 1 the result is as follows: If the Counter is a subcounter check box is selected and all other settings are the same, the result is as follows: If the value of the "column" format element changes (with -1F2), the counter starts again with the start value (-1F21). 162 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

163 New Features in Device Numbering New Numbering Formats for Busbars A separate DT format is now available for online numbering of busbars. A new setting option has been added to the DT tab in the Numbering formats dialog. (To open this dialog, follow the menu path Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Numbering (online) and in the Settings: Numbering (online) dialog, click [...] next to the Numbering format field.) Benefit: Busbars can be numbered separately in online device numbering. EPLAN offers flexibility the settings you make determine how the system will behave, allowing you to implement your individual project planning standard. By default, the connection point designations for busbar connection points are also automatically numbered when they are inserted. The Designations tab in the dialog referred to above now has a Busbar connection points check box and an option to edit format elements. EPLAN NEWS

164 Safety-relevant Functions Safety-relevant Functions In EPLAN, functions can now be identified as relevant to safety. Benefit: The safety-relevant functions give you the option, for instance, of distinguishing between "safe" and "unsafe" PLC signals in the project. Another piece of detailed information which is easily stored in the engineering to guarantee even higher-quality machine and plant documentation. For this reason, the properties dialog for components now has a new Relevant to safety check box in the Function data (logic) group box on the Symbol / function data tab. Select this check box if you want the function to be relevant to safety. In the navigators, functions that are relevant to safety are indicated by the icon. Note: Connections can not be identified as relevant to safety. In the properties dialog for connection definition points, the Relevant to safety check box is therefore grayed out and cannot be selected. Safety-relevant PLC connection points The new version introduces some PLC connection points that are relevant to safety. For these new symbols with the names PLC_S_CBOX* and numbers , the Relevant to safety check box is already selected (see the section "Master Data: Symbols" from page 402 onwards). These symbols have a yellow border to make them easier to identify. 164 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

165 Safety-relevant Functions Safety-relevant function templates The function templates in the Parts management have also been expanded to take account of this new property during device selection and overlaying. On the Function templates tab you can also select the property Relevant to safety <21006>. For this reason, the Device selection (function templates) table now has an extra Relevant to safety column (except for the "Cables / connections" and "Wires" product groups). In the settings for device selection, Relevant to safety can be set as a selection criterion for all parts groups (except for "Cable" and "Wire"). Filter for project data In order to filter for safety-relevant functions in the navigators, you can access the new property Relevant to safety <20216> when selecting criteria for a filter. This new property can also be displayed as an additional column in the list view in the navigators (via Popup menu > Configure columns). Safety-relevant functions in reports Safety-relevant functions can also be taken into account in reports. One option is to place the property Relevant to safety <20216> as placeholder text in various forms (e.g. parts list, device connection diagram). Another option is to use this property as a filtering and sorting criterion for functions when generating reports. EPLAN NEWS

166 Connections and Connection Numbering Connections and Connection Numbering Applying Predefined Values for Connection Colors and Cross-section / Diameter In the properties dialogs of connections, connection, potential or net definition points, you now have the option to apply project-specific, predefined values for the connection colors and for the connection crosssections and connection diameters. Benefit: The selection of predefined values ensures that only data specific to the project is used. This standardization means that errors are avoided and the workflow for planning is improved. 166 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

167 Connections and Connection Numbering The Color / number and Cross-section / diameter fields have been extended by the relevant selection options in the respective tabs. Color / number: If you click the [...] button next to this field, the Connection colors dialog opens. Select the desired color here. You can create your own project specifications for the connection colors in the settings under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Connections > Connection colors. Cross-section / diameter: If you click [...] for this field, you go to the Cross-sections / diameters dialog. In this selection dialog, you can apply a predefined value, including the associated unit. This unit is then displayed in the Cross-section / diameter unit field. Define your own default values for a project in a new settings dialog under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Connections > Cross-sections / diameters. If the unit set for a value here is "As in project", the unit from the project-specific settings dialog Settings: Properties is applied (Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Connections > Properties). Note: You can also use the entries you have made in the Settings: Crosssections / diameters dialog as default settings for the conductor crosssections or conductor diameters of cables and shields. In the Cable / Shield tabs, the Conductor cross-section / diameter field has also been extended by the selection option described above. EPLAN NEWS

168 Connections and Connection Numbering Determining Connection Sources and Targets You now have two options to choose from when determining connection sources and targets. The default is for the device tags of the connected functions to be considered in the determination. But you can also configure EPLAN so that the position of the connected functions in the schematic is considered when determining the sources and targets of connections. This reflects the behavior in EPLAN before version 1.9 International SP 1. Benefit: With appropriate sorting, you save additional processing time. Now available to you under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Connections > General, to affect the behavior when determining connection sources and targets, is the new setting Determine the source and target of connections from the placement. If this check box is selected, the connection sources and targets are determined using the graphical position of the connected functions. The connection sources and targets are then sorted in the reports, according to their placement in the schematic. If the check box is deselected, the device tags of the connected functions are compared, to determine the connection sources and targets. The sorting of the structure identifiers in structure identifier management will be used for these comparisons; the "smaller" device tag will become the source. The check box is deselected by default. When transferring data from EPLAN 5, this results in correct source and target determination and thus in correct wiring lists. Note: Cable connections are not affected by this setting. 168 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

169 Connections and Connection Numbering Aligning Connection Definition Point Placements with Each Other Now you can set connection numbering in such a way, that the connection definition points can be aligned horizontally or vertically to each other, when placing on connection sections. Benefit: The placement of the connection definitions is instantly and easily legible and visually appealing. There is no need for time-consuming, manual positioning. If you want to perform this type of placement, in the settings for connection numbering on the Placement tab, you must activate the new Align placements with each other check box. (A possible menu path to the settings dialog is: Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Connections > Connection numbering.) Conditions for aligned placement An aligned placement of the connection definition points can only occur if the following conditions are met: The sections run parallel. The spacing between sections is always the same. The sections have a common coordinate area (in the X direction for connections running horizontally, and in the Y direction for connections running vertically). The sections that meet these criteria make up a group, within which the connection definition points are aligned to each other. Thus the parallel sections that have different spacing are not recognized as a group. The connection definition points on these sections are not aligned to each other either. EPLAN NEWS

170 Connections and Connection Numbering Normally, the connection definition points are aligned at the first graphical connection definition point within the group. If this is not possible, because the connection definition point is outside the common coordinate area, the next connection definition point of the group is considered. If none of the connection definition points is within the common coordinate area, the connection definition points in this coordinate area are moved. Example: In the following illustration, the Align placements with each other check box is initially deselected. The connection definition points are placed according to the settings in the Number of placements group box. In this case, the option On every individual section is set. The Align placements with each other check box is selected. The connection definition points on parallel sections with the same spacing are aligned horizontally or vertically to each other (highlighted here by a green border). 170 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

171 Connections and Connection Numbering If the Align placements with each other check box is deselected or if the conditions mentioned earlier are not met, the connection definition points are placed by means of the other criteria specified in the Placement tab. Resetting the Counter for Connection Numbering per Structure / Page When numbering connections, it is possible to reset the counter to its start value and then restart, subject to the established conditions, such as on every page, for every plant, etc. Previously, this was only possible manually, but now you have the opportunity to enter the counter reset in a scheme for connection numbering as well. Benefit: Counter reset can now be entered in a scheme for connection numbering. Requests for relevant numbering systems can thus be easily met and automated. The Designate connections dialog has been redesigned for this purpose. Instead of the previous check boxes, the Overwrite and Avoid identical designations settings are now made in drop-down lists. EPLAN NEWS

172 Connections and Connection Numbering For the counter reset, in the Avoid identical designations drop-down list, select the new option Per counter reset range (structure / page). As a result, the connection designations are only unique within a certain range; identical designations are also allowed in the project. Example: You have selected the "Per counter reset range (structure / page)" setting and the counter reset range is defined so that the counter is reset when the page changes. The connection designations are then unique within a page. However, the same connection designations are allowed on different pages. 172 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

173 Connections and Connection Numbering Defining the counter reset range To be able to use this new option, you must define the so-called "counter reset range" in your scheme for connection numbering. This is the range within which the counter is incremented, and within which the designations are unique. In the Connection numbering: Formats dialog, double-click on the selected "Counter" format element, for example, to open the Format: Counter dialog. Select the new Reset per structure / page check box here and then click [Settings]. In the new Settings: Counter reset range dialog that then opens, define for the counter the range within which the counter is incremented. When one of the specified criteria changes, the counter is reset to its start value. To do this, in the Structure / Page area, select the required check boxes (Higher-level function, Mounting location, Page, etc.). You can use the From source or From target options to define whether the criteria established above are applied to the source functions or target functions of the connections. Numbering Card Power Supplies and Bus Cables with General Connection Numbering The connections at PLC connection points for bus cables and card power supplies can now be numbered, together with the general connections. Benefit: PLC bus ports and PLC card power supplies can now be numbered together with general connections. Combining these operations means that some steps are no longer necessary and the result is unique. EPLAN NEWS

174 Connections and Connection Numbering The new predefined connection group "Connections connected to PLC connection points (except card power supply and bus cable)", is available in the Connection numbering: Formats dialog for this purpose. Note: The connections are numbered according to the sequence of the connection groups. If you want connection numbering like that cited above, in your scheme for connection numbering, you should firstly list the "Connections connected to PLC connection points (except card power supply and bus cable)" connection group and secondly, the "General connections" group should be in last position. 174 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

175 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Optimizing Performance by the Use of Modern Processors Use of multi-core processors One of the most important trends in computer technology over the past few years is the use of a number of main processors on a single chip. In the latest version, such multi-core processors are now also used by EPLAN in order to enhance performance. These are optimized accordingly so that our application can benefit from the additional computing power of these multi-core processors. Thus different database accesses by EPLAN are distributed over the individual processors. This does not affect their operation in EPLAN. Use of more updated processors EPLAN has also been optimized for the use of newer processors. The command set extension SSE2 (Streaming SIMD Extensions 2) is used for this, for example. As a consequence of this optimization, EPLAN now supports only later processors (e.g. Pentium 4, Athlon 64, etc.). Warning: EPLAN may no longer be capable of running on computers with older processors which were made before 2005 (see also the section "Hardware Requirements" on page 457). EPLAN NEWS

176 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Project Editing New projects with current creation date and creator When new projects were created, the data in the template was in part used for the Creator <10020> and Creation date <10021> properties. With the new EPLAN version, you now have the option of changing creator and creation date of a new project. For this purpose, the input fields Specify creation date and Specify creator, which you already know from Copy project, are now also available when creating projects. Benefit: You can enter the relevant creator and current creation date for new projects, and change this if necessary. New dialog when creating projects If you create a project by selecting Project > New, the new Create project dialog is now opened. The sequence and designation of the fields match the interface in the project wizard. 176 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

177 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Project name: Enter the project name without file extension in this field. Storage location: This field contains the directory where the new project is to be saved. EPLAN suggests using the directory specified under Options > Settings > User > Management > Directories in the Projects field as the save location. Use [...] to open a dialog for choosing a directory. Here, you can choose another directory as the storage location for the project. Template: The template used for the new project is shown here. You can select project templates or basic projects as the template. Click [...] in order to open the Select project template / basic project dialog. You can select a template in this dialog. Specify creation date: If this check box is selected, then you can specify a different creation date for the new project in the field below. In this case, the current date is entered here initially. If necessary, you can change this date. If the check box is deselected, the creation date of the selected template will be used. Specify creator: If this check box is selected, your logon name or user code will automatically be entered in the field below, depending on the settings under User > Display > User code / address. If you do not want to use your logon name or user code, you can also input a different name. If the check box is deselected, the creator who created the template will be shown. If there is nothing entered in the field, no creator was specified for the template. EPLAN NEWS

178 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Change in the project wizard The Project wizard, which you can open by selecting Project > New (Wizard) has been extended accordingly. The new setting options for creation date and creator can be found here under the first tab, Project. New projects are now named "New project" by default, irrespective of how they have been created. If there is already a project with this name, the project name then has a number added ("New project (2)",... etc.). Automatic data format checking If EPLAN is abruptly ended during editing (e.g. due to a power outage or via the Windows Task Manager), incomplete data may remain on the hard disk. Such projects for which the project database has been left "improperly" are now automatically recognized when opened. Benefit: Project data is now even more robust against external influences because errors do not propagate. In a case like this, you will be warned that the project has not been closed correctly, then you can decide whether you want to carry out a consistency check. Confirm the Consistency check prompt by selecting [Yes], and a consistency check will be carried out for the project. If no errors are found during the check, the project will then be opened. A damaged project, on the other hand, will not be opened. In such a case, the problems will be listed in the system report file and then displayed in the System messages dialog. If you click [No], the project will not be opened. In this case, you have to select a different project for editing. 178 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

179 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform EPLAN 5 / fluidplan Data Import Symbol library sequence in the settings During EPLAN 5 / fluidplan data import of projects, if some symbols from an original symbol file (e.g. DIC_WUPD.SYM) cannot be replaced with symbols from the symbol library IEC_symbol EPLAN inserts this original symbol file in the list of symbol libraries in the Settings: Symbol libraries dialog. Up to now, the relevant original symbol file had been listed after the SPECIAL library and before the IEC_symbol library in the second line of the dialog. This later led to problems in EPLAN when certain actions were executed (e.g. when inserting devices) as symbols from the first library listed (e.g. DIC_WUPD.SYM) were used. In the case of EPLAN 5 / fluidplan data import, if a case of this kind appears, the sequence of the symbol libraries will be swapped in the settings. The default symbol library IEC_symbol is listed before the original symbol file in the Settings: Symbol libraries dialog. Note: This altered sequence may possibly lead to problems with the exchange of pages / macros with other projects which have been imported with EPLAN version 1.9 (or older) and which used the other EPLAN 5 / fluidplan original symbol files (e.g. DIC_ESSD.SYM). Here, it is possible that individual symbols (e.g. change-over contacts) cannot be displayed. In this instance, we recommend that you manually revise any symbols not displayed. For this, select a suitable symbol from the IEC_symbol library from the properties dialog under the Symbol / function data tab by clicking the [...] button, which is located next to the Number / name field. EPLAN NEWS

180 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform EPLAN 21 Data Import Including net-based connections Within the scope of the extensions of the new "Net Based Wiring" add-on module, you now also have the option of transferring net-based connections on data import from EPLAN 21. For this purpose, the general default settings for EPLAN 21 data import in the General tab have been extended to include the new Include netbased connections drop-down list. (One possible menu path for the dialog Settings: EPLAN 21 data import is: Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > EPLAN 21 data import.) Here, select whether and how net-based connections are to be included: No: Net-based connections are not included. Yes: Net-based connections are included. I.e. during data import, a net definition point is automatically placed on the net, the T-nodes are adapted, and the connections are written in the form of "daisy chains" to the net definition point. From project settings: The setting indicating whether or not netbased connections are to be included are taken from the project. If the EPLAN 21 property Net-based connections is enabled for a project, the net-based connections will be included. Inherit black box structures to interruption points In EPLAN 21, it is possible for interruption points placed in black boxes or PLC boxes to take over the structure identifiers of the superior boxes. This behavior is also available to you in the EPLAN platform. 180 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

181 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform For this, the dialog Extended project structures has been extended to include the new check box Inherit black box structures to interruption points. (This dialog can be accessed via the project properties, for example, by clicking on the [Other] button in the Structure tab.) This check box is now selected by default when importing data from EPLAN 21. With this, the structure identifiers such as higher-level function, mounting location, etc. are inherited from black boxes and PLC boxes to the interruption points. Note: Please note that when creating new projects, this check box must be enabled so as to achieve the same behavior as in EPLAN 21. Data Backup Distribution of directory information during data backup When backing up project data and master data, information on the original directory is now also backed up internally. When restoring the data, this directory information is then output and suggested as a default for the target directory. If you have already backed up the data once, the directory saved when you did this will automatically be suggested as your target directory. If this data is new to you, on the other hand (e.g. a project passed on by ), the directory settings from the last data backup will be suggested as the target directory. Benefit: Data exchange and distribution of projects and master data are more user-friendly. Optionally, the data can be imported into the original directory structure or into a different one. This provides you with the requisite flexibility in data exchange with clients or subcontractors and allows projects to be managed in a uniform, well-defined directory structure. EPLAN NEWS

182 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Note: With data backup, to allow the directory structure to be passed on successfully to other project editors or to clients, we recommend that you save your projects in the default directory set for projects. You can create corresponding subdirectories here to allow you to manage client-specific projects more effectively. For projects outside the set project directory, only the default directory can be suggested as the target directory when restoring the data. Backing up projects Concerning the extension already mentioned, you now have the option of editing the name of the backup file even when backing up projects. For this purpose, the Back up projects dialog has been extended to include the Backup file name drop-down list. Backup file name: This name is used for both backup media ("Storage medium" and " "). A maximum of 260 characters is permitted for the file name including file path. The following options are available: If the project is located either directly in the project directory or in a directory outside the project directory, the project name will be suggested automatically. If the project is located in a subdirectory to the project directory, the project name will be suggested as the first entry in the drop-down list. After that, a suggestion follows in the list which is made up of the entire subdirectory path and the project name. All components of this name are separated by means of periods (e.g. "Customer1.Commission.EPLAN project"). 182 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

183 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Tip: This second suggestion supports you when restoring projects. You can immediately identify the subdirectories used by the extended project name. The components of the name which appear in the subdirectory path are not included as a project name when the project is restored. If several projects are backed up, it is not possible to edit this field, and the project names in each instance will be used as the backup file names. In the case of the first two options, you can click [...] to go to the Select backup file dialog and navigate to the desired directory there or create a new one. If you have selected a directory via this dialog, the relevant directory will also be transferred for the Backup directory field. Restoring projects The Subdirectory field and the Restore in subdirectory check box have been added to the Restore project dialog. Subdirectory: This field is used only for display. Here, the subdirectory is displayed under the default directories in which the project was located at the time of the backup. If no subdirectory was available, nothing is displayed. When restoring, if a number of backed up projects is selected with different subdirectories, the entry "<<...>>" is displayed here. Restore in subdirectory: Select this check box if the project is to be restored to the original subdirectory. If no subdirectory is stored in the data backup, this check box will be grayed out. EPLAN NEWS

184 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Notes: The Restore in subdirectory check box is disabled by default every time the dialog is opened, so you have to decide specifically whether you want to restore the data in a subdirectory. If you have not set the target directory to the default directory, a prompt will be displayed when you select this check box. This can be used to reset the target directory back to the default directory. The correct name is suggested for the subsequent Project name field, independently of the file path components in the name of the backup file. If the backup file is nevertheless renamed, EPLAN in this instance suggests the name of the backup file as the project name. Backing up master data The input field Backup file name has been extended in the relevant dialogs (e.g. Back up form) to add the [...] button. This allows you to set a different file name and a different target directory. As mostly several master data files are backed up when master data is backed up, no name is taken from the selected master data for the backup file name; instead, the last name suggested is input. Restoring master data The dialogs for restoring master data (e.g. Restore form) have also been extended with the Subdirectory field and the Restore in subdirectory check box. The Subdirectory field is, again, for display. 184 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

185 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform When master data is restored to subdirectories, it is possible to differentiate between the following two cases: If data backup took place in a subdirectory of the master data directory set, that subdirectory is displayed here. This means that an entry such as "$(MD_FORMS)\Customer1" in the Directory field was input when, e.g., backing up forms. In such cases, the Restore in subdirectory check box is available and you can select it. That is, you can state whether or not the master data is to be restored in the original subdirectory. If, on the other hand, data backup takes place in the master data directory (e.g. "$(MD_FORMS)") and if files are also backed up in subdirectories, no directory is displayed here in the Subdirectory field. The Restore in subdirectory check box is deactivated, and it is also not possible to change this setting. Master data from subdirectories also backed up is restored to a subdirectory of the target directory set, with no selection opportunity. For the Restore in subdirectory check box, the same instructions apply otherwise as those to be noted when restoring projects. EPLAN NEWS

186 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Extended PDF and DXF / DWG Export of Pages In this version, the export functionalities for outputting pages in PDF and DXF / DWG format have been greatly extended. Benefit: By combining the settings for PDF export as a scheme, you can quickly and reliably adapt this export option to customer requirements. You now use the page filter to select the relevant pages for output as a PDF. The file is smaller, easier to handle, and tailored exactly to the intended use. Sending PDF and DXF / DWG files directly by speeds up data exchange considerably. The PDF export in grayscale corresponds to the output from a black and white printer. This means that the customer receives a printout and a PDF file that look the same. A PDF export means that the 3D models from EPLAN Pro Panel and EPLAN EMI can also be viewed and forwarded outside EPLAN. Instead of a PDF file, the pages can now be split into subdirectories containing several files. This simplifies connection to higher-level management systems and enables further partial output from large projects. 186 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

187 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The innovations now available include the following: The settings for PDF export can also be saved as a scheme (see page 187). During actual output you can access the predefined settings by selecting a scheme (see page 192). A filter created in the page navigator can be taken into account in the PDF and / or DXF / DWG export (see page 188 onwards). Like the data backup, in the PDF and / or DXF / DWG export you can now either output the files to a storage medium or send them as an (see page 188 onwards). In both export functionalities you now have the option of automatically generating subdirectories (see page 188 onwards). In the PDF export, linked documents which are not stored in the project can also be copied into the target directory during the output (see page 192). 3D models from add-ons can also be included in the output during the PDF export (see page 194). Saving PDF settings as a scheme For the sake of consistency, the Settings: PDF export dialog has been moved to the other user-specific settings for interfaces. You will now find it under Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > PDF export. All user-specific settings for PDF export are now combined in a scheme. For this reason, the settings dialog has the new Scheme drop-down list plus the familiar toolbar for creating and editing schemes. If you want to output the pages of a project in PDF format using Page > Export > PDF, the PDF export dialog now shows you the current scheme. Use the [...] button next to the Scheme field to move to the settings dialog for PDF export where you can change the settings. EPLAN NEWS

188 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform New user-specific settings for export There are some new setting options for PDF and DXF / DWG export. The Export tab for DXF / DWG output has just been extended for this purpose, but the tab of the same name for PDF export is new (see illustration). Page filter: You can use this drop-down list to include a filter from the page navigator by default when exporting PDF and / or DXF / DWG files. Select a page filter that you have generated in the page navigator from this drop-down list and select the Active check box next to the list. In this case, the page filter applies to the selection made in the page navigator. If the check box is not selected, a selected page filter is not included and the PDF and / or DXF / DWG output is determined by the selection made in the page navigator only. 188 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

189 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Export medium: For PDF and / or DXF / DWG export you can now decide whether to store the files in a directory or send them by . The following options are available in this group box: Storage medium: If this option is selected, the files generated are output to a storage medium. Enter the storage location in the Output directory field. You can specify any drive and subdirectory as the target for the export. If this option is selected, the files generated are sent as an . Once the function has been called up, the files (including any directories generated) are zipped using the internal zip program and your installed editor is started. Select the maximum size of an individual mail file from the Split size drop-down list. The setting options in this group box and the behavior of the program correspond to the established conditions for data backup. Note: In order to exchange s, an editor must be installed and correctly set up on your computer. In the export process itself, you have the option of changing the export medium previously defined in the settings and selecting a different option. For this reason, the PDF export and DXF / DWG export dialogs also have the Export medium group box. Generate file names: You can now automatically assign a name to the file to be generated during the PDF export, just as you could previously for DXF / DWG export. EPLAN NEWS

190 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform For the PDF export, the following options are available in this drop-down list: None: If this option is selected, the PDF file field in the PDF export dialog is enabled and you can change the file name manually. From page names: If you select this option, EPLAN assigns names to the PDF files in a standard way using the pattern <Page name>.pdf. From properties: If you select this option, the file name is formed from the page and project properties plus freely definable separators. Use the [...] button to open the Format: Property dialog to configure the file name. Generate subdirectories: In this drop-down list you specify the default method for generating subdirectories during the PDF and /or DXF / DWG export: None: If this option is selected, no subdirectories are generated during the export. From page tree: If this option is selected, subdirectories which reflect the project structure are automatically generated during the export. All the pages associated with a structure are exported into the relevant subdirectory. Example: You are carrying out a PDF export for the sample project EPLAN-Demo and you have selected the From page tree option in the Generate subdirectories field. In this case, e.g. for the higher-level function with the structure identifier =EB3, a corresponding subdirectory =EB3 is generated during export into the output directory. Like the project structure with various mounting locations, this subdirectory includes the other subdirectories +EBS, +ET1, +ET2, +ET3, +ET4, and +ETA. Each of these subdirectories contains a PDF file. 190 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

191 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform From properties: If this option is selected, subdirectories are automatically generated during the export if a predefined property changes. The subdirectory names created from project and / or page properties and freely definable separators can be combined. To configure the properties, use the [...] button to move to the Format: Property dialog. Here you can, for instance, use the "Directory separator" format element to generate a directory structure with several subdirectories arranged one below the other. Example: In the settings for the DXF / DWG export, you have set the From properties option for the Generate subdirectories field. In the Format: Property dialog you have selected the following format elements: Format element Project properties (Project: Type) Separator Symbol P10031 Page properties (Higher-level function) P1120 Directory separator \ Page properties (Mounting location) _ P1220 If you then export the sample project EPLAN-Demo in DXF format, several subdirectories are generated in the output directory specified. Below the directory with the project name EPLAN-Demo are the subdirectories AT78_CA1, AT78_EB3, AT78_FB3, and AT78_REPORT (AT78 is the value for the project property Project: Type entered in the sample project). Further subdirectories with the structure identifiers for mounting locations are located below these hierarchical levels (e.g. AT78_CA1\EAA, AT78_EB3\EBS, AT78_EB3\ET1, etc.). These subdirectories contain the exported DXF files. Note: PDF file output is split up if you generate subdirectories during the PDF export. All the pages output to a subdirectory are combined into a PDF file. You can not jump between the different PDF files. EPLAN NEWS

192 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Output: Only available in the settings for PDF export! You can use this group box to specify the default settings for the output. In addition to the previous functionalities Color and Black and white, you now have the option of Grayscale. Select this option if you want the PDF to be output in grayscale. The grayscale is calculated from the colors for the white color scheme. "Device pages" tab The Device pages tab has been redesigned as part of the improvements to PDF export. The option of saving additional filter criteria for the device pages as a scheme has been removed because you can now define an overall scheme for all user-specific PDF settings. You now specify the filter criteria for the device pages in the Device filter table. To select a filter criterion, click (New) above the table. PDF export with linked documents You can now set the PDF export in EPLAN in such a way that external documents / linked documents which are not stored in the project are also copied into the target directory during output. To do this, select the new Copy externally linked documents to output directory check box in the user-specific settings for the PDF export. A possible menu path here is: Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > PDF export. Select the General tab in the dialog that is displayed. Exporting pages in PDF format To output single pages or an entire project in PDF format, select the menu items Page > Export > PDF. EPLAN opens the redesigned PDF export dialog. 192 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

193 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Here you have the option of individually changing the default settings that you have saved in a scheme. To do this, select the settings required in the new Export medium and Output group boxes and in the previously existing Use print margins check box. You also have the option of using the new Scheme drop-down list to select a different predefined scheme for the PDF export. Or click [...] to open the Settings: PDF export dialog to create or edit a scheme. EPLAN NEWS

194 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Other settings available for the export In the PDF export dialog you can also access all the other settings relating to PDF export. For this upgrade, the [Settings] button has been changed into a menu with the following menu items: Output languages: Opens the project-specific Settings: PDF output languages dialog. Print margins: Opens the dialog with the relevant print settings for the PDF export. Outputting 3D models in the PDF export The PDF export dialog also contains the new Output model check box. Using this upgrade, you now have the option of including 3D models from EPLAN Pro Panel and EPLAN EMI in the output. If you use this option, extra document pages containing the exported models are added at the end of the PDF file. So that you can make default settings for this PDF export, the Settings: PDF export dialog has been expanded by adding the 3D tab. On this tab you can specify separately whether the 3D models for EPLAN Pro Panel and / or EPLAN EMI should be included in the PDF export. 194 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

195 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Finding and Replacing Jumping forwards and backwards in the jump sequence of cross-referenced functions All representation types, placements, and report entries for a cross-referenced device are integrated into a jump sequence. Previously, you could only enter these cross-referenced functions in the Go to list using Find > Go to > Cross-referenced function. In the new version, you also have the option of jumping forwards or backwards in this jump sequence for a cross-referenced device. Benefit: This new functionality allows for fast navigation in the jump sequence for a cross-referenced device. Therefore the Cross-referenced function menu item now has new submenu items as follows: List Corresponds to the old Cross-referenced function menu item. Enters all cross-referenced functions for a selected function into the Go to list and opens the list. Forward Jumps forwards to the Go to list and displays the relevant function in the graphical editor. Backward Jumps backwards to the Go to list and displays the relevant function in the graphical editor. You can see the jump sequence from the sequence in the Go to list. EPLAN NEWS

196 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Tip: To jump between the various cross-referenced functions of a device in the graphical editor, use the shortcut keys [Alt] + [Page down] and [Alt] + [Page up]. First select the function required in the graphical editor (or in a project data navigator). Use [Alt] + [Page down] to jump forwards through the cross-referenced functions in the jump sequence in the graphical editor. If there are currently no entries for the selected function in the Go to list, new entries are added to the list and the list opens. Use [Page up] to move backwards through the jump sequence in the graphical editor in the same way. Go to part assemblies Another innovation is that the Find menu now includes the Part assemblies menu item under Go to. Benefit: Using this new functionality, you can jump specifically to the part assemblies for an object to find further information about the relevant part. First select the object required in the schematic. Then select Find > Go to > Part assemblies. EPLAN enters all the output locations where the parts of the object occur in parts lists and summarized parts lists into the Go to list and opens it. In this list, the part number for each part listed is displayed in the Name column. Use the Popup menu > Go to (graphic) menu item to jump from the list to the relevant locations in the part assemblies. Tip: This menu item also functions on report pages where the part number for an object has been output (e.g. device tag lists). 196 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

197 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Including objects in the layout space in the search The find operation in EPLAN now offers the option of including objects in a layout space. Layout spaces and associated objects such as mounting surfaces, mounting rails, etc. can be added to a project using the new "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on (see the relevant section on page 342). The Search location group box in the Find dialog has been expanded by adding the new Layout space check box for this purpose. Select this check box to search for the term in layout spaces. If the check box is deselected, layout spaces will be ignored in the search. Example: You want to find a specific mechanical item in a layout space. In the Find what field of the Find dialog, enter the search term U and in the Search in group box select the DT / designation check box. In the Search location group box you also specify whether the search should include the entire project as well as the layout spaces. The Search results dialog then lists all the part placements (mounting surfaces, mounting rails, etc.) which have a U as the displayed DT. EPLAN NEWS

198 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Influencing the Value and Unit Display For many properties in EPLAN you now have the option of specifying the way in which entered values are displayed. The values entered (e.g. in a properties dialog) do not change but they are displayed according to the unit and other settings specified. This relates to the display in the graphical editor and in output report pages and labeling. Benefit: The extended functionality for values and units means that in reports, you can quickly and easily create totals in a specified unit (e.g. m). The data in the schematic is displayed in different units (e.g. cm, km) which are more suitable for detailed representation. New display properties For extended display of values and units, the display settings on the Display and Format tabs (for texts) have been extended by adding the new Value / unit area. The new, clearer listing of display and format properties has already been discussed. More information on this is provided on page EPLAN NEWS 2.0

199 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The following settings are available under Value / unit: Displayed measuring unit: The default setting for this property is "Unchanged". With this setting, the property is displayed exactly as it has been entered in the particular field. The other settings under Value / unit are then grayed out. To select a different displayed measuring unit, click in the Assignment column, and then on [...]. An alphabetical list of physical dimensions (such as "Pressure", "Length", "Frame", etc.), is opened in a hierarchical tree structure. Click the character to open the required hierarchy level of a specific dimension (such as "Power"). Double-click in the hierarchy level underneath to select one of the listed units (e.g. "mw"). The other display properties under Value / unit will then be validated. All the units listed for a dimension are designated a "unit of measurement group" here. The base units are highlighted in the list by appearing in bold type. The dimensions and units displayed here are managed internally by EPLAN, and you are not able to adapt or extend them. With certain dimensions ("Length", "Frame"), you can also apply the displayed measuring unit from the project or user settings. Display: Use this drop-down list to specify how the value of the entered string and unit are to be displayed: All: Value and unit are displayed. Hide unit: The selected unit is not displayed. Hide value: All the values of the selected unit are hidden. In contrast, the additional texts and units are displayed. Only first value: Only the first value of the selected unit is displayed. Only unit: Only the selected unit is displayed. Values and additional texts are hidden. EPLAN NEWS

200 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Decimal places: Select the number of decimal places to be output from this drop-down list. You can also apply the decimal place setting from the Displayed unit of length user setting. A relevant entry for this is available in the list. Decimal places, variable: Activate this check box if the number of decimal places is not to be filled with zeroes. However rounding is always carried out to the number specified under Decimal places. Example: You have entered the following information for a device in the Technical characteristics field: Power A: 750 W, Power B: 500 W In the Display tab, under Value / unit, the Displayed measuring unit kw and the Decimal places value 3 have been specified for this property. Once you have clicked [Apply], the entry in the Technical characteristics field remains unchanged, and this text is displayed in the graphical editor: Power A: kw, Power B: kw If you select the Decimal places, variable check box, the display changes to: Power A: 0.75 kw, Power B: 0.5 kw There is a new project setting to output spaces before the units. More information on this is provided in the section "New project setting for output of the unit" on page EPLAN NEWS 2.0

201 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Notes: If you have entered values with units from two different unit of measurement groups in one data entry field, you can only influence the display of one unit with the settings under Value / unit. If no unit has been specified in a string, the base unit of the chosen displayed measuring unit is taken as the basis for converting the numeric values. If the displayed measuring unit is selected from a unit of measurement group different from the unit specified in the data entry field, then it will be assumed for all the values that the entry is made in the base unit of the selected displayed measuring unit. Using the new display properties The extended display properties are used at the following locations in EPLAN: In input fields for properties (Display tab) And anywhere where you can enter strings or multilingual strings. In path function texts (Format tab) In special texts (Format tab) In placeholder texts in forms (Format tab) The display settings stored in the forms are used to format the data that is output in reports. The value and unit settings that have been specified can be viewed in the relevant placeholder text on the report pages but cannot be changed. In labeling (Property - <Property type> dialog) The properties dialog, which opens when selecting format elements for the header, label area, and footer, has been redesigned for this purpose. The formatting settings on the right-hand side are now also selected in a table with a tree-like structure. EPLAN NEWS

202 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The extensions for value and unit can not be used at the following locations: In graphical texts In placeholder texts on report pages In length fields for dimensioning and for graphical positioning (e.g. in properties dialogs for graphical elements). Use of separators In the fields and properties listed above, if you now enter numeric values with a full stop and a comma, the first separator is evaluated as a thousands separator and the first character of the opposite type (comma / full stop) as a decimal separator. If there are several separators of the same type in a number (full stop or comma), this separator is evaluated as a thousands separator. If only one separator (full stop or comma) occurs in a number, this is interpreted as a decimal separator. New properties for full-length values In some of the properties used so far (e.g. for cable and connection lengths or for weight specifications) the values may be full-length internally, but they are rounded up or down for display. In order to retain accuracy in any potential conversions to other units, the properties listed below are now available: Cable length (complete) <20257> Subset / length (full) <20510>: Subset or length of a part including unit. This property may be used in bills of materials, for example. Working pressure (full) <22230> Control range (full) <22231> Flow (full) <22232> Weight (full) <22233> 202 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

203 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Free properties: Value and unit (full) <22234>: Value of a free property including unit. Length (full) <31090>: Length of a connection including unit. Subset / length (full) <31091>: Subset or length of a part entered at the function, including unit. Using the index, you can differentiate between 50 entries. New project setting for output of the unit The Settings: Date / time / numbers dialog now has a new setting for outputting the unit (menu path: Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Display > Date / time / numbers). The For numbers output unit with blanks check box is available here. Select this check box if you want numbers that are output with a unit, such as kg, to have a blank before the unit. If this check box is deselected, no blank is inserted between the number and the unit. Enhancements to the EPLAN API So that the EPLAN API user can also use the enhanced display properties for values and units, all the new format properties are available in the EPLAN API. The new UnitParser class also enables you to convert values defined in one unit into the values of another unit (from the same unit group). You will find further details about this in the online help for EPLAN API. EPLAN NEWS

204 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Graphical Editor Rapid opening of page properties In the graphical editor, double-clicking on the plot frame of an open page opens the Page properties dialog which displays the properties of this page. Extending the search for path function text The EPLAN platform now provides the option of extending the search for the path function text to the complete schematic path. Benefit: You can position path function texts more freely, making them easier to read. Errors due to inaccurately positioned path function texts are prevented. Several adjacent components in a path can now automatically use the same text. This provides a quick and easy way of creating clear schematics and makes working with path-specific function texts even more flexible. The project setting Extend path function text on the schematic path (under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical editing > General) must be selected. This setting allows you to decide whether to carry out an extended search for the path function text or whether the search should be carried out as before. If this check box is selected, the search for the path function text is carried out within the limits of the path defined by the plot frame. In this case, a path function text is carried over into the Function text (automatic) property of a component if it is located anywhere within the same path. However, the insertion point of the path function text does not need to be located immediately above / below the insertion point of the component in question. 204 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

205 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform If the check box is not selected, path function texts are only carried over into the Function text (automatic) property if the component insertion point and the path function text insertion point lie immediately above or below one another. This is the default setting and is the same as the previous method of searching for path function text. Setting the displayed language of multilingual texts blockwise using actions In EPLAN you now have the option of changing several multilingual texts on a page to a specific displayed language by means of two actions. Benefit: You can change the displayed language of all placed texts on a page with two mouse clicks. The ability to switch display languages quickly makes it much easier to handle international projects. Therefore the command line parameter /language:? was added to the two actions shown below: "Set component format" With this action (action name: XGedIaFormatSymbol) you can specify the language of property texts (function texts, remarks, etc.). "Set text format" With this action (action name: XGedIaFormatText) you can specify the language of free, graphical texts. After linking the buttons on a toolbar with these two actions and specifying the language required (e.g. French /language:fr_fr) in the command line, you can set the texts in a selected area to this language with a mouse click. EPLAN NEWS

206 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Example: You want to change the function text and other placed property texts for specific components on a schematic page to French. The entry in the command line of the Set button dialog looks like this: XGedStartInteractionAction /Name:XGedIaFormatSymbol /language:fr_fr Note: Before the texts can be displayed in the language selected, they must be available in multiple languages in the project and must have been translated into the relevant language. Multilingual texts for designation of hyperlinks In the new version of EPLAN, the text / designations of hyperlinks can be displayed in the language of the user interface. Benefit: Even in multilingual documentation, you can now create hyperlinks as self-explanatory text. This makes it easier for all project participants to understand the information embedded in the drawings, even in international projects. The relevant popup menu items, e.g. Translate, Multilingual input, etc., have been added to the Text / designation field in the hyperlink properties dialog. Multilingual entries are also possible for description texts in external documents which are stored for a part on the Technical data tab of the Parts management dialog and can be placed as hyperlinks in the graphical editor. Note: Before the text / designation of a hyperlink can be displayed in the current dialog language of the interface, it must be available in the project in the appropriate language. 206 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

207 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Property texts for boxes when changing scale If the scale on schematic pages is changed, the appearance of property texts for boxes (location, black, PLC, and macro boxes) can now be adjusted (scaled) in exactly the same way as for other components. Benefit: When the scale changes, the proportions of the schematic remain the same. There is no longer any need to change the font size, etc. This means that the scale can be changed with a minimum of manual work. Even retrospective changes do not cause delays to project editing. On "Panel layout" type pages, changing the scale does not affect the property texts for the boxes: The corresponding texts remain optically unchanged. Plug DT and channel designation retained when moved The plug DT of PLC or device connection points and the channel designation of PLC connection points can be adopted in the same way as DT adoption, e.g. from the left (or from above). If you hold down the [Shift] key when moving PLC or device connection points e.g. from a PLC box or black box the properties listed below will be retained in addition to the full DT of the connection point moved: Plug DT (automatic) and Channel designation (automatic) (only for PLC connection points). Benefit: This allows you to change the graphical representation of plugs and PLC connection points without changing the logical functionality of the device. Use these EPLAN functionalities in a targeted way in different phases of a project to define how the system should behave when devices are moved in different situations. EPLAN NEWS

208 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform For the functions in question, the Plug DT (automatic) and Channel designation (automatic) properties remain unchanged. For the components moved and other components affected, the displayed DT and the values in the Plug DT and Channel designation fields can change as a result of these actions. Expansion of special characters In the Special characters dialog you can select frequently used special characters and insert them at the current cursor position. In the new version, this list has been expanded to include the following frequently used special characters: Square root ( ) Fraction - One half (½) Fraction - One quarter (¼) Fraction - Three quarters (¾) To the power of three ( 3 ) Cross-section, diameter (Ø). Benefit: These frequently used special characters can now be inserted into the text more quickly. To access these special characters when entering text or in specific text fields, click in the relevant field and select Popup menu > Special characters. Less frequently used special characters can be accessed via the Windows character map. 208 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

209 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Devices Extension to user-defined property arrangement Changing user-defined property arrangements If you change a user-defined property arrangement on the Display tab of the properties dialog and wish to save it under an existing name, a prompt is now displayed which enables you to transfer the changed display settings to all components with this property arrangement. Benefit: In this way, you can very quickly change the display of texts on all components of the same type. It is also a quick and easy way of changing and revising project documentation if necessary. You define the basic standards, and therefore create a clear, consistent layout for schematics. If you confirm the Change property arrangement prompt by selecting [Yes], the changed display settings are applied to all the components that use this property arrangement. If you select [No], the changed display settings are only applied to the current component. For all other components that use this same property arrangement, the display settings remain unchanged and their property arrangement is changed to "User-defined". Note: Note that a stored, user-defined property arrangement is only available for symbol variants of the same type. Property arrangement for connection definition points There are two default values for the property arrangements for connection definition points. The default arrangement for connection definition points placed when inserting cable definition lines / shields is "Conductor". EPLAN NEWS

210 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The default property arrangement for connection definition points which are inserted individually is "Default setting (Connection)". If you wish to save a user-defined property arrangement for a connection definition point, a separate Save property arrangement dialog opens which takes account of these two default values. Benefit: A user-defined property arrangement can be used projectwide as the default for all "types" of connection definition points. You define standard identifier blocks which give your schematics a clear, consistent layout. Instead of the Use as default check box, the dialog therefore contains two setting options as follows: Use as default for connections: Select this check box if this saved arrangement is to be used as the default for "normal" connection definition points for all additional usages of these symbol variants. This property arrangement is also used for connection definition points that arise during connection numbering. Use as default for conductors: Select this check box if this saved arrangement is to be used as the default for conductor connection definition points which are automatically placed while drawing cables / shields in all additional usages of these symbol variants. Changing the graphic of black boxes and similar components via the properties dialog As already introduced in Version 1.9 International SP 1 for mounting panels and part placements, you can now edit the graphical properties of other dynamic components (location boxes, black boxes, etc.) via the properties dialog in the same way. Benefit: This means that you can place black boxes, location boxes, etc. with great precision. 210 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

211 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The additional tabs listed below are now available in the relevant properties dialogs: Rectangle tab: for location, black, PLC and macro boxes, containers, PCT loops, and PCT loop functions Polygon tab: for black boxes which are drawn as polygons (symbols DC2, DCF2, PLCC3, SC2 from symbol library SPECIAL) Extension tab: for shields Line tab: for cable definition lines. Properties dialog for bundle connection points The "normal" properties dialog is now used for bundle connection point symbols. For example, if you place one of these connection symbols on a page in the graphical editor using Insert > Bundle connection point > "Connection type", instead of the previous Edit bundle connection point data, the Properties (components): Bundle connection point dialog now opens. Benefit: The information about bundle connection points can be displayed individually. You can precisely define the property display that you need for a bundle connection point. The summarized representation of connection points combined with the detailed definition of the property display make the schematic even clearer and even more informative for all downstream engineering phases. EPLAN NEWS

212 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform On the Bundle connection point tab you can enter the Bundle connection point designation and the Bundle connection point description, as before. This dialog now also has a Display tab where you can specify the display settings for the relevant bundle connection point. Instead of using the default property Bundle connection point data <19072> (whose value is taken automatically from the description or the designation if the description is not available), you can also select the properties Bundle connection point designation <19070> and / or Bundle connection point description <19071> for the property arrangement. Jump functions for location boxes Location boxes can be made cross-reference-capable by using the Main placement <20305> property. Cross-references are formed when all location boxes have the same DT and only one of them is the main placement. To make it easier to navigate between the various placements, you can also use the following functionalities in the popup menu for location boxes: Go to (cross-referenced) Go to (all representation types) Go to (counterpiece) Insert into list of search results. You can use the Go to (counterpiece) menu item to jump to the main placement; Go to (all representation types) and Go to (cross-referenced) enter all location boxes with the same full DT into the Go to list and open it. 212 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

213 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Benefit: This navigation option saves you time when searching the project for location boxes. You can also navigate easily in large projects with a mouse click, and you don't waste project planning time searching for important information. Finding, not searching is the motto. Plug DT for device connection points To enable you to provide black boxes with information about potential plugs, the two properties Plug DT <20406> and Plug DT (automatic) <20431> are now available for device connection points, in the same way as for PLC connection points. Benefit: The option of specifying plugs on black boxes further improves the representation of complex items without timeconsuming symbol creation. After insertion of a device connection point, the Plug DT property is displayed immediately in the Properties table. You enter the plug DT for the device connection point in the relevant field in the Value column. As is normal for DT adoption, the DT can be adopted from the left (or from above), for instance. Note: The plug DT is just an information for the device connection points to assist in identification of an individual device connection point. If a device connection point is the target of a report, the plug DT is also included in the report output. If you also wish to display the Plug DT (automatic) property in the property table, you need to select it via property selection. This property shows you the automatically determined values for a DT adoption. For output in the reports (e.g. in a device connection diagram), insert the Plug DT (automatic) property as placeholder text in the relevant form. EPLAN NEWS

214 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform To display a plug DT at the device connection point in the graphical editor, you may also need to change the property arrangement on the Display tab and select the Plug DT property for display. A new layer EPLAN433, Property placement.plug DT is now used as the default for the plug DT for device and PLC connection points. Considering part placements in global editing The Properties (global) editing mode allows you to edit the common properties of the different representation types for a function simultaneously in a single action. Part placements are now included in global editing in the properties dialog (and elsewhere). If you wish to globally edit the properties of a part placement and select, for instance, the Popup menu > Properties (global) menu item in a navigator, the "normal" properties dialog for global editing opens if there is a main function and / or main terminal for part placement. A change to the part number or another common property (e.g. the function text) is written back to the part placement and all other representation types for the function. The Part placement tab is only displayed in the properties dialog during global editing if there is no main function and / or associated terminal for part placement. Edit sequence for global editing In conventional part placements there are two representation types: "Panel layout" and "Detailed panel layout". However, part placement for the 3D mounting layout in the new "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on uses the "3D mounting layout" representation type. 214 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

215 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The sequence for global editing is therefore as follows: Multi-line Overview Pair cross-reference Single-line P&I diagram Wire harness Panel layout Detailed panel layout 3D mounting layout. If the common property of a function has different data in the different representation types, this sequence is used to decide which data is applied during global editing. EPLAN therefore first takes the properties of the multi-line representation type. Adopting properties of the P&I diagram functions during synchronizing A function can be displayed more than once in the schematic as a distributed single-line, multi-line, overview, or P&I diagram function or as a pair cross-reference. If the Properties (global) editing mode has not been selected, you can edit the properties of the distributed functions independently of one another. Differences between the function properties will arise as a result. You can synchronize the functions in order to harmonize the properties of the functions that are displayed in a distributed manner. When doing this, you now also have the option of applying the properties of the "P&I diagram" representation type to the other representation types. Highlight the project, page, or function that you wish to synchronize and then select the new menu item Utilities > Synchronize > P&I diagram --> all representation types. Click [OK] to confirm the prompt and carry out the synchronization. EPLAN NEWS

216 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Assigning structure identifiers for part definition points Part definition points behave in the same way as location boxes and on insertion, they adopt the structure of the higher-level unit (pages, location boxes, black boxes). A device tag may be input, but this is not necessary. Benefit: Parts which are inserted into the project via part definition points can be directly assigned to a structure identifier. The Part definition point tab in the properties dialog has been expanded for this purpose with the new Displayed DT and Full DT fields and the new Structure identifier group box. To enable you to also change the display setting of placed properties (DT (displayed), Part number, etc.), the new Display tab is now available for part definition points. You can use the property Part of a part definition <20508> in the bill of materials navigator, for example, to filter by the parts which are specified at part definitions. This new property is also available as a filter criterion in the navigators for parts / devices (e.g. in the 2D panel layout navigator) and in the part-specific reports (parts list, summarized parts list). 216 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

217 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Allowing identical connection point designations for devices Previously, EPLAN did not allow identical connection point designations for several functions of a device. This could lead to a large number of messages with the number (message text "Duplicate connection point designation: <x>") being displayed in message management. If a device includes several functions, it is now also possible for these functions to have the same connection point designations. This can be useful, for example, if you want to assign the same connection point designation (e.g. PE) to several device connection points in a black box. Benefit: Allowing identical connection point designations in EPLAN means that devices with connection points which have been given the same name by the manufacturer can now be managed in full. If you want to allow this for a device, in the properties dialogs for the functions switch to the Symbol / function data tab and click on the [Logic] button. In the Connection point logic dialog select the new Allow same connection point designations check box for the connection point in question. Then identical connection point designations are permitted for a connection point within a device. If you specify this setting for all functions of the device with the same connection point designation, check run no longer outputs messages for these functions. If the check box is deselected, the corresponding connection point designations within a device must be unique. EPLAN NEWS

218 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Allowing the same designations for terminals As part of this upgrade, the property Multiple entries allowed <20811> has been renamed. Old name: Multiple entries allowed New name: Allow same designations You can use this property to specify that EPLAN should not display messages if multiple terminals have the same terminal designation. Edit in Table Shortcut key to close edit in table The [Ctrl] + [Q] shortcut can now be used to open and close editing in tables. Press [Ctrl] + [Q] once to open the Edit function data dialog. Press this shortcut again to close the dialog. Note: You can only use [Ctrl] + [Q] to close edit in table if your cursor is in the Edit function data dialog. If you are making a selection in a navigator or in the graphical editor, for instance, you must press [Ctrl] + [Q] twice to close the dialog. 218 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

219 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Project Data Navigators New jump functions in the connection navigator The popup menu in the connection navigator has two new menu items, Go to (graphic source) and Go to (graphic target). Benefit: The new menu items enable you to determine the point in the schematic to which the jump is made. You save time because you immediately obtain the information you need. As before, you use the familiar Go to (graphic) menu item to jump to the connection definition point of a connection that has already been placed. If this point does not exist, you jump to a target for the connection in the graphical editor. Use Go to (graphic source) to jump to the source of a placed connection in the graphical editor. Select Go to (graphic target) to display the target for the placed connection in the graphical editor. Placing macros The former Place part macro functionality in the project data navigators has been expanded and renamed to reflect the new version of EPLAN. Old name: Place part macro New name: Place macro Benefit: You can now place a graphic even though no macro has been stored for the part. This means that the work flow is not interrupted and the parts data can be added at a later date. EPLAN allows an iterative engineering process and supports efficient project editing at every planning stage. EPLAN NEWS

220 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform If a part macro is available in the representation type selected in the submenu, it is placed (e.g. Popup menu > Place macro > Multi-line). If a suitable representation type is not found, then the part macro with a different representation type is suggested. If you want to place a different macro, you can now use [Backspace] to open the Select macro dialog and select a different macro. If a part macro does not exist, macro selection is opened directly and you can select a macro. Placing macros with more sensible preselection Furthermore, when you place a part macro from a navigator, the macro variant which best fits the selection made in the navigator is now initially displayed at the cursor. The criteria for a match are as follows: Function definition Number of functions. You can still use [Tab] to "page" through the available macro variants during placement. And you can use [Shift] + [Tab] to page through the available representation types for a variant. Note: The program cannot make a sensible preselection unless the representation type selected (e.g. Place macro > Multi-line) is available in the macro variants. Otherwise a different representation type is suggested for the part macro. Example: This program behavior can be useful, for example, in channel-oriented procedures (see the appropriate section on page 119) where the grouped PLC connection points for a channel are stored in one macro variant and the entire PLC card in another variant of the same macro. If an appropriate part with a macro for a PLC box is selected and you select a channel of this PLC box in the PLC navigator, the variant with the channel is preset when the macro is placed. 220 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

221 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Placing all functions of a device If you select a device in a navigator, all functions of the device are now included when you use the menu items Place, Place macro, and Assign. If you select a device in a navigator and drag it to a schematic page using drag & drop, all the functions of this device are offered for placement one after the other. You can use [Tab] to "page" through the available symbol variants for each function. Adjusting the column width In all navigators for project data (device, terminal strip navigator, etc.) the popup menu in the list view now has the Adjust column width menu item. You can use this menu item to adjust the width of all the columns in the list so that the heading and content of the columns are completely visible. Device group DT on associated devices For devices which belong to a device group, the project data navigators display the full DT of the device group main function in addition to the connection point designation. This DT is now separated from the next connection point designation by brackets. Example: For the NO contact Y1 belonging to a device group, with connection point designation 13 14, the device navigator no longer displays =A1+O1-H1: but instead displays the connection point designation (=A1+O1-H1) EPLAN NEWS

222 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Defined Devices Taking account of macro variants If both a macro and function templates are specified for a part, functions which appear in other variants of this macro are also taken into account when generating a new device in the navigators (via Popup menu > New device) or when inserting a device in the graphical editor (via Insert > Device). Benefit: Because the device concept takes other macro variants into account, it is quick and easy to plan devices that are distributed throughout the diagram. This provides a simple, reliable way of planning even complex devices. Appropriate processing of device data makes project planning itself easy and reliable, with quality included! Macro variants are used in turn while these free function templates can be superimposed. If the functions in the current macro variant do not match the free function templates, the action is canceled. No further functions are generated from the remaining macro variants. Representation types for unplaced functions When you delete the placement of a function in the schematic, the representation type for the unplaced function is now retained. Benefit: Functional preplanning of a plant without drawing pages is now possible in every representation type. You can insert the devices directly as single-line drawings at a later date, e.g. using drag & drop. This means you achieve the required diagram characteristics sooner. You choose the planning process and gain greater freedom to implement your individual planning approach. 222 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

223 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform A placement can be deleted for functions with the following representation types: Multi-line Overview Pair cross-reference Single-line P&I diagram. These representation types are now also available for all unplaced functions and can be specified on the Symbol / function data tab in the properties dialog. For functions with the following representation types the placement can not be deleted: External Graphic Panel layout, detailed panel layout, 3D mounting layout (these are representation types for part placements). To delete the graphical representation of a function from the schematic, highlight the relevant component and select the Edit > Delete placement menu items. The function is retained as an unplaced function with the original representation type and can, for instance, be placed again from the device navigator. Tip: In the graphical editor, the Delete placement menu item is now also available in the popup menu for a selected component. EPLAN NEWS

224 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Part Selection Part selection with scheme selection It is now possible to use different data sources in EPLAN wherever a part can be selected. Benefit: Different data sources can be used for part selection throughout EPLAN. You can populate the device list or the bill of materials navigator with data from a number of data sources, e.g. when Adding parts. The settings for part selection now include the new Part selection with scheme selection check box for this purpose. To open the relevant Settings: Part selection dialog, you can use the Options > Settings > User > Management > Part selection menu path. 224 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

225 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform If you select this check box, the new Part selection: Select data source dialog opens at each part selection. In this selection dialog you can select a different data source (a scheme) from the Data source dropdown list and / or click [...] to view / edit the settings. In the Always use this data source check box, which also appears in this dialog, you can specify that a selected data source should always be used. If this is the case, the selection dialog is not launched at the next part selection and the Part selection with scheme selection check box in the settings is deactivated. Click [OK] to apply the selected scheme and start part selection. Do not show conflict dialog In the Settings: Part selection dialog referred to above, you now have the option of hiding the conflict dialog during part selection. The new Show conflict dialog check box was therefore added to the dialog. The default is for this check box to be activated. Benefit: You can decide whether the conflict dialog should be displayed during part selection. This means that you can prevent the conflict dialog from opening during API part selection, for instance. If the check box is not selected, the Conflict dialog is not displayed during part selection. Part selection behaves as if the conflict dialog has been confirmed by clicking [OK]. If a part or technical properties have already been assigned to a device, these are automatically overwritten with the data of the new part. Data which has been assigned to the device but is not included with the new part is retained, i.e. values are replaced or added but existing errors or properties are not cleared. EPLAN NEWS

226 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Modifications to part management during part selection You can now set up EPLAN so that existing parts from parts management can be changed and new parts created during part selection. In the Settings: Part selection dialog, select the new Modification allowed during selection check box. Benefit: Parts from parts management can be directly completed during part selection while editing the schematic. This reduces the workload considerably. If this check box is selected and you open part selection via the Parts tab in a properties dialog, the fields on the right-hand side of the Part selection dialog are enabled so that you can edit them. Because of this innovation, part selection was changed to reflect the Parts management dialog. The menu items available in the tree, the list and under [Extras] are now the same as in parts management. (The only things that are not available are generating and switching the database.) The Part selection dialog also has an [Apply] button so that you can change several parts without having to close part selection in between. 226 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

227 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Symbol Editor Reorganizing symbol libraries The symbol editor now offers the option of reorganizing symbol libraries. Benefit: When a symbol library is reorganized, deleted data (symbols, symbol variants) is irretrievably removed from the library. This makes the symbol library smaller and reduces the volume of data to be saved. To do this, select the Utilities > Master data > Symbol library > Reorganize menu path. The Reorganize symbol library dialog opens; select the library to be reorganized and click [Open]. The symbol library is then compressed and reorganized. Displaying variants when paging in the symbol editor When you page through the symbols of an open symbol library in the symbol editor, only the variant of the symbol that you have previously specified in the Symbol selection dialog is displayed. If the specified variant of a symbol is not available, the symbol editor will show an empty page with the text "Variant does not exist". EPLAN NEWS

228 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Form Editor Combining overview reports EPLAN now allows you to combine overview reports (table of contents, parts list, etc.) for a specific property. For instance, you can combine the data for each page type in the table of contents. Benefit: Reports generated in this way provide a better overview and make it easier to find your way around the project documentation. Clear documentation also means high quality and smooth application of machine and plant documentation in the downstream engineering phases. In order to achieve this, the new property Combine in a line by <13111> is now available in the form properties for the relevant forms. First select this property in Property selection, then click [...] in the Value column. 228 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

229 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The new Properties to be combined dialog opens, where you can define the properties for which identical data should be combined in one line. Click the (New) button to open the familiar Property selection dialog where you select the properties to be combined and transfer them to the list. More than one property may be selected. Separator for output values The default separator for the values output in a line is the semicolon or, for combined values, the string "...". However, you can also specify other separators for a form via the form properties Separator for multiple values <13059> and Separator for combined values <13082>. Example: After redesigning a relevant form, the table of contents created for a sequentially numbered project is as follows: Page type Page... Title page / cover sheet 1 Table of contents 2 Schematic single-line Schematic multi-line ; Overview ; EPLAN NEWS

230 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Combining parts in enclosure legends When outputting enclosure legends, identical part numbers can now be combined in one line. For this reason, the new property Combine in a line by <13111> is also available in the form properties for enclosure legends. To combine by part number, in Property selection select the property Part number <20100>. It is also possible to output the number of part placements that have been combined in a line. The property Total amount (number of units) <20499> is now also available as placeholder text for "Enclosure legend (*.f18)" type forms. Conditional areas in dynamic forms You can now use "conditional areas" as additional dynamic areas in dynamic forms. These areas are inserted into the reports when certain specified conditions are met. This enables you to format your reports because graphical elements such as lines, text, etc. can be assigned to a conditional area. Benefit: Conditional areas offer numerous formatting options for your report pages, so your reports will be more individual and tailored to your requirements. To insert a conditional area for a dynamic form, select Insert > Dynamic area > Conditional area in the form editor. Draw the conditional area as a rectangle. Double-click in the rectangle and select the Conditions tab in the properties dialog. On this tab you can define the conditions under which specific areas are output in your reports. The conditions you specify are as follows: If property is changed Click [...] in this field to move to the Conditions dialog where you can select the property that triggers output of the area when it is changed. 230 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

231 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform When switching objects Select this check box to specify that the conditional area should be evaluated whenever an object is switched (see example below). At first start of column / At every start of column / At every end of column / At last end of column Select this check box to specify that the graphical elements defined in the conditional area should only be inserted at the first start of the column or at every start of the column / at every end of the column or only at the last end of the column. In combined reports, the first start of column and the last end of column always refer to the object to be reported, e.g. a terminal strip. After every n-th line In this field enter the value of the line after which the graphical elements defined in the conditional area should be displayed. Example: You have a terminal diagram in which the targets are listed for each terminal. As some terminals have more than one target, a separating line should be drawn in front of each terminal (i.e. in front of each object) in order to make the terminal diagram clear. To do this, add a conditional area to the relevant terminal diagram form and select the When switching objects check box as a condition. Then insert a line, format this graphic as required, and assign this object to the conditional area. The master data is synchronized and the reports are updated; you have now achieved the desired result. If you have specified a value in the After every n-th line field, the Adjust height check box is also enabled. If this check box is selected, the conditional area is placed on the previous data line and scaled according to the height of this line. In this way, you can insert a background for a data line. EPLAN NEWS

232 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Example: You have a parts list in a project and wish to use a background color on alternate data lines. Insert a conditional area in the relevant dynamic form. In the After every n-th line field, specify the value 2 as a condition for the field and select the Adjust height check box. In this area, draw a rectangle with the same width as the data area. Then select a color (e.g. gray) on the Format tab for the rectangle and activate the Fill surface check box. Then assign the rectangle to the conditional area. After synchronization of the master data, alternate lines on the parts list are displayed with a gray background. Up to ten conditional areas with different conditions can be specified in one form. Several conditions may also be specified simultaneously in a conditional area. If these conditions are met in the reports (e.g. a change to a property and an object switch), only one graphical element (e.g. a separating line) is output. On the other hand, if the conditions are distributed over several conditional areas, the associated graphical elements for all areas are output if the conditions are met. This latter option is sensible, for instance, if different texts are to be placed via the conditional areas. Suppressing blank data lines Blank data lines may occur in the reports if the output properties are blank. To prevent the output of blank data lines, the form properties now include the new property Suppress blank lines <13081>. Blank data lines are not output if this property is selected. Benefit: Reports are shorter and clearer. This means that site work (commissioning, servicing, and maintenance) using the printed plans is quicker. You lay the foundation for smooth project implementation while still in the engineering phase. 232 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

233 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Notes: Data lines which contain only symbols or jumper graphics are not regarded as blank and selecting the Suppress blank lines property does not suppress them. This property is not available in the form properties for connection diagrams (device connection diagram, cable connection diagram, etc.). Renamed placeholder texts for the device tag list Previously, the "device data" elements occurred twice in the Placeholder texts - Device tag list dialog. In order to distinguish between them, the indexed element with properties to the n-th function of the device has been renamed "Function". The non-indexing element with properties for the device tag has been renamed "Device tag". Outputting function data for the device tag list and symbol overview When generating reports, you now get the standard behavior that is normal for other reports if you have set the two properties Horizontal symbol distance <13042> and Number of adjacent symbols <13043> to "0" in the form properties of "Device tag list" and "Symbol overview" type forms, and inserted placeholder texts for the "Function" element into the relevant forms (e.g. properties of the n-th function of the device such as Placement, Function text, etc.). The relevant values are output as a single-line list separated by semicolons for each device tag. Example: Placements of the device with the DT =EB3+ET2-K1 are no longer output by rows but as a list, as follows: =EB3+ET2/3.2;=EB3+ET2/1.3;=EB3+ET2/1.4;=EB3+ET2/1.4 EPLAN NEWS

234 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Regenerating headers without sorting The property Regenerate header after change <13003> is also available in the form properties. Like the form property Generate data headers for the first x sorting properties <13060>, you can use this property in dynamic forms to generate new headers on report pages. Benefit: You can generate new headers in reports without sorting. Property "<13060>" specifies that sort properties (e.g. "Higher-level function" or "Mounting location") should be used to generate new headers. If an appropriate sorting scheme is selected when generating the report, a new header is generated when the sorting criterion, e.g. a new identifier for the higher-level function, changes. Use the form property Regenerate header after change <13003> to specify the property / properties that will trigger generation of a new header on the report page when a change is made. The new headers are also generated when you output the project or parts data in the relevant report without sorting. In the previous version (EPLAN 1.9), selecting property "<13060>" in an "old" form meant that the previously selected property Regenerate header after change <13003> was deleted from the form properties. This no longer happens. Outputting only connected connection points in connection diagrams You can now configure device, cable, terminal, and pin connection diagrams in such a way that only the connected connection points are represented at the targets in the graphic in these connection diagrams. Benefit: Using the new form property saves space in connection diagrams. The documentation is clearer and all project participants can quickly and easily find the information they need to edit their task. 234 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

235 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform In the form properties for each form you can use the new property Connection diagram: Output only connected connection points <13085>. First select this property in Property selection, then select the relevant check box in the Value column. This property only relates to targets and does not affect the devices, cables, terminal strips, or plugs to be evaluated. Devices, cables, plugs, and terminal strips are still listed in the connection diagrams without the connected functions. Example: Property <13085> was selected for the form in a terminal connection diagram. In the case of a motor which is the target of a terminal strip, the connection diagram outputs only the function connection points that are connected to the terminal strip. Essential customization of user-defined connection diagram forms Project editor: As a project editor, you must read this section before you work with the new version. A correction to the connection diagrams may mean that you now obtain modified reports when you use your own forms. A number of properties in the connection diagrams are then displayed with an alignment box. The standard forms in the EPLAN master data have already been corrected where necessary. Alignment boxes are no longer displayed when these forms are used. EPLAN NEWS

236 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform You must correct any forms that you have created on the basis of our forms. To do this, open the relevant form in the form editor and edit the placeholder text for the placed properties where unwanted alignment boxes are displayed. In the Properties - Placeholder text dialog, switch to the Format tab and select the "No" option for the Draw alignment box property. Then perform a master data synchronization and update the reports. New placeholders for cable charts in terminal and plug diagrams One or more cable charts can be integrated into forms for terminal and plug diagrams. You can use the Cable charts... placeholder elements to display cable and conductor properties in the cable charts on the relevant forms. In order to better differentiate these placeholders from the header and data areas of the dynamic areas, the placeholder elements Cable chart (header)... and Cable chart (data area)... have been renamed as follows: Old name: Cable chart (header)... Cable chart (data area)... New name: Cable chart header... Cable chart data area... Placeholder elements for outputting the counter target are now also available. The counter target is the device that is connected to the terminal strip / plug via the cable. This affects the following new placeholder elements: Cable chart header: Counter target Displays all connected counter targets of a cable for the header of the cable chart. 236 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

237 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Cable chart header external: Counter target Displays all externally connected counter targets of a cable. To be used when the header is rotated with regard to the data area. This is assigned to the Cable chart data area external placeholder element with the same index value via the index. The different terminal targets are output using this index. Cable chart header internal: Counter target Displays all internally connected counter targets of a cable. To be used when the header is rotated with regard to the data area. This is assigned to the Cable chart data area internal placeholder element with the same index value via the index. The different terminal targets are output using their index. In most cases, all conductors of a cable are connected to the same counter target. If several counter targets are connected to a cable, they are listed in the cable chart, separated by semicolons. EPLAN NEWS

238 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Macros Description text for automatically generated page macros When an automatically generated page macro is inserted, the Select macro dialog now shows the description that you entered via the Macro: Description <11057> page property for the macro, in the comments field below the preview. If different descriptions are stored in a page macro, only the description of the first page of the page macro is displayed. Group macro boxes and associated objects In fluid power, it is often necessary to group all the objects of a macro. Grouping can take place, for example, when editing macro projects. To reduce the amount of work required in a major macro project, the new Group macro boxes and associated objects menu item is now available for macro projects. Benefit: This considerably speeds up the grouping of the macro boxes and thus the automatic generation of macros from macro projects. First select the pages on which the macro boxes are to be grouped. To do this, select the project or the desired page(s) in the page navigator. Select the menu items Utilities > Generate macros > Group macro boxes and associated objects. Then, the macro box itself, the objects in the box, and the objects assigned to the box are grouped for each selected macro box. The macro box contents are checked when grouping. If the contents conform to the criteria of a device group, a device group is created for the macro box with its associated objects. 238 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

239 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Specifically assigning objects to macro boxes When assigning individual objects to a macro box, you are now supported by a prompt. This makes the procedure similar to the process already defined for assigning objects to a placeholder object. Benefit: The new prompt avoids operating error when assigning objects to macro boxes. If, when marking, you have not selected all the associated macro box objects for the macro box assignment and have then chosen the menu item Assign objects to macro box in the popup menu for the macro box, a new prompt will now be displayed. You can then use this prompt to decide whether the objects you have not selected should be deleted from the macro box assignment. If you confirm the prompt with [Yes], the previous assignment will be lost and only the currently selected objects are assigned to the macro box. If you click [No] here, the previous assignment remains, and the additionally selected objects are added to this assignment. EPLAN NEWS

240 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Placeholder Objects Properties dialog and new symbol for placeholder objects The familiar properties dialog is now also used for placeholder objects. The placeholder object symbol graphic the familiar "anchor" symbol in the SPECIAL symbol library, has been given a new symbol called PLHO for the purpose (see also page 427 in section "Master Data: Symbols"). Benefit: Because a standardized dialog is used, operation is now easier. To find placeholders in macro collections and template projects more quickly, you can display properties in the diagram itself and print them for archiving purposes. This saves time during data maintenance. The following changes have been made to the placeholder object dialog: Placeholder object tab: This tab now contains two tabs, Assignment and Values. The other new features on these tabs are described in the two sections below. Display tab: Now you can use this tab to change the format properties for the special properties of the placeholder object (Placeholder object name, Placeholder object: Last value set selected, Value set name), for example, and set a user-defined property arrangement. The values of the first two properties mentioned are placed in the new EPLAN551, Property placement.placeholder objects layer, as standard. Symbol / function data tab: This new tab for placeholder objects allows you to change the symbol for the placeholder object (if you have created your own symbol for this). When you open projects with the "old" placeholder object symbols, you are prompted to confirm that you want to update the master data. Once you have confirmed the prompt with [Yes], the master data is updated and the "old" placeholder object symbols are replaced by the new ones. 240 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

241 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform New properties for placeholder objects To automate the creation of schematics, it is necessary for all the object properties in the EPLAN platform to be controllable by variables. This is why the following properties are now also available to you on the placeholder objects' Assignment tab: Function definition (Category / Group / ID) <20188> Shows the function definition in "Category/Group/ID" format for the associated objects of the placeholder object. EPLAN NEWS

242 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Width <20221> Indicates the width of the black boxes, location and PLC boxes. Height <20222> Indicates the height of the black boxes, location and PLC boxes. Benefit: You no longer have to create your own macros for objects that did not previously allow variables. The amount of effort required for macro maintenance is reduced many times over. The new properties can be made accessible externally by using the relevant variables, and edited in the EPLAN Engineering Center (EEC), for example. This greatly simplifies modeling in the EEC. Function definition To be able to toggle between the different function definitions for an object in a macro, for example, you must have created a relevant variable. In the Values tab, you can then use Popup menu > Select function definition to select a function definition and apply it as a value for this variable. The category, group and ID of the function definition are separated by a forward slash "/". Box width and height The new Width <20221> and Height <20222> properties for extending boxes can also have variables assigned to them. These properties are only available to placeholder objects and they allow the box width and height to be specified. "Polyline" type boxes are not considered. 242 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

243 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Simplified assignment After the data transfer from EPLAN 5, the variables entered in the properties there as values, are displayed in the Current value column of the placeholder object. To make it easier for you to transfer these predefined variables to the Variable column, we have extended the Assignment tab by the new Only display properties with value in Current value column check box. If this check box is activated, then the table only shows the properties with an entry in the Current value column. As part of this extension, the previous check box, Only display properties with value in Assignment column, has been renamed Only display properties with value in Variable column. If this check box is selected then the table only shows the properties having a value in the Variable column. If both check boxes are selected, this will be treated as an OR relationship. In this case, the rows where either the Current value or Variable columns are "empty", will also be displayed. Extended standard operation To copy entries from the Current value column, you can now also use the Copy menu item in the popup menu. If the entire column is to be copied, click the column header. This will mark the entire column, and it can then be copied and pasted with [Ctrl] + [C] / [Ctrl] + [V], for example. But this only copies the visible cells. The cells in collapsed hierarchy levels are not copied. Now also available to you in the Assignment tab popup menu are the two menu items Expand and Collapse. EPLAN NEWS

244 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Reports Connection diagrams for wiring diagrams In EPLAN it is now possible to generate "wiring diagrams" for devices. Wiring diagrams consist of several connection diagrams and are used to output information about connected conductors and targets. Devices can be placed in a wiring diagram in the order in which they appear on the mounting panel. Benefit: Wiring diagrams are a frequently requested form of representation in Russia and China. Suitable reports can now support you when planning these drawings. It is much simpler and faster to create them and the result can be checked automatically. Wiring diagrams are output in the form of embedded connection diagrams, which can be placed manually in an open project page. Device connection diagrams are generated for wiring diagrams for general devices, and terminal and pin connection diagrams are generated for wiring diagrams for terminal strips and plugs. 244 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

245 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Example: The illustration below shows a section of a wiring diagram that has been generated. Normally, forms in table format are used for wiring diagrams. In the form properties of the relevant forms select the following new properties in Property selection: Connection diagram: Display all targets <13084> Connection diagram: Internal targets in table form <13086> Connection diagram: External targets in table form <13087>. Select these properties. All the targets are then output and the properties of these internal and external targets are displayed in table form in the reports. A separate row is generated for each target. EPLAN NEWS

246 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Tip: When generating the wiring diagrams, the forms for device, terminal and pin connection diagrams specified in the project settings are used by default. However, it is possible to specify a separate form for a device. To do this, before generating the report, select the new property Form for wiring diagram <20234> at the main function of the device in question and specify which form should be used. Generating wiring diagrams Before you can output a wiring diagram for the part placements on a specific mounting panel, you must first insert an additional black box. The reports generated will be placed in this black box at a later date. Assign the device tag of the mounting panel to the black box and select the "Overview" representation type for it. Note: The black box may be placed either immediately adjacent to the mounting panel on a "Panel layout" type page or on an overview page, but never on a report page. Then use Utilities > Reports > Generate to open the Reports - <Project name> dialog. In the dialog, click [New]. The Select report dialog opens. Choose the "Manual placement" output format from the Output format drop-down list. Then in the Select report type field select one of the following reports: "Device-connection diagram (for wiring diagram)" "Terminal-connection diagram (for wiring diagram)" or "Pin-connection diagram (for wiring diagram)". Select the Manual selection check box, then close the dialog by clicking [OK]. 246 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

247 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The new Select mounting panel dialog then opens. Select the mounting panel for which the wiring diagram is to be generated. Select the Hide devices already reported check box if devices for which this report has already been generated should no longer be offered. Then in the Manual selection dialog select the devices for which you want to generate a report. Multiple selection is possible. Click [OK]; the report is then generated and hangs on the cursor. Place the report on the appropriate positions in the black box. If you selected several devices in the Manual selection dialog, you can place further reports. New messages for wiring diagrams Check run has been added to the "Reports" message class in order to check wiring diagrams. You can use this check run to identify where part placements on the mounting panel and the associated wiring diagrams do not match (e.g. if a part placement has been removed or inserted retrospectively). Note: For this check run, and to hide devices that have already been evaluated when generating a new report, it is essential to place the insertion points for the generated reports inside the black box. EPLAN NEWS

248 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Appending reports to the end When generating reports from report templates, you now have the opportunity to configure EPLAN so that the output report pages are always sorted after the last existing page. Benefit: When generating template reports, the existing gaps for spare pages in the page structure are retained. To make an appropriate setting, first use Utilities > Reports > Generate to open the Reports dialog. In the Templates tab, select an existing template and then, next to the Start page of report block property in the Value column, click [...]. In the subsequent dialog, in which you select the start page for the report template, the new Append to the end check box is now available to you. If the check box is selected, the Page name field is cleared and grayed out. In the report generation that follows, the report pages are sorted into the specified structure identifiers. If there are already some report pages in the structure identifier level, all the new report pages will be sorted together behind the last existing page. Any gaps for spare pages that may exist at structure identifier level are not filled and remain empty. 248 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

249 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Sorting cable overviews according to source and target You now also have the opportunity in EPLAN to output reports of cable overviews, cable diagrams, and connection lists, that are sorted according to source and target. The Page sorting dialog has been extended by the Use source / target check box for this purpose. (You open this dialog from the Settings: Output to pages dialog (typical menu path: Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Reports > Output to pages), when, for a line of a report type, (such as a cable overview), you first click in the Page sorting column and then on [...].) The Use source / target check box can only be selected for cable diagrams, cable overviews, and connection lists. If the check box is selected, it is not the device tags of the cables that are used for page sorting, but those of the sources and targets. Cables with different structure identifiers for their source and target (such as mounting locations, for example), will be output in multiple structure identifiers. EPLAN NEWS

250 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Using page structure identifiers for reports Also new in the Page sorting dialog is the Use placement check box. If this check box is selected, when reporting devices into different project structures, it is not the structure identifiers of the devices that are considered, but the structure identifiers of the page on which they are placed. Note: The Identifiers for list output settings, which you could make in EPLAN 5 at a device in the Part tab, are not applied during the EPLAN 5 / fluidplan data import. For the devices to be sorted into the correct reports, you have to select the Use placement check box described above in the project settings. Creating report templates In the Templates tab of the Reports - <Project name> dialog, it is possible to create multiple report templates for the same report type. If a report template (called 0001, for example) already exists, when another template of this type is created, a prompt is now displayed, querying whether or not the old template should be overwritten. If you select [No] here, two templates will be generated with the same name, which you should then change. Benefit: It is no longer possible to overwrite an existing template accidentally. Copying and pasting function-related embedded reports When copying and pasting devices and the associated function-related embedded reports, the relationship is retained between the devices and a function-related embedded report that has also been copied. The same applies to creating relevant macros with function-related, embedded reports. Pasting directly updates the embedded report. The device to which it applies is then immediately obvious. 250 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

251 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Benefit: This allows you to use function-related embedded reports in macros, for example. Example: If, in the schematic, you copy and then paste a device such as a cable with -W5, and the associated function-related, embedded report (such as a cable diagram), the new cable diagram you have pasted applies to the device pasted with it (displayed DT after numbering, e.g. -W6). Breaking up modules Parts which belong to a module can now be broken up into the relevant sub-parts when outputting the parts list and the summarized parts list in the reports and in the labeling. For this purpose, a new Break up modules check box has been added to the corresponding settings dialogs Settings: Parts and Settings: Labeling. If this check box is selected, the modules are broken down into their components, i.e. their individual parts. It is now also possible to break up modules in the PDF export settings. The Break up modules check box has also been added to the Part properties tab in the Settings: PDF export dialog. If this check box is selected, the existing modules are broken up. For the exported PDF file this means that all the individual parts of the module are listed with the specified part properties for a device in the device tree. Tip: If you want to break up the parts of an assembly which have been assigned to a module, you must select the two Break up assemblies and Break up modules check boxes in the settings. If the assembly is not nested into any other (sub-)assemblies, enter the value 2 in the Up to level field. The assembly in the module is then broken up as well. EPLAN NEWS

252 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Outputting part assemblies in labeling If you use Utilities > Reports > Labeling to output labels for part assemblies, then you must bear in mind that these reports now depend on the selection currently made (in the graphical editor or in a navigator, for example). Part assemblies include, for example, the "Parts lists", "Summarized parts lists", and "Manufacturer / supplier lists" report types. This means: If terminals are selected, terminal parts are output. If terminal strips are selected, all the terminal and terminal strip parts are output. If terminal strips and individual terminals are selected, all the terminal and terminal strip parts are output. However, terminal parts are only evaluated once. The same applies to cables and connections. Note: All parts are only output when in the Settings: Labeling dialog, the Include parts group box has the appropriate check boxes selected (e.g. Terminal parts, Cable conductor parts, etc.). 252 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

253 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Parts Management Improved full-text filter The new version now provides you with an improved, faster full-text search in parts management. Benefit: Now that the search text can be entered directly, full-text search has become easier and more intuitive. The use of a SQL server as the parts database also makes a fast, full-text search possible. The full-text search dialog has been removed, and instead, you enter the text you want to find directly in the Full-text filter field. Then click (Find). The display in the tree / in the list / in the combination is updated and only shows the parts that contain the entered text in a field. To delete the search term and return to the display of all the parts, click (Delete). In this case, the text entered can also be only a part of the term to be searched: For example if you are filtering by the text Motor, parts in which texts such as Motors, Motor power line or Three-phase motor occur, will also be displayed. When parts management is closed, text-based filters are deleted. Note: In the improved full-text search, you can gain access not only in the Parts management dialog, but also in the Part selection dialog and in the navigator for part master data. Full-text search syntax Upper-/lower-case letters are not taken into account in the full-text search. Do not use placeholder characters (such as * or?), as these will not be evaluated in the full-text search. EPLAN NEWS

254 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Instead, the search logic when entering text is now similar to the common full-text syntax (+, spaces, etc.), used in Internet search engines. Example: Enter the following search text in the Full-text filter field: "Isolating terminal with fuse" In this search, the parts found will contain exactly the Isolating terminal with fuse character string. Terminal motor With this OR operation, the parts found are those for which the text terminal or motor is contained in the text boxes. There may be different text boxes for the individual parts. Terminal +motor or +terminal +motor With this AND operation, a space has to be entered between the first search term and the plus character. The parts found are those containing the text terminal and motor in the text boxes. The two texts may both be contained within one text field, or may appear in different fields. Note: This AND operation can then only be used if a SQL server is used as the parts database. If Access databases are used, the search term Terminal +motor would have the same effect as Terminal motor; thus it would be treated as an OR operation. Search index for full-text search An index is now created in the parts database for the full-text search. When you run this search for the first time, you first have to confirm a message about generating the search index with [OK]. If the search index has to be updated after a change in the parts database, for example, do this by selecting Utilities > Parts > Update search index. 254 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

255 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Full-text search and field-based filter combination The Field-based filter and the Full-text filter can be used simultaneously. In a case like this, the effect of the filters is additive. For example, if a full-text search should only occur over a certain "part type" (such as "Electrical engineering - Component"), you now set the field-based filter. In the Filter dialog of the field-based filter, you create an appropriate filter, activate it, and then enter the search term in the Full-text filter field. Note: Please note that the parts structure of the Parts management is freely configurable. The tree configuration shown here may differ from your configuration, which you can configure via Utilities > Parts > Management > [Extras] > Settings. EPLAN NEWS

256 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Additional selection option using the "Combination" tab In version 1.9 International SP 1, the part master data navigator had an added Combination tab, which is now also available in the Parts management dialog. This new tab contains a combined view of the parts tree and list. Benefit: This tab allows you to navigate more easily and quickly in your part master data. This means that even with extensive part master data, you retain an overview every time and quickly find the required parts, which you then apply to the project data at the push of a button. Increased planning safety and reduced planning time are the result of consistent system optimization. You can preselect parts in the tree view in the upper area of the Combination tab. When you select a tree structure level such as the "Cables / connections" product group, the associated parts are displayed in the list below. The range of the display in this tab can also be configured via Popup menu > Configure columns. Creating subtrades for fluid power It is now also possible to create separate subtrades in parts management for fluid power-specific trades, and assign parts to these new subtrades. Benefit: This means that for the first time, you can assign your parts to multiple trades and now subtrades as well. This has the advantage that you can classify your parts in parts management even more precisely. There is also no longer any need to enter subtrades manually at devices. The General tab has been redesigned for this. The trades which contain a part, are now no longer displayed in a group box with multiple check boxes, but as a list in the Trade / subtrade field (e.g. "Electrical engineering, Pneumatics"). 256 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

257 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform In this field, click [...], so that in the subsequent dialog, you can define additional trades / subtrades, which should contain the part. In the subsequent Trade / subtrade dialog, select the check boxes in the Use column to define the additional trades that are to contain the part. For fluid power-specific trades (hydraulics, pneumatics, lubrication, cooling), use the (New) button to open the Create subtrade dialog and create a new subtrade. A subtrade of this type (such as "Pneumatics high pressure", "Machine cooling" etc.), is then fitted in below the selected trade in the Trade / subtrade column. Translating or editing the name of a subtrade Multilingual entries are possible when entering a name in the Create subtrade dialog. The popup menu for this field has the corresponding popup menu items, e.g. Translate, Multilingual input, etc. To edit a subtrade, select the relevant subtrade in the Trade / subtrade dialog and click the (Edit) button, or double-click. In the dialog that opens you can change the name of a subtrade retrospectively or translate it using the abovementioned popup menu items. Subtrades in reports When reports and labels are output (e.g. parts list, connection list, etc.), there can be multi-level sorting by trade and subtrade. You already have a predefined scheme available. Access via EPLAN API As subtrades are stored as "normal" properties in EPLAN, access is possible via EPLAN API. There are new properties for this, Subtrade 'Hydraulics' <22158>, Subtrade 'Pneumatics' <22159>, Subtrade 'Lubrication' <22195>, and Subtrade 'Cooling' <22196>. EPLAN NEWS

258 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Data field for the part number of an ERP system In parts management, you can now also enter the part number of an external ERP system. Benefit: You can now use both the "technical" and your own "commercial" part number in EPLAN parts management. This means that you will not have a problem synchronizing or linking to additional parts management systems (ERP systems), even if these systems use other identifying part numbers. The General tab has been extended by the ERP number field for this purpose. You can enter the part number of the external ERP system into this new data field, which is located directly below the Part number field. Just like the part number, this number also has to be unique, and this is checked as well, when the part or variant is saved. ERP numbers may be up to 255 characters in length. Entering barcodes for parts Barcodes can be used, for example, to uniquely identify products. Different coding standards are used internationally, such as GTIN (Global Trade Item Number). In addition to this, companies use company-specific or separate industry standards. In the new version of EPLAN parts management, it is now also possible to enter the identification number of this type of barcode for a part. Benefit: Centrally specified and globally unique numbers are used as the basis for parts systems that span companies, industries, and countries. Universal, machine-readable numbers from manufacturer to end user reduce response times and logistics costs. By entering this data in parts management, EPLAN fits seamlessly into this global concept. 258 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

259 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The Prices / Other tab has been extended for this purpose by the two Barcode number / type fields. Enter the number and type of the particular barcode in these two fields, for example, "GTIN" or "EAN-13". Click (Delete) to remove the current barcode type from the selection list. The content of these two fields can be included in part assemblies (parts lists, manufacturer / supplier lists, etc.) and when exporting and importing parts. To allow you to consider this data in the reports, two new properties, Barcode number <22208> and Barcode type <22209>, are available to you (within the parts data) as placeholder texts in the respective forms, and as format elements in the labeling settings. Note: Please be aware that when you enter the barcode number, there is no check for uniqueness. The data is output in the reports exactly as it is entered here. This means that no barcodes with combinations of lines and gaps are generated. The contents of the two fields are not translatable. Clip-on height for placements on mounting rails Items which are placed on mounting rails often have a recess to receive the mounting rail. So that this recess can be taken into account individually when the part is placed, the Mounting data tab now has a new Clip-on height field. Benefit: The clip-on height is taken into account individually during part placement. And after a change to the mechanical structure, the space requirements of the entire assembly in the enclosure are available at any time. The clip-on height indicates how far an item extends into a mounting rail. The bigger the value, the smaller the distance to the underside of the mounting rail (and therefore to the mounting surface). If the value is set to "0", the item sits exactly on the top edge of the mounting rail. EPLAN NEWS

260 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform If the mounting rail on which the part is placed as an item is changed, the clip-on height of the placed item then refers to the new mounting rail. The position of the item is then shifted accordingly. To change the mounting rail, in the properties dialog for the placed mounting rail switch to the Parts tab and select a different mounting rail part. Note: This functionality is intended only for the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on. Example: 1 = mounting surface; 2 = mounting rail; 3 = clip-on height. 260 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

261 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Center mismatch for placements In order to make things clearer, the former Clip-on height / center mismatch field has been renamed. Old name: New name: Clip-on height / center mismatch Center mismatch If you do not want the part to be centered in the front view, enter the offset relative to the middle of the mounting rail in the Center mismatch field. The item will then be automatically offset by this value. Note: Entries in the Center mismatch field will be evaluated by the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on and by EPLAN Cabinet. Entering outline drawings in parts management EPLAN parts management now also gives you the opportunity to assign outline drawings to a part. Benefit: With outline drawings, you enter your own assembly profiles in the system. These can immediately be used in the diagram, in variable lengths. The required special profiles are then quickly available in the system. You can enter this type of drawing, which has previously been created in the outline editor as an outline of the "outline extrusion" type, in parts from the "mounting rail" or "cable ducts" product groups, for example. If a corresponding part is then inserted into a layout space in the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on, the outline is extruded to a 3D object. Outline drawings are entered on the Technical data tab in the Macro field. Click the [...] button next to the field, and in the subsequent Select macro dialog, select a file of the Outline extrusion (*.fc2) file type. EPLAN NEWS

262 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform New "Documents" tab Previously, it was not always possible for some parts from companies operating internationally, to enter all the available documents into the relevant fields of the Technical data tab. This is the reason why the Parts management dialog has been extended by the new Documents tab. Now you can enter and manage up to 20 external documents and / or hyperlinks. Benefit: Now you can store all the external documentation for a part in parts management. You can supply all downstream processes with the required information from engineering. Colleagues from production, assembly, commissioning, servicing, and maintenance will thank you, if all the information that they require is also stored in the project documentation. The previous External document 1-3 fields on the Technical data tab have been removed. External documents that have already been stored here are moved to the first three rows of the new tab. To enter an external document on the Documents tab, first click in the relevant cell in the File / hyperlink column and then click [...]. In the subsequent dialog, select the document file to be linked. But here too, you can also use Copy and Paste (in the Popup menu) to enter an Internet or address. Then, in the Designation column, enter any textual description for the hyperlink / external document. 262 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

263 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Assigning cables / connections to an image file With the new version, you can now also store an image file for parts of the "Cables / connections" Product group, as with mounting data. The parts management Cable data tab has been extended by the Image file field for this purpose. Benefit: The assignment of an image makes part selection easier and safer for the user. To assign an image file to a cable, click [...] in this field to select the desired image file in the subsequent file selection dialog. Protecting data fields before updating When importing parts data into the parts database, it is now possible to protect individual data fields before updating. The fields to be protected are listed in a scheme in the Field assignment dialog. Benefit: This allows you to prevent manually entered data (such as your own text in the Description field), being overwritten during a parts data import with updating of the existing records. To create an appropriate scheme, in the Import records dialog, click the [...] button, which is located next to the Field assignment field. Use the new Protect fields tab to define the properties that are not to be updated when parts data is imported. To do this, click (New), and in the Criteria selection dialog, select the property to be ignored when importing. New synchronization of parts Synchronization of parts is now similar in process and appearance to synchronization in master data. In the Utilities > Parts menu, the two previous menu items Current project --> Parts database and Parts database --> Current project have been replaced by the new menu item Synchronize current project. EPLAN NEWS

264 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform With this menu item, you open the Synchronization of parts - <Project name> dialog, which you can use to specifically update the data of individual parts in the project. In this dialog, you also have the opportunity to complete the parts database. Use [Extras] > Complete current system to transfer, for example, the parts stored in a project to a new parts database. Benefit: This new dialog makes parts data synchronization a much more transparent process. You know in advance whether the status of the data is different, and can specifically synchronize individual parts, or exclude them from synchronization. Also new to the Utilities > Parts menu are the following two menu items: Update current project This menu item searches the current project for obsolete parts data. If parts data that is more up-to-date is found in system parts (that is, in the parts database), the parts stored in the project will be updated. Complete current project This menu item searches the current project for missing parts; if available, they are then automatically stored. Updating parts when opening a project You can now set up EPLAN so that the parts stored in a project are updated when the project is opened. The general settings for the management of projects have been extended by the Update stored parts at Open check box for this purpose (under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > General). Benefit: This automatically keeps the parts in the project up to date. Because synchronization is automatic, there is no need for manual action, and this ensures that all users are always working with current parts data. 264 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

265 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform If this check box is selected, the parts used in the project are synchronized with the parts in the parts database when the project is opened. If the project parts are obsolete, a prompt opens. Confirm this with [Yes], and the stored parts will be updated. Additional menu items for the part master data navigator To extend the insertion of devices / the selection of parts using drag & drop from the part master data navigator, the popup menu of the Part master data dialog has been extended by two menu items, Insert device and Assign. If a macro with different representation types is stored in a part, the different submenu items (Multi-line, Single-line, etc.) of the Insert device menu item allow you to place the part macro in the required representation type. If a suitable representation type is not found, then after a note, a macro in a different representation type is suggested. With Assign, you can assign a part previously selected in the navigator to a certain function on the schematic. When you select this option, the part hangs on the cursor. Position the cursor on the required component in the graphical editor, and left-click to assign the part. The part can be assigned several times; it remains on the cursor until you cancel the action. Tip: For part selection using drag & drop from the part master data navigator, first select the required part in the Part master data dialog, press the [Alt] key, and drag the part using drag & drop to a component in the graphical editor. EPLAN NEWS

266 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Message Management Improved ergonomics Preview for message management Some of the functionalities of message management have been changed in the current version. Now, as in all the other project data dialogs, you can use the graphical preview. If you have opened the graphical preview (View > Graphical preview), the page that a selected message relates to, will be displayed there. The faulty function will be highlighted in the preview. Now you are also given a properties preview in the Property preview dialog, if you have selected a message in message management. Because the graphical preview has been extended, the Preview of errors menu item in the message management popup menu has been removed. The Update menu item has also been removed. Instead, you can now use the familiar "Go to" functionalities Go to (cross-referenced), Go to (all representation types) and Go to (graphic). Benefit: Graphically, it is instantly obvious where the cause of the message can be found. Consistent ergonomics reduce familiarization time and simplify operation for occasional users. Direct editing of properties It is now also possible in message management to directly edit the devices underlying the messages. The popup menu has been extended by the Edit in table, Properties, and Properties (global) menu items for this. 266 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

267 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Benefit: With edit in table, you can now resolve multiple messages with the same cause, in one process. This drastically reduces the number of editing steps required and considerably speeds up message correction. You can find and eliminate planning errors quickly and easily. This allows you to specifically improve the quality of your project documentation. Displaying layout space messages To allow you to quickly identify messages created in an "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on layout space, the Layout space column has been added to the Message management dialog. The name of the layout space on which the erroneous object is located is shown here. If you select a relevant message in the table and double-click, the erroneous object is shown in the 3D view of the opened layout space. By means of Popup menu > Configure columns, you can hide and show the Layout space column in message management. New trade-specific filter settings It is now also possible in EPLAN message management, to display only specific messages for process engineering and / or for mechanics. Benefit: The messages suitable for the trades give you a clear task list and clear responsibilities for editors. This simplifies the division of work, and the project status becomes more transparent, particularly in cross-discipline engineering projects. For this purpose, the new Process engineering and Mechanics check boxes have been added to the Filter: Messages dialog. If one of these check boxes is selected and the Active check box in message management is also selected, then only the messages for the devices assigned to the particular trade will be shown in the Message management dialog. EPLAN NEWS

268 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform New "Prevent errors" check type for error checking The new "Prevent errors" check type is now available for numerous checks in the check-related settings for message management. Benefit: The new "Prevent errors" check type prevents incorrect schematics at the planning stage. Instead of correcting after the event, errors are detected immediately and eliminated at once. There is no need for amendment. Choose the optimum type of check for you, subject to the engineering phases. EPLAN gives you great freedom in project data checking, and gives you optimum support in creating high-quality machine and plant documentation. If you have set this new check box type for a message number in the Settings: Messages and checks dialog, then during project editing, a Prevent errors note will immediately inform you as soon as the set check criterion is violated by a change.this note lists not only the check text, but also the page, DT, and position of the incorrect function. After closing the note with [OK], the listed changes are undone, and you can repeat the selected action (e.g. insert a symbol). Example: In a check run scheme for the message "017005" (with the message text "Duplicate DT, too many main functions") you have set the "Prevent errors" check type. If, in the EPLAN-Demo sample project, on page =EB3+ET1/1, you now insert a safety fuse (symbol F1 with number 50), and enter -F1 for this device as the displayed DT, as soon as you close the properties dialog with [OK], the Prevent errors note is displayed. Once you have clicked [OK] here, symbol insertion is undone. The selected symbol stays on the cursor and you can repeat the action but this time with a correct DT. 268 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

269 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Setting option for module-specific checks In addition to message management, there are other modules that also run checks and output messages in the message management dialog (e.g. when automatically generating cables). These checks are designated module-specific checks and in the Settings: Messages and checks dialog in the Type of check column, show the "Module-specific" entry as standard. You now have the opportunity in settings to "switch off" these modulespecific checks. If you do not want to perform a module-specific check, select "No" as the Type of check setting. Benefit: Module-specific checks can now also be "switched off". You can specifically define the extent of automatic checking and only run a data check when required. Separate filters for running error checking In the check-related settings for message management, you now have the opportunity to set a separate filter for specific error checks. This allows you, for example, to run an error check only for the functions of a certain trade, or only for objects with a special function definition. Benefit: By using other filter criteria, only the messages that you need are displayed. Project evaluation and monitoring is easier and faster. The new Filter column has been added to the Settings: Messages and checks dialog for this purpose. The "All trades" filter scheme is preset as standard in the relevant cell for most of the checks. Filtering does not take place with this setting. Click [...], and in the subsequent Filter dialog, select a predefined filter scheme or create your own new scheme. For most error checking, you can, depending on the selected message class, define not only the EPLAN NEWS

270 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Trade property, but also other function-specific properties and / or a function definition (function group, etc.), as a filter criterion. With error checking for which a separate filter cannot be set (such as module-specific checks), the "No filter" entry (which cannot be modified) is shown in the Filter column. Note: Please be aware that when you use a complex filter with multiple criteria, it can take a long time to run a check, as EPLAN has to evaluate the filter and check that it meets the criteria. New check run for checking the online numbering format Different actions, such as copying and pasting pages from other projects, or the insertion of macros, can result in device tags getting into your project, that do not comply with your specified device structure. To check the set online numbering format for the devices in the project, you can now access the new check run in EPLAN. If, in the Settings: Messages and checks dialog for a check run scheme, you have set this new message appropriately, then message management will display the devices that do not conform to your defaults in the Numbering format dialog. When the "Online / offline" check type is set, messages are written to message management as soon as they occur. With the "Offline" check type, messages are only listed in message management after a check run. You access the Numbering format dialog for online numbering, for example, via Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Numbering (online). Then, in the Settings: Numbering (online) dialog for the On symbol insertion group box, click next to the Numbering format field on [...]. 270 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

271 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform New Features in the "Revision Management" Add-on Note: The "Revision Management" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN Electric P8 Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional and EPLAN Fluid. Revision control, the "Revision Management" add-on, is used to automatically record and document subsequent modifications to existing plants. To obtain information about changes in the various project states, you can use the following operations: Revision with change tracking With change tracking, you generate a revision. The current project becomes the revision project, and you then continue working in this. All the changes in this revision project are logged. Property comparison of projects With this operation, you compare certain properties of the current project with the corresponding properties of a reference project. You can decide which properties will be checked for changes. Renamed revision control operation In older EPLAN versions, the property comparison is designated as a Project comparison. So that the project comparison of the revision can be more clearly distinguished from the project verification of project management, some renaming has taken place in the user interface, including: Old name: Project comparison Comparison project New name: Property comparison of projects Reference project In addition to this, the revision control user interface has also greatly changed, as its menu structure has been adapted to the two operations mentioned above (see the following section on page 272). EPLAN NEWS

272 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform We have also incorporated the following new features for you: All the modified pages of a revised project can be completed with common revision data (see page 275). Report pages can be updated upon completion (see page 277). The revision index for page modifications can be automatically given consecutive numbers (see page 278). A separate revision marker is available for new objects in the reports (see page 281). When comparing the properties of projects, the objects to be compared can be determined by alternative identification (see page 283). The results of a properties comparison are shown in a new dialog (see page 286). New settings have been made available for comparing the properties of projects (see page 289). The results of a properties comparison are saved in a project-specific database (see page 290). The revision data from a properties comparison can now also be deleted (see page 291). In change tracking and during a properties comparison for projects, the deleted objects can now also be displayed (see page 292). Dividing menu items for improved ergonomics In the new EPLAN version, we have divided the two revision control operations in the user interface into two different menu items. Because of this, below the Utilities > Revision control menu path, there are now two new menu items, Change tracking and Property comparison of projects. 272 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

273 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Benefit: The spatial separation of the menu items makes it easier for you to distinguish the two different revision control operations. Communication difficulties are thus substantially reduced. After the division, the Change tracking menu item shows the following submenu items: Generate revision Complete pages Deleted pages Edit revision data Delete revision. And the Property comparison of projects menu item has the following submenu items available: Generate reference project Compare projects Show results of the properties comparison Add revision markers Delete revision. EPLAN NEWS

274 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The two menu items Complete project and Remove write protection, which are relevant to both operations, are still located directly below the main menu item, Revision control. Division of the settings In the course of this interface redesign, the revision settings have also been renamed, or split into different dialogs. The project-specific settings under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Revision have been split between the following settings dialogs: Settings: Revision (property comparison of projects) This dialog is where the new settings for the property comparison of projects can be found (see page 289). 274 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

275 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Settings: Revision (graphical representation) In this dialog, the settings for displaying the revision markers have been moved. Most of the settings for displaying the graphical marker apply both to change tracking and to the property comparison of projects. For more information, see the section on page 281. Settings: Revision (change tracking) This dialog is where the familiar project-specific settings for change tracking are located. Information about the new settings, While deleting create deletion markers and list deleted pages and Take page types specially into consideration when completing can be found in the sections "Displaying deleted objects" on page 292 and "Numbering the revision index" on page 278. The dialog with the company-specific comparison settings for revision, has been renamed the Settings: Property comparison of projects dialog. The menu path to this dialog is: Options > Settings > Company > Management > Property comparison of projects. Also available to you in the company settings is the new Settings: Change tracking (numbering of the revision index) dialog. More information on this is provided in the section "Numbering the revision index" on page 278. Project completion enhancement Generating a revision via the Utilities > Revision control > Change tracking > Generate revision menu path produces an edited project. This type of project is designated a revision project. Changes to a revision project are identified by revision markers. EPLAN NEWS

276 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform If you now use Utilities > Revision control > Complete project to complete a revision project, then there is no longer just a prompt, but instead a new dialog opens. This Complete project dialog gives you the opportunity to enter common revision data (revision index, description, and reason for change) for all the modified pages of a revision project. Benefit: On completion of a revised project, you specify common revision data for all the modified pages. The dialog also has the same input options for this purpose as the Description of page modification dialog that opens when pages are completed. When you complete a revision project, the comment for the revision is suggested in the Complete project dialog as the entry for the Description field. 276 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

277 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Generating a report when completing a project and pages In another new feature, you can now also update the reports when completing the projects / pages. Benefit: When completing the projects, you can simultaneously bring the reports up to date. The report pages have the same revision index that was last specified when completing. In the Complete project dialog, the Generate report when completing project check box is available for this purpose. If this check box is selected, when you close the dialog with [OK], all the project report pages are updated. Once a project has been completed in this way, all the report pages are up to date, and the "Draft" identifier has been removed for all the pages. In our standard plot frame, multiple revision properties are placed as special texts. Using this plot frame, the Revision index (change tracking) [1] page property is displayed in the table of contents and in the revision overview, for example. If a report is generated for a project when completing, then afterwards, these report pages show the last revision index to be specified. Note: Pages of the "Revision overview" page type are now also considered in revision control. This means that relevant pages can, for example, be identified as a "draft" and also completed. The special texts for the revision index are displayed and updated on these pages. Generating a report when completing report pages The Description of page modification dialog when completing pages has also been appropriately extended (menu path: Utilities > Revision control > Change tracking > Complete pages). If the new Generate report when completing pages check box is activated, the selected report pages are updated. EPLAN NEWS

278 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform If generating a report produces a modification to a report page (for example, in the table of contents, in the revision overview, etc.), then this page will be completed with the same revision index, and the "Draft" identifier for this page will be removed. The selected report pages are updated even if they are not identified as a "draft". For other pages that are selected and which are not report pages (such as schematic pages), the check box when completing has no effect. Numbering the revision index When completing pages, you now have the opportunity to set up the revision so that EPLAN automatically suggests a value for the revision index. The revision index is determined by means of a numbering scheme, and it is always the highest value that is suggested. Benefit: Revision indexes for page modifications can be automatically assigned consecutive numbers. Numbering schemes for the revision index To select a numbering scheme for the revision index or to create one of your own, select Options > Settings > Company > Management > Change tracking (numbering of the revision index). By default, a scheme is defined in this new dialog, to be used to determine a suggestion for the revision index. A scheme is edited, and a numbering format defined, in exactly the same way as in the other settings dialogs for numbering. The "Counter" and "Separator" format elements are available to you here. 278 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

279 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Display warning if revision index does not conform to the scheme: If this check box is selected in the settings dialog, when pages are completed, a warning is shown if the entered value does not conform to the suggested revision index. Confirm this warning with [OK], and the entered value is applied, which interrupts the numbering of the indexes. The numbering of the revision index will start from the beginning, with the next completion. Completing pages with a numbering scheme If you have selected or created a different numbering scheme, then when pages or a project are completed, the highest revision index is determined for the pages to be completed. In such a case, a value is suggested to you in the Complete project and Description of page modification dialogs for the Revision index field. And with each subsequent completion, the suggested index is increased in accordance with the set numbering scheme. Taking page types specially into consideration when completing In change tracking, you can now specify that certain page types are specially treated when completing. You can also complete pages that have not changed, and exclude from completion pages that have changed. Benefit: The latest revision index can now also be shown on pages that have not been modified. Report pages can be excluded from completion. These pages will then not be listed in the revision overview after updating and these overview pages remain clear. The project-specific revision settings under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Revision (change tracking) have been extended by the Take page types specially into consideration when completing group box. An illustration can be found in the "Dividing menu items for improved ergonomics" section, starting from page 274 onwards. EPLAN NEWS

280 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Always complete: The page types shown in this field are always considered when completing and are provided with a revision index, even if there have been no modifications on the project page. To allow pages with the page type selected in the Always complete field to be considered when completing pages, you must also select these pages in the page navigator before completing, or complete the project straight away. If you wish the current revision index to be numbered as well, you must select a relevant numbering scheme in the company settings. Example: You have created a revision of the sample project EPLAN-DEMO, and have made a change on schematic page =EB3+ET1/1 with the Power supply description. To allow the latest revision index to also be shown on the title page of the project, in the Settings: Revision (change tracking) dialog, in the Always complete field, select the page type Title page / cover sheet. First of all, in the page navigator, select both the schematic page and the title page. Once you have then completed the pages with the index EPLAN1, this text will also be displayed in the plot frame on the title page. Never complete: The page types shown in this field are never considered when completing, regardless of whether or not changes have been made on the project page. If, for example, certain page types are listed for report pages here, although the relevant pages will be updated when completing, they will not be displayed in the revision overview. 280 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

281 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Example: You have made some changes on the schematic pages of a revision project. Now when you complete the project and select the Generate report when completing project check box (see page 275), the report pages will be updated before completion. These updates are recorded as a change and also listed in a previously output revision overview. With extensive reports, this can quickly cause the revision overview to become confusing. If the updated report pages are not to be listed in the revision overview, you must previously exclude the report pages from completion. To do this, in the Settings: Revision (change tracking) dialog, in the Never complete field, select the relevant page types (Parts list, Device tag list, etc.). Now when you complete the project, the report pages are actually updated, but not listed in the revision overview. Use the (New) button above the two fields Always complete and Never complete, to move to the Select page type dialog, where you can select the required page type. Differing graphical markers for change tracking In change tracking, it was previously only possible to use the graphical markers for changed objects to identify revision changes. In the new version, the differing graphical markers for added, changed, and deleted objects are now also shown in change tracking. New revision marker for reports New and moved objects on report pages (list entries, graphics, etc.), have previously all been simply marked as "changed" in a revision report. A new settings option now makes it possible for you to select a separate graphical marker for new objects that have been added to the reports. EPLAN NEWS

282 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The Graphical marker group box has been extended by the New in report tab for this purpose. This graphical marker is located in the project-specific settings for the revision under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Revision (graphical representation). Once a report has been updated, all the new objects (such as the new devices of a device tag list) are marked as "New in report" by this graphical marker. Objects that have been moved by the newly added objects will continue to be shown as "changed" objects on the report pages. Note: Please note that the graphical marker for the "New in report" revision change is only used in change tracking, and does not work in master data reports (forms documentation, plot frame documentation, etc.). 282 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

283 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Alternative properties comparison When comparing the properties of two projects in revision control, you now have the opportunity to run the comparison using an alternative identification. Benefit: When comparing properties with alternative identification, you can also compare projects that have been automatically generated. A standard property comparison of projects identifies the objects by an internal object ID. When projects are automatically generated (by the EPLAN Engineering Center, for example), the internal object IDs are reassigned at every generation. This means that every time you generate them, a completely new project emerges and all objects in this project are given new object IDs. This makes it impossible to carry out a properties comparison using the identification of objects based on the object ID anymore. If you want to run an alternative properties comparison, in the Compare properties of projects dialog, you must select the new Alternative identification check box. For more information, see the following section. Comparing the properties of projects Before actually comparing the properties, you must first generate a reference project. The reference project is usually an earlier copy of the current project. You then select the desired project in the page navigator and select the menu items Utilities > Revision control > Property comparison of projects > Compare projects. EPLAN NEWS

284 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform After selecting the reference project in the Compare properties of projects dialog, you then specify your settings for the comparison. Excluding structure identifiers from the properties comparison You can use the new Structure identifier setting field to define which structure identifiers are no longer to be seen as different during a property comparison of projects. 284 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

285 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform If you have renamed the structure identifiers, they will normally be treated in the property comparison of projects as if they have been deleted and inserted again. If you do not wish to display such changes, you can create a scheme that tells you which structure identifiers were renamed. The specified structure identifiers are no longer considered in a property comparison of projects. You use the [...] button next to the Structure identifier setting field to open a dialog with the same name. There you specify which structure identifier in the reference project is to be replaced by which structure identifier from the current project, and you can save these settings in a separate scheme. Note: This setting is only useful if you have activated the alternative identification of objects using the Alternative identification check box. Create deletion markers for deleted objects This check box of the same name is also new in the dialog. If this is selected, the deleted objects (components, texts, etc.), on the project pages are identified by a revision marker and a deletion marker. More information on this is provided in the section "Displaying deleted objects" on page 292. Properties comparison with alternative identification To run a properties comparison with alternative identification, select the new Alternative identification check box. In a case like this, the objects can be identified with the help of so-called "candidate keys". A candidate key is a minimal quantity of properties that uniquely identifies an object. The identifying properties are preset by EPLAN. EPLAN NEWS

286 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Note: When you compare the properties of projects that have been automatically generated (by the EPLAN Engineering Center, for example), you should select the Alternative identification check box, as the internal object IDs are re-assigned at each generation, making it no longer possible to use object IDs for a properties comparison. The comparison run starts when you click [OK]. The Results of property comparison - <Project name> dialog opens and shows an overview of the results. In addition to this, the changes specified by a properties comparison are indicated in the project by graphical markers. Displaying results of properties comparison The results of a properties comparison are shown in the new Results of property comparison - <Project name> dialog. This list of results is automatically displayed after a property comparison of projects. It does not matter whether the properties comparison has been run in the previous way, or by using the new, alternative identification. Benefit: EPLAN now has a new, clear list for the results of the comparison. You are quickly and easily given an overview of all the changes. But you can also open this dialog via Utilities > Revision control > Property comparison of projects > Show results of the properties comparison. Data is automatically updated after each property comparison of projects. 286 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

287 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The tabular structure of the dialog is similar to that of message management, and can be positioned in the same way by docking and undocking, outside or inside the EPLAN main window. The following columns are displayed in the table: Object type: Shows the object type, for example, Function, Image file, etc. DT / name: Shows the complete DT of the function or the name of the object. For connections, the source and target are displayed; for projects, the project name is shown including file path; for image files, the file name is shown with file path; and for hyperlinks, the designation is shown. Page of the object: Shows the page where differences were found. Kind of change: Shows whether the object was changed, deleted, or newly inserted. Property: Shows the changed property. Previous value: Shows the value of the property in the reference project. New value: Shows the value of the property in the current project. Last editor: Shows the last editor of the page. The data shown in the results dialog is read from the MS Access database in which the results of the property comparison are saved. EPLAN NEWS

288 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Number of displayed results To allow you to quickly receive an overview of the results, not all the entries from the MS Access database are displayed. You define the maximum number of messages to be displayed in the results dialog with another new project setting, Maximum number of displayed results (see the following section on page 289). If the number of messages produced exceeds the specified figure, result output is canceled, and a corresponding note is displayed. Jumping from the results dialog to the project Available to you in the Results of property comparison dialog popup menu, are the two "Go to" menu items Go to project (graphic) and Go to reference project (graphic). You can use these functionalities to jump from a modified object to the relevant points in the schematic. For a newly added object, the only available option is Go to project (graphic). Both menu items are active for moved and changed objects. Both menu items are also active for deleted objects. But with the Go to project (graphic) menu item, you can then only jump to the project schematic, if a deletion marker has been generated at this point. To do this, you must activate the new project setting While deleting create deletion markers and list deleted pages (see the section "Displaying deleted objects" on page 292). Tip: For certain objects (functions, connections, potentials, PCT loops, PCT loop functions) given a revision marker in the graphical editor, it is possible to carry out a synchronization in the Results of property comparison - <Project name> dialog. To do this, mark the required object and then select Popup menu > Synchronize selection. The corresponding lines in the results list will be marked. 288 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

289 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform New settings for the property comparison of projects In this new dialog, you can specify settings for the property comparison of projects. Place revision markers on each page at connections: Now you can also use these settings to specify how connections across more than one page should be marked in the event of a change. If this check box is selected, and a change has been made to a connection that exists on more than one page, this connection will be marked on all of those pages. If the check box is deselected, the connection will only appear on the first page. EPLAN NEWS

290 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Maximum number of displayed results: We have already mentioned this field, which is where you specify the maximum number of messages to be shown in the Results of property comparison - <Project name> dialog. This setting helps speed up the display of the dialog and does not influence the execution of the property comparison. Regardless of the number specified here, all objects will be compared and all results will be written to a database (see the following section). Project-specific databases for the comparison results The results of a property comparison of projects are saved in an MS Access database, as before. This database can no longer be freely selected or created from scratch in the settings, but is now automatically generated for each project and saved in the project directory of the current project. The database is automatically assigned a file name, which includes the file name of the reference project (e.g. Reference project.revision.mdb). Benefit: Because the databases for the comparison results are stored project-specifically, this data can also be backed up with a project / sent as an message. This also allows you to easily integrate all the information about the changes in the project exchange. All project participants, even those in the larger project teams, are thus always up to date. If you want to remove databases of this type from a project, the compression settings in the Revision control area have a new check box available, Remove revision database. You can then remove the databases for the comparison results from the project by selecting Project > Organize > Compress and then making the appropriate compression settings. 290 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

291 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform In the course of these changes, the Database for the project comparison result field has been removed from the revision settings. In addition to this, the directory setting for revision control has also been removed from the Settings: Directories dialog. Deleting revision data of the property comparison Previously, you were not able to delete the data of a properties compareson in revision control. But now, in the new version, you have the opportunity to totally remove all revision data and revision markers. Benefit: Once all the revision information is removed from a revised project, this type of project can be used again to create basic projects or project templates, for example. The previous dialog, Delete revision markers, has been extended and renamed for the purpose, as well as being split into two menu items, in accordance with the two revision control operations. Old name: Delete revision markers New name: Delete revision To remove the revision data and revision markers produced by a property comparison of projects, select Utilities > Revision control > Property comparison of projects > Delete revision. Revision markers: If this check box is selected, all revision markers generated after a property comparison of projects are deleted. EPLAN NEWS

292 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Revision data of property comparison: If this new check box is selected, the revision data generated after a properties comparison is now also deleted. This includes, for example, information about the associated reference projects. Tip: To remove the change tracking revision data and revision markers from a project, select the Utilities > Revision control > Change tracking > Delete revision menu path. Displaying deleted objects EPLAN revision control has been extended, to allow deleted objects to also be displayed for revision with change tracking and for the property comparison of projects. Benefit: The display of deleted objects allows you to track the changes in a project revision or in a properties comparison more transparently. If deleted objects are to be displayed in a project, you must make the following settings: For a revision with change tracking you must activate the new While deleting create deletion markers and list deleted pages project setting. The check box can be found under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Revision (change tracking). For a property comparison of projects, in the Compare properties of projects dialog, you must select the new Create deletion markers for deleted objects check box. 292 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

293 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform If you have made these settings in a revision project / during a properties comparison, then the deleted objects (components, texts, etc.), on the project pages will be identified by a revision marker and by a special object the deletion marker. This is the case both for change tracking and for a properties comparison. The set color for deleted objects is used for the revision marker here. Symbol for the deletion marker A deletion marker gives you information about a deleted object. It is marked by a new special symbol (DO // 300 // Deleted object) from the SPECIAL symbol library, and is placed in the same position as the previously existing object. Example: A typical deletion marker in the schematic: Layer management has been extended by the new EPLAN576, Graphic.Deleted objects layer for the deletion marker. You can use a corresponding setting in layer management to set the deletion marker to invisible / visible throughout the project. EPLAN NEWS

294 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Properties dialog for deletion markers Double-click on a deletion marker to open the Properties (components): Deletion marker dialog. This dialog comprises the familiar Display and Symbol / function data tabs, as well as the new Deletion marker tab, with information about each object that is removed. The properties of the currently deleted object are shown in this tab, such as the name and the Type of the deleted object, the User name and the Delete date. All the other properties are shown in the table in the Properties group box, or can be selected by using property selection. 294 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

295 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Edit deletion markers in change tracking If you have generated a revision of a project, the deleted objects are now (if the setting mentioned above has been activated) identified in the graphical editor by a revision marker and by a deletion marker. In a revision with change tracking, the following is possible for these deletion markers: Move deletion marker If a deleted object is moved in the graphical editor, the deletion marker is given a new revision marker. The color for changed objects alerts the user to the fact that this object has been moved. In addition to this, the marker text is recalculated and updated where necessary. The special properties dialog for the deletion marker retains the information that this concerns a deleted object, even after the move. Edit revision marker texts By default, a tooltip with the automatically generated revision marker text is also shown for a deletion marker. To modify this text, select the deletion marker and then, as usual, choose the Edit revision marker menu item from the popup menu. Delete deleted objects permanently To permanently remove the information about a deleted object from a project page, click the deletion marker insertion point, and in the popup menu, select the new Delete permanently menu item. Note: If the revision marker and the deletion marker of a deleted object are conventionally deleted in the graphical editor (using Popup menu > Delete, for example), then the deleted objects will be replaced by identical, new objects. EPLAN NEWS

296 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Displaying deleted pages in change tracking If the While deleting create deletion markers and list deleted pages check box is selected, then information about the deleted pages will be saved when the pages of a revision project are deleted. You can display a corresponding list using the new Deleted pages dialog. This dialog can be accessed via the Utilities > Revision control > Change tracking > Deleted pages menu items. Some of the properties displayed here are for information only and cannot be changed. You can describe your changes in the Index, Description, and Reason for change fields. Deleted pages can now also be displayed in the revision overview. To do this, you must activate the new form property Revision output with deleted pages <13088>, in the actual form for the revision overview. The "Pages" option must also be set in the form properties for the Revision output type <13106> property. Tip: You also have the opportunity to remove all the revision markers and deletion markers in the project that were produced by change tracking. To do this, select Utilities > Revision control > Change tracking > Delete revision. In a revision with change tracking, deleted pages count as data. To delete them, in the Delete revision dialog, select the Revision data from change tracking check box. 296 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

297 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Delete deleted objects in the properties comparison In a project property comparison, the changes in the project are not permanently logged. The revision markers are generated once, and are initially retained in this form until the next comparison. Because of this, you can permanently remove a deleted object from the project, by deleting the revision marker and the deletion marker (via Popup menu > Delete, for example). The revision marker and the deletion marker will only be displayed again after a new properties comparison with the unchanged reference project. Tip: You also have the opportunity to remove all the revision markers and deletion markers in the project that were produced by the property comparison of projects. To do this, select Utilities > Revision control > Property comparison of projects > Delete revision (see the section "Deleting revision data of the property comparison" on page 291). In a property comparison of projects, deletion markers and deleted pages count as revision markers. To delete them, in the Delete revision dialog, select the Revision marker check box. Layout spaces in revision control Change tracking Changed layout spaces are treated as pages in revision control change tracking. This allows them to be completed via Utilities > Revision control > Change tracking > Complete pages, for example. Changes in layout spaces are then also included in the revision overview. The Page column in the Edit revision data dialog in Page / Layout space has also been changed, and now also shows layout spaces. Unlike a complete page name, the name of a layout space is separated from the structure identifier not by the separator "/" but by a space and a bracket (e.g. =EB3+ET1 (2)). EPLAN NEWS

298 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Property comparison of projects The 3D objects in a layout space are also taken into account in a property comparison of projects. For example, by specifying the relevant setting, deleted and new objects in a layout space are listed in the results dialog. The DT (identifying) <20005> property can be used for a property comparison of projects. But 3D object-specific properties that belong to the "Data" category, such as Layout space name <20261>, Layout space description, <20235> etc., can also be used for a property comparison. 298 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

299 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform New Features in the "Multi Language Translation" Add-on Note: The "Multi Language Translation" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN Electric P8 Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional, EPLAN Fluid, and EPLAN PPE. The Translation utility in the "Multi Language Translation" add-on also has a number of new features in this version. Distinguishing between source language and displayed language In EPLAN, there is now a distinction between source language and displayed language. The project-specific, general translation settings have been extended by the Source language drop-down list for this purpose. EPLAN NEWS

300 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Benefit: This allows you to also enter texts in the project in a language that is not set as a displayed language. In international projects, all users can use their native languages for their planning, whatever displayed language is defined. This simplifies project planning work and protects against incorrect input, which is perfectly possible with a foreign language. Source language: In this field, you specify the project source language. This is the language in which you enter your project texts. The project source language is simultaneously the translation source language. When translating, EPLAN searches the dictionary for suitable keywords for this language and translates them into all the selected translation languages. You also use the source language to specify the language in which translatable project texts are displayed in dialogs. Display languages: In this field you specify the languages and sequence in which translatable project texts are displayed in the graphical editor. You can select as the display languages either the dialog language (##_## (Dialog language) option), or other languages that you have already set as translation languages. Example: You have an appropriate dictionary with keywords in the source language en_us and the corresponding translation texts in the languages fr_fr, zh_cn, ru_ru. You have made the following settings: Setting Translation languages Source language Display languages Language en_us, fr_fr, zh_cn, ru_ru en_us zh_cn, ru_ru 300 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

301 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform For text input and translation, this means: Inserting texts: You enter your project texts in English, because you have selected en_us as the source language, and translate your project. Translate: All project texts are translated into the languages fr_fr, zh_cn, and ru_ru. They already exist in en_us. For text display, this means: Graphical editor: Here the project texts are only displayed in the languages zh_cn and ru_ru. Dialogs: Here the translatable project texts, such as page descriptions in the page navigator, are displayed in the source language of the project, en_us. Note: The source language can be selected as the displayed language, but does not have to be. If you have not selected the source language as the displayed language, you will receive an appropriate message. The set source language will also be displayed in the status bar, as soon as you can enter a text in the project in EPLAN. Upper-/lower-case letters for the source language If you have previously inserted a word as text (for example, Antrieb for the source language de_de) and for the project-specific, general setting Upper-/lower-case letters, have selected the option All upper-case letters, for example, this only affects the output translation text during the translation (for the translation language en_us, e.g. DRIVE). The source text then had upper-/lower-case letters, as applied for the corresponding keyword in the dictionary. Now the Upper-/lower-case letters setting also has an effect on the texts in the source language. EPLAN NEWS

302 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform You use this setting not only to define the style to be used to output the translation texts, but also to decide how the entered project texts will be displayed in the graphical editor. Example: For the Upper-/lower-case letters setting, you have selected the All upper-case letters option. Then, in the Properties - Text dialog, enter the word Motor. Once you have closed the dialog with [OK], the text MOTOR will be displayed in the graphical editor. Notes: Please be aware that when automatically translating with Utilities > Translation > Translate, the Match case setting can also affect the translation. If this check box is selected, then EPLAN finds the matching keyword only if the upper- and lower-case writing of the text exactly matches the upper- and lower-case writing of the keyword in the dictionary. If the translation texts are to be output in a specific style during a translation run (All upper-case letters, All lower-case letters, or Capitalize first letter options), you must deselect the Match case check box. This setting does not take effect for a manual translation in the properties dialog. Text-based line breaks in translations A new check box, Line breaks: Text-based is now available in the translation settings, to influence the translation line breaks in a word-byword translation. 302 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

303 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform You can make this new setting separately, both for project texts and for project-independent texts, for example, in the Settings: Translation dialog on the Project and Project-independent tabs. However, the relevant check box is only available once you have selected the "Word" setting in the Segment field. If the check box is selected, then the positions of the line breaks in the translations are subject to the position in the original text. The check box is not selected by default. In this case, EPLAN considers the word length of the source text and puts the line break at an appropriate point in the translated text. Separators in the translation of a particular keyword are considered for a possible line break position. A space, a hyphen, or a separator suggestion in the dictionary count as separators here. Example: You have set en_us as the source and as the display language for a project. French (fr_fr) is specified as the translation language and as the second display language. The project texts input as examples here, clearly show how these texts are displayed in the schematic, subject to the selected setting after translation: Text entry Setting Displayed text Schematic Placeholder Schematic Placeholder Line breaks: Text-based Line breaks: Text-based Schematic Placeholder Schéma des connexions Code de réservation Schematic Placeholder Schéma des connexions Code de réservation EPLAN NEWS

304 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform For the text entry in the example, it is irrelevant whether it is produced in a multilingual text box in the properties dialog of a component, or for a graphical text. The line break character ( ) only has an illustrative function here. When text is entered in the Properties - Text dialog, an inserted line break is not displayed. Changed translation behavior on input If you let your texts be translated on input, the entered texts now remain language-independent, if a translation text cannot be found for this text in the dictionary. An online translation now only takes place if there is also a translation text available in the dictionary. In this case the text is always displayed in the source language in which it was entered, regardless of the specified dialog language. Texts, page properties, project properties, and device properties are already automatically translated as they are entered, if the Translate on input check box is selected in the project-specific translation settings. Correction option for existing projects A correction option is also available for existing projects, in which nontranslated texts have been marked as translated. The Extent tab in the translation settings has the [Correction] button available for this purpose. Use this button to convert texts that are excluded from the translation, but for which a translation text is nevertheless entered, into languageindependent texts. Once you have clicked the button, a prompt is displayed. The following options are available: [Yes]: All texts excluded from translation are converted to languageindependent texts. Already existing translation texts are removed. 304 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

305 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform [No]: Only texts for which an empty translation text has been entered are converted into language-independent texts. (Empty translation texts can occur, for example, in projects created with older EPLAN versions (before Version 2.0), if the Translate on input option was enabled and no translation text was found in the dictionary.) [Cancel]: No texts are converted. Exporting the missing-word list based on the dictionary In the new version, you now have the opportunity to export a missingword list based on the dictionary, independently of the project. Available for this in the Dictionary dialog on the Management tab under [Extras], is the new menu item Export missing-word list. Benefit: An automated export of words with a missing translation simplifies dictionary upkeep. The missing-word list makes it easy to incorporate translation service providers. Project editors no longer have to deal with translation tasks, and can concentrate 100% on engineering tasks. Selecting this menu item opens a dialog, in which you can specify the file name and file type for the missing-word list to be exported. As when exporting the dictionary, files in XML format *.etd, in tab-separated Unicode format *.txt, in EPLAN 5 CSV format *.tf, or in EPLAN 21 tab-separated Unicode format *.txt are possible. You select the relevant languages in a further subsequent dialog. The missing dictionary texts can then be subsequently translated outside EPLAN, and imported back with [Extras] > Import. Before starting the import, you still have to select the source language. This is important for correctly assigning the imported texts. EPLAN NEWS

306 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Notes: With this Export, the language used as the source language (that is, the language in which you make entries in the dictionary), is the language set on the Project-independent tab in the translation settings as the Source language. One possible menu path to the translation settings is: Utilities > Translation > Settings. To make sure that when importing texts, the new keywords are accepted into the dictionary, the Append new translations setting is activated by default. This check box is located, for example, under Options > Settings > User > Translation > Dictionary. New messages for the translation The following two messages are now available for the "008 Foreign languages" message class in the check-related settings for message management: Message "Text entry '%1!s!' does not exist in the dictionary." Message "Text is not translated in the project '%1!s!'." Benefit: Using this functionality, you can jump directly to the texts in the diagram that are not translated. This makes specific revision faster and easier. There are no missing translations and a high quality of project documentation is assured. If you perform an offline check run using message , "Text in project not translated '%1!s!'.", all texts (simple "graphical" texts, property texts, path function texts, etc.) that do not have a translation for one or more of the set translation languages, will be listed in message management. 306 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

307 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform New Features in the "User Rights Management" Add-on Note: The "User Rights Management" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN Electric P8 Select, EPLAN Electric P8 Professional, and for EPLAN Fluid. With the "User Rights Management" add-on, an administrator can configure both the user rights and the user interface (dialogs, menu structure, etc.), of the EPLAN platform. Administrator: As an administrator, you must read the following section before you work with the new version. Assigning new rights Numerous rights for rights management have been added in the new EPLAN version. To allow the new rights to be assigned to the different user groups, you must update your rights management. Tip: We recommend that you create a new group, before updating. No rights are assigned to this group initially. When you update, the new rights are assigned to all the groups. Because of this, only the new rights are activated for the sample group, to make the new rights easier for you to recognize. To update, in the Rights management dialog, click the [Update] button. After updating, the System messages dialog is automatically opened. Here you can see which rights have been added or removed. The new rights are then available for the existing user groups. By default, they are activated for all groups, including "Guests". EPLAN NEWS

308 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform New Features in the "Mounting Panel" Add-on Note: The "Mounting Panel" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN Electric P8 Compact and EPLAN Fluid Compact. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery for EPLAN Electric P8 Select, EPLAN Electric P8 Professional, and for EPLAN Fluid. The "Mounting Panel" add-on allows planning of enclosures and mounting panels. To make a clearer distinction between the navigator of this add-on and other navigators, this project data dialog has been renamed "2D panel layout navigator". The user-specific settings for graphical editing have also been appropriately renamed. Old name: Panel layout navigator Settings: Panel layout New name: 2D panel layout navigator Settings: 2D panel layout A clearer view in the navigator Previously in the 2D panel layout navigator, all parts without device tags were listed one after the other at the uppermost position. Many of these entries originated from the connections that were assigned to a part. To give a clearer arrangement to the 2D panel layout navigator, all parts from connections are now automatically and permanently filtered out. These parts are not required for panel layout. In the identifier-based view, all devices without a DT are sorted into the Without DT tree structure level. This behavior is similar to the display of devices without DT in other navigator dialogs. Benefit: The clearer view makes it easier for you to use the 2D panel layout navigator. 308 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

309 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform If a device has multiple parts, in the identifier-based view these parts are no longer sorted into alphabetical order in the tree under the relevant device tag, but are arranged in the order in which they occur in the properties dialog on the Parts tab. Terminals and strip accessories, on the other hand, are displayed in the type of order in which they appear in the Edit terminal strip dialog. Note: The same behavior as that described here applies for the 3D mounting layout navigator of the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on. Placing terminal strips on the mounting panel It is now possible in EPLAN to place terminal strips on a mounting panel and then represent them in the enclosure legend. The placement of items on a mounting panel occurs in the 2D panel layout navigator, for example, via Popup menu > Place on mounting panel. In a case like this, if you place the unplaced parts of a terminal strip, then provided a part has yet to be placed for this terminal strip, a new prompt will now be displayed. Use this prompt to decide whether the complete terminal strip should be placed. Answer [Yes] to this prompt, and you can then place the complete terminal strip. All the terminals of the terminal strip will be marked as placed in the 2D panel layout navigator tree by a green check mark. The terminal widths stored in the parts management module are added to determine the dimensions of the terminal strip on the mounting panel. The maximum height stored for the terminal parts is used as the height of the new part placement. If you click [No] in the prompt, you can then place the terminals individually, as before. EPLAN NEWS

310 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform The part placement properties dialog for a terminal strip differs from the properties dialogs of placed terminals. To identify that this part placement represents the entire terminal strip, no part number is entered on the Part placement tab in the Part field. All the terminals of the terminal strip are then regarded internally as placed. This properties dialog also has the appropriate function definition ("Part placement, terminal strip"). When an enclosure legend is subsequently generated (or updated), the placed terminal strips are also listed in the relevant legend. Displaying the handles of part placements Since EPLAN Version 1.9 International SP 1, the position of the part placement handle has been evaluated instead of the insertion point, when numbering the legend items of mounting panels. Should the handles of part placements be displayed, select the View > Insertion points menu items. If the position of a handle differs from the insertion point, the handle is now also displayed for the part placement (circle with a diagonal cross ). The position of the handle when placing the part can be influenced using the Settings: 2D panel layout dialog. Note: If you place items on a DIN rail, you should always use the "Middle left" setting for the handle position, so that the legend items are numbered continuously. 310 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

311 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Same legend item for identical devices When editing legend items, you now have the opportunity to assign the same legend item to identical devices, for which the same part number has been entered. To do this, in the 2D panel layout navigator, for example, select the Popup menu > Edit legend item menu item for a marked mounting panel and then click [Number]. In the Number dialog, you now have the new Same number for identical devices check box available. Select this check box, if identical devices are to be given the same legend item. This is particularly important for the GOST standard. Settings New action for importing settings The new "Import settings" action (action name XSettingsImport) is now available to you in EPLAN. You can use this action to automatically import the settings that have previously been exported as an XML file. Benefit: These settings allow you to greatly influence the behavior of the EPLAN platform. It is now an automated process to exchange these settings. Manual input is no longer required, which saves you time when standardizing projects or workstations. A common and consistent standard ensures highquality planning and makes it easier to implement the documentation requirements of the machinery directive. For automated execution, you have to use the Customize dialog to store the action as a button in a user-defined toolbar, or enter it using a different command line call (such as the Windows Run dialog). With command line input, the following command line parameters can be specified: EPLAN NEWS

312 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform /XMLFile: directory and name of the file to be imported (necessary). /node: "node" of the setting to be imported (optional). /Project: name of the target project (optional). If a project is specified, only the project settings are imported. Importing all user, workstation, and company settings If only the XMLFile command line parameter is listed, all the existing user, workstation, and company settings will be imported from the specified file (e.g. XSettingsImport /XMLFile: C:\file.xml). Importing all project settings If in addition to XMLFile, the Project parameter is also listed in the command line, only the existing project settings will be imported from the specified file (e.g. XSettingsImport /XMLFile:C:\projectsettings.xml /Project:C:\...\EPLAN-DEMO.elk). Importing settings for a dialog If you only want to import the settings for a quite specific dialog, you must use the node parameter to specify the "node" under which the settings are to be imported. This can be both a dialog from the project settings and a dialog from the other settings areas. To find out the name of the node, you can open the previously exported xml file in Internet Explorer, for example, and transfer the name of the node from the <MOD name="..."> entry. 312 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

313 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Example: You want to import the settings of the Settings: Print dialog from another user. By default, the name of the exported xml file is Workstation+Graphical Editing+Print.xml. From this file, under the <CAT name="station"> category, you take the name of the node <MOD name="print">. A possible entry in the command line of the Set button dialog for transferring settings could then look like this: XSettingsImport /XMLFile:C:TMP\Workstation+Graphical Editing+Print.xml /node:print Preceding sign for interruption point names For interruption points, you can now also specify whether a preceding sign is automatically set in the interruption point name when interruption points are used. The new Interruption points check box has been added to the Settings: DT dialog in the Set preceding sign group box for this purpose. This check box is deselected by default (under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > DT). In this case, the interruption point name is not given a preceding sign when the interruption point is used. Note: The settings for Set preceding sign were previously under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > General. For reasons of space, these settings and the Conversion to uppercase and Hide brackets in DT check boxes were moved to the new Settings: DT dialog. EPLAN NEWS

314 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform New settings for displayed units of measure A new dialog for displayed units of measure is available to you in the user-specific settings. As well as the familiar Displayed unit of length, you now also have the opportunity here to specify the Displayed unit of weight. Use the Options > Settings > User > Display > Displayed units of measure menu path to access these settings in the program. Benefit: You can use this functionality to specify the weight of a part either in kilograms or in pounds. The two options mm and Inch of the Displayed unit of length group box were previously in the Settings: User interface dialog, and have been moved here for the sake of clarity. 314 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

315 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform You use the options in the new Displayed unit of weight group box to decide whether the weight of a part is evaluated in "kg" or "lb" (pound) in parts management. This means that an existing weight will be converted in accordance with the displayed unit of measure. Tip: If, when weight values are output in reports, the set unit of measure is to be output with them (in a parts list, for example), this can be done using the new Weight in displayed unit <22059> property. Renamed settings for graphical editing In the user-specific settings for graphical editing (under Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing) you make the settings for cursor display, for scroll behavior or color settings, for example. The settings dialog has been renamed, to more clearly differentiate these settings from the similar settings for the 3D view of the "EPLAN Pro Panel" addon. Old name: Settings: General New name: Settings: 2D EPLAN NEWS

316 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Properties User-defined property configurations Wherever properties are listed in a table for an object (project, page, device properties, etc.), you now have the opportunity to create separate property categories. Properties from different groups can be combined in this way and saved in a user-defined property configuration. Benefit: By individually customizing the user interface, you can access the input fields that are important to you more quickly. You can save a selection of properties that you have compiled as a configuration, and make it available to other projects or other users. To create a user-defined property configuration, you must select the "User-defined" entry for the Category field in the relevant properties dialog. Then select Popup menu > Configure. The Property configuration dialog that then opens has been extended by the familiar Scheme and Description fields for the user-defined property configuration. You can use the scheme toolbar that is now also in the dialog to create a new scheme, for example, or to export / import the scheme of a property configuration. Properties from all categories are available to you in the property selection for user-defined property configurations. The name of a saved, user-defined property configuration is then displayed in the Category field. 316 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

317 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Renamed project property As the term "drawing number" applies to a page, the project property Drawing number <10013> has been renamed Job number <10013>. The page property Drawing number <11030> is unchanged. Old name: New name: Drawing number <10013> Job number <10013> New properties for device tags Now available in EPLAN are several new properties for device tags, where the preceding sign is also included in the specification. This affects the following properties: DT (superior, without project structures, with preceding sign) <20211> DT (subordinate, without project structures, with preceding sign) <20212> DT (full, without project structures, with preceding sign) <20213> DT (identifying, without project structures, with preceding sign) <20215>. Example: You have inserted the DT (subordinate, without project structures, with preceding sign) property in a form as a placeholder text. For the device tag =A+O-U1-K1, in a case like this, -K1 is output when generating a relevant report. EPLAN NEWS

318 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Other New Features in Utilities Extensions for automated editing Exporting and importing scripts In the new version, you now also have the opportunity to export and / or import scripts for automated processing of project actions. Benefit: This allows you to transfer scripts for automated processing from one project to another. Once defined, the scripts can be exchanged within a planning group, as well as between different companies. Define a common standard, and use automated processing to optimize the planning of all those participating in the project. Available to you for this purpose in the Settings: Automated processing dialog, in the toolbar next to the Script name drop-down list, are the two familiar buttons: (Export) and (Import). One possible menu path to this dialog is: Utilities > Automated processing > Settings. Automated PDF export Another new feature is that now, with automated processing, you can also automatically output projects as a PDF. The new "Export PDF" action is available to you in the Settings: Automated processing dialog for this purpose. If you use the button to move this action for a script to the Selected actions list, the familiar PDF export dialog opens (see page 192). You can use this dialog to make the settings for automated PDF file output. 318 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

319 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Improved registration for add-ons The registration of add-ons, such as the EPLAN Data Portal, has been simplified for the EPLAN platform. The Add-ons dialog, which is accessed via the Utilities > Add-ons menu path, has been redesigned. In addition to this, when you uninstall an add-on, registration is now automatically deleted. Benefit: Install.xml no longer has to be found when re-registering a module. When you uninstall an add-on, the removal sequence is now no longer an issue. When you start the program, all the possible add-ons that can be registered are listed in the Add-ons dialog: For add-ons that match the product variant (down to the version number) and which have automated registration available, the new Registered check box is selected. This means that the functionalities of these modules are available to you in EPLAN. Add-ons that match the product variant, but which are not automatically registered, are also listed. For these modules, the Registered check box is not selected. If these modules are also to be registered, select the corresponding check boxes. Registration then takes place when you exit the dialog with [OK]. Note: Please note that all add-ons are installed with absolute paths. For that reason it is not possible to install an add-on in a net. Unregister To unregister an add-on, deselect the Registered check box and close the Add-ons dialog with [OK]. EPLAN NEWS

320 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform However, the module will still be listed in the dialog. If you want to use the add-on again, you have to re-open the dialog and select the check box. Finding other add-ons In the Add-ons dialog, you now have the button available for finding other add-ons (manually created modules or modules that match older main versions). In the next dialog, select the associated Install.xml, and click [Open]. The corresponding add-on (such as the "PPEAddon" of Version ), will then be listed in the dialog, and can be registered by using the check box mentioned above. These new add-ons can also be removed. To do this, you first have to deselect the Registered check box for this module. Then, to remove the module from the Add-ons dialog, click. Automated unregistering when uninstalling If you have uninstalled an add-on, its registration in the EPLAN platform is automatically deleted the next time you start the program. The relevant information is given to you in the system messages. The mandatory uninstall sequence for add-ons, of first unregistering and then uninstalling the module, no longer applies. Improved display of system messages The system messages dialog (under Utilities > System messages) now has an additional text field available, that cannot be edited. If you select a message, the full description text is displayed in this field, below the list with the system messages. If you have selected a message that has other, subordinate messages, the display also includes the descriptions of these associated, subordinate messages. Benefit: It is no longer necessary to change the size of the columns or maximize the system messages dialog, as the description text is fully legible immediately. 320 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

321 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Licensing Extensions to EPLAN License Manager With the release of the new platform version, EPLAN has also made available a new version of the EPLAN License Manager (ELM). This program allows you to manage EPLAN product licenses within a network. Various new functionalities make network license administration easier for you. An overview of the main new features of the EPLAN License Manager: Usage of "variable bundles": When combining licenses in bundles, the licenses can now also be defined as "variable bundles". License bundles of this type allow you to create templates for specific license combinations in any number, regardless of the actual number of available licenses. The license elements contained in this combination are only assigned in the EPLAN License Manager when a "variable bundle" is selected on program start. Event log for network licenses: The "License Manager Monitor" now gives you the opportunity to create a report about the license status of an EPLAN License Manager. You use a configuration file to specify everything that is to be logged. The log itself is created as an XML file. This shows who has been using or borrowing which license, and when. This allows you to see how the licenses are utilized, for example. EPLAN NEWS

322 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Borrowing licenses using command line parameters: It is now possible to use command line parameters to borrow network licenses. The settings for borrowing are transferred as a configuration file (borrow.cfg). The EPLAN platform start could look like this, for example: W3u.EXE /license: \borrow.cfg Borrowing network licenses offline: It is now also possible to borrow a network license when the user's computer is not connected to the internal network. To do this, the user uses the Select license dialog to create a request file with their computer data, which is then sent to the EPLAN License Manager administrator by , for example. The administrator runs the borrowing process with the data that has been sent, creates a response file, and returns the borrowed license bundle to the user, who can then use it to start EPLAN. Rights management: Rights management has now been added to the EPLAN License Manager configuration program. This makes it possible to define who can use or borrow the licenses contained in each bundle. Rights management can now be used to specify user rights for individual users and user groups. Cross-domain usage: By default, a license client can access the EPLAN License Manager using the rights of the logged-on user. When the cross-domain usage function is activated, a separate user account can be specified, for access to the license manager. This procedure not only allows access to the EPLAN License Manager in networks with several independent domains, it also makes operation easier in environments that do not have Windows domains (working groups, Novell). 322 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

323 Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform Failure protection: To improve failure protection (failover), it is now also possible to install two license managers. One of these is the active EPLAN License Manager (Primary License Manager). This is where the licenses are validated, and the software protection (dongle) is also connected here. Should the first license manager fail, a second, and previously inactive EPLAN License Manager (Standby License Manager) takes on its function for a maximum of seven days, and makes the licenses available. As soon as the first license manager is available again, the other one goes back to being inactive. You do not have to exit the EPLAN application to switch between the two license managers. Note: Please note that the Event log, Rights management, Cross-domain usage, and Failure protection functionalities must be licensed separately for the EPLAN License Manager. EPLAN NEWS

324 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Terminals / Plugs Terminal / pin and connection point descriptions Plugs and terminals now feature an additional new property, namely Terminal / pin description <20225>. This new property is made available wherever the Terminal / pin designation property can be selected (filters, reports, etc.). For this purpose you are offered the new Description field on the Terminal and Pin tabs in the properties dialog. In addition, the Connection point description field has been added to the properties dialog for terminals and pins. Benefit: In addition to the connection point designations, you can now also specify the connection point descriptions for plugs. This considerably improves the legibility of the plan for the engineer and saves needing to search other sources for the information. Example: RJ45 plug assignment according to the EIA/TIA-568B standard for Ethernet 1000: Connection point designation 1 D1+ 2 D1-3 D2+ 4 D3+ 5 D3-6 D2- Connection point description 324 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

325 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Connection point designation Connection point description 7 D4+ 8 D4- Extension of the function templates To also take account of the Connection point description and Terminal / pin description properties during device selection and when overlaying, the function templates in Parts management have likewise been extended. On the Function templates tab, the Device selection (function templates) table now has the additional column Connection point description for most product groups ("Component (general)", "Component (relays, contactors)", "Component (PLC)", etc.). EPLAN NEWS

326 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 For the "Component (terminals)" and "Component (plugs)" product groups, the additional Terminal description and Pin description columns appear in the device selection table. You will also be offered these properties as selection criteria in device selection and in the device selection settings. Displaying saddle jumpers for "Interconnect devices" Since EPLAN version 1.9, the terminals in a terminal strip are sometimes displayed more than once in the Interconnect devices dialog. The reason for this is that the logic model for the "Terminal, general" function definition (and similar function definitions) has been extended from two to four connection points. Two of these connection points are designed for saddle jumpers. The menu path to this dialog is: Project data > Devices > Interconnect devices. In the new version an Include saddle jumpers check box has been added to the Interconnect devices dialog. This enables you to control whether or not connection points of connection point type "Saddle jumper" should be displayed. If the check box is selected, then connection points of connection point type "Saddle jumper" will be shown in the table. Connection points for automatically generated saddle jumpers will also be shown; these may have any connection point type. In order to detect the connection point type, in this case you should also display the property Connection point logic: Connection point type in the table (via Popup menu > Configure columns). The check box is deselected by default. In this case both connection points of connection point type "Saddle jumper" and connection points for automatically generated saddle jumpers are hidden. 326 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

327 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Displaying connection point properties The Interconnect devices dialog has been optimized in respect to the extensions for defining multi-line connection points (see page 98). You can now also have the Connection point logic: External property displayed in the tables on the left and right side of the dialog for connection points. First, the columns must be configured accordingly. The Internal / External option fields have also been converted into a drop-down list of the same name. In this way you can specify for the device source and/or the device target whether only the internal, only the external, or both types of connection points ("Internal and external") are displayed in the respective table. The Add insulation popup menu option is also new. Details can be found in the section "Inserting insulated wire terminations" on page 334. EPLAN NEWS

328 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 New Features in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on Note: The "PLC & Bus Extension" is an optional add-on for EPLAN Electric P8 Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional. The "PLC & Bus Extension" add-on helps you to manage PLC controllers and bus systems. Configurable PLC connection points To display PLC cards with programmable connection points in EPLAN you can now use the new "PLC connection point, multifunction" function definition. Connection points with this function definition are configurable: For these connection points the Type of signal property in the connection point logic determines what type of connection point it is. The default setting is "Digital input". If a signal type is selected that does not define any I/O connection point (i.e. not "Digital input", "Digital output", "Analog input", or "Analog output"), then the connection point is treated as a power supply. Thus the configurable PLC connection points are not only defined by the function definition, but the signal type is also taken into account. If you want to use configurable PLC connection points in your project, start by adding any PLC I/O connections to the schematic and then, on the Symbol / function data tab in the properties dialog, select the "PLC connection point, multifunction" function definition for these connection points. 328 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

329 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Note: Please note that exported PLC connection points with the "PLC connection point, multifunction" function definition are not displayed in the Synchronize / import PLC data dialog if they are re-imported. The PLC configuration systems assign specific connection points to these "variable" PLC connection points, and for that reason they are not recognized as multi-function PLC connection points when re-imported. Channels with several I/O connection points In EPLAN a PLC channel can now contain more than one I/O connection point. However, only one of these I/O connection points on a channel can be active. To mark all the other I/O connection points within the channel as disabled, you can assign them the new Deactivated I/O connection point <20438> property. Benefit: This means that the same macro and the same part can be used for different wiring configurations. If you can restrict your macro data to the bare minimum, this will reduce the overhead of macro maintenance without costing you any flexibility in project planning. Example: A macro contains an analog channel with two I/O connection points to which the Deactivated I/O connection point property is assigned. You can use this macro with different wirings for measuring current or voltage. Once the macro has been added, activate the I/O connection point that matches the wiring by deactivating the Deactivated I/O connection point property there. Deactivated connection points are treated as power supplies. For example, when addressing a filled address, the address from the channel is overwritten. EPLAN NEWS

330 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Blockwise use of existing PLC connection points and PLC boxes In the Use existing PLC connection points blockwise dialog, the PLC boxes can now be seen and can be selected for use. If you have highlighted PLC connection points in the project that are in a PLC box, these will be assigned the selected connection points when using the existing DT. This does not change the DT of the PLC box and, as a result, the assignment of the PLC connection points to the PLC box is lost. If you want to retain the assignment of the PLC connection points to the PLC box, you should again use the existing PLC box. In the new Status column on the right-hand side, icons show you whether the existing PLC box or connection point selected for use can be assigned to the PLC box or connection point available in the project in the left-hand table. The icons have the following meaning: Icon Meaning Function category and PLC function group match. It can be used. Warning: The function category of the PLC functions matches, but the group does not match (e.g. in the case of a PLC connection point with digital input and a PLC connection point for a bus cable). It can be used, but this could lead to incorrect results. Error: The function category of the PLC functions does not match (e.g. in the case of a PLC box and a PLC connection point). It cannot be used. Interface for PLC data exchange with Rockwell The new version introduces a new interface for PLC data exchange. This interface allows the exchange of PLC data between EPLAN Electric P8 and the "RSLogix Architect" PLC configuration software from Rockwell Automation. 330 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

331 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 For this purpose, both data exchange dialogs, Export PLC data and Import PLC data, have been upgraded to include the "RSLogix Architect 3.6" format. Simplified data display when importing PLC data Previously, when importing PLC data all properties were displayed in the Synchronize / import PLC data dialog. In the new version, the number of properties displayed in the synchronization dialog has now been significantly reduced. Benefit: It is easier for the user to see which properties can be applied. The transparent display makes importing PLC project planning data easier and also facilitates cross-discipline engineering in line with PLC software development. After you have selected a PLC object in the Master / slave or Rack / module fields, only the relevant properties are displayed in the table on the right-hand side, depending on the selected import file format. The properties that are not displayed remain unchanged on import. Example: In import files for the "Siemens SIMATIC STEP 7 version 5.3 / 5.4" format, the Subslot property is displayed for the PLC communication units. In a Schneider bus configuration file this property does not occur. Extended part allocation when exporting and importing bus configurations For the "PLC standard exchange format", a parts list is now exported and imported in addition to the PLC type designation for each PLC device. If several parts have been entered for a PLC box (at the main function), these are exported and reassigned when the PLC box is imported. EPLAN NEWS

332 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Cables Highlighting cable connections Cable connections can now be highlighted in EPLAN, by a special color, for example. For this purpose, the EPLAN550, Symbol graphic.connection symbols.autoconnecting.cables layer has been added to layer management. Benefit: Using color highlighting means that cable connections can be traced easily and reliably through the project. Greater transparency in documentation avoids planning errors, increasing quality without any additional input in terms of time and effort. As the properties of this layer defined in layer management are used for the cable connection autoconnecting lines, a special setting must be specified. To do so, select Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Cables (conductors) in the menu, go to the General tab and in the Representation of the autoconnecting line group box select the Cable-based option. Note: If you select cable-based representation of the autoconnecting line, the highlighted setting for the cable connections in layer management always takes precedence over a setting to the connection graphic via a potential definition point. If a setting is specified on a connection via a connection definition point, this setting takes precedence over the Cablebased option. 332 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

333 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Ignoring subordinate DTs for nested targets In the project-specific cable settings in Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Cables, the new Ignore subordinate DTs for nested targets setting can now be seen. This setting affects both the cable numbering and the automatic generation of cables as well as the output of cables in reports. Benefit: This option allows you to change the operation mode of EPLAN to the main or subordinate device depending on your requirements. Reports and automatic functions are also available that immediately show the view that you are used to working with. If the check box is activated, the subordinate device tags are not output as cable targets in the case of nested devices. In this case the superior devices (for example the black boxes) are the targets. The representation of the conductor targets is not changed. The subordinate device tags are always output as targets here. If the check box is deselected, the subordinate device tags are output as cable targets. EPLAN NEWS

334 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Inserting insulated wire terminations In EPLAN, you now have the opportunity to use a special symbol for insulated wire terminations, such as the conductors of a cable connected on one side. Symbols for wire terminations To insert a corresponding symbol in the graphical editor, in the Symbol selection dialog, choose a symbol for insulated wire terminations (either NCI // 100 // Wire termination, insulated or NC // 101 // Wire termination, not connected). These symbols belong to the SPECIAL symbol library. They can be found under General special functions in the new Insulated wire termination function category. For this purpose, the new Insulated wire termination function category has been added to the function definitions under General // General special functions. Functions with a function definition only have one connection point and this connection is terminated by the corresponding function. Properties dialog for wire terminations When you have placed the symbol in the required variant, the properties dialog opens. On the new Insulated wire termination tab, enter the displayed DT of the device at which the connection terminates. For this component too, use the [...] button to open the DT selection dialog where the required DT can be imported. 334 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

335 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 If the device to which the insulated wire termination is assigned is renamed, the device tag on the wire termination is automatically updated accordingly. Displaying wire terminations in the navigators Insulated wire terminations are shown in the navigator trees (e.g. in the device navigator) as part of the device to which they are assigned, and are indicated by the special icon. The Popup menu > New menu in the device navigator allows you to create unplaced wire terminations (icon: ) and to place these in the schematic later on or to connect them to interconnect devices as unplaced. Example: The figure below shows an insulated wire termination in the device navigator: Adding insulation for "Interconnect devices" When generating unplaced connections between device connection points in the Interconnect devices dialog / tab, you also have the option to generate unplaced insulated wire terminations. To do so, use the new Add insulation menu item in the popup menu in this dialog / tab. EPLAN NEWS

336 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Then select one or more connection points in the Device source / Device target table and choose Popup menu > Add insulation. The Function definitions dialog then opens, in which a suitable function definition is automatically suggested as the selected source for the insulated wire terminations. The Properties (components): General device dialog then opens. In this dialog, you can edit the properties of the insulated wire termination. The displayed DT of the insulation cannot be changed here: this was defined when the device source was selected. When you close the properties dialog, the insulated wire termination is generated as an unplaced function and shown in the Interconnect devices dialog as an additional row in the table. Other aspects of insulated wire terminations Please also bear the following in mind in relation to insulated wire terminations: Insulated wire terminations are not taken into account when selecting devices and when overwriting function templates. Device-oriented reports In device-oriented reports (e.g. connection diagrams), the insulated wire termination for the device to which it is assigned is not output as a connection point. For example, if insulation is assigned to a terminal strip, the insulated wire termination will not be listed as an additional terminal for the terminal strip in the terminal diagram. Connection-based reports In connection-based reports (connection lists, cable diagrams, etc.), insulated wire terminations are output as the target of a connection or a cable conductor. 336 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

337 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Devices Inserting cable parts as devices If you now insert a cable part as a device in the graphical editor (e.g. using Insert > Device), the individual objects will be made available for placement in the sequence defined in parts management. Benefit: It takes fewer steps to enter cables in the diagram as devices. This reduces the time spent on editing and the user can concentrate on plant planning. In the process the symbol for the cable definition line or the shield is displayed at the cursor. At the conductors, the Color / number of the conductors is displayed. Note: Shields should not be defined as separate function templates with the "Shield, cable definition" function definition in parts management; this should be defined implicitly via the cable conductors. If the part has a function template with the function definition "Conductor / wire" and the potential type "SH", a shield is generated automatically when Insert device is used before this cable conductor is inserted. A connection definition point is generated when a conductor is placed. If a non-empty connection definition point already exists for the connection, a prompt is displayed that allows you to choose to retain or replace the connection definition point. When replaced, the old connection definition point is deleted and a new one placed with the data from parts management. EPLAN NEWS

338 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Example: The following function templates are defined for a cable part: Row Function definition Color / no.... Potential type 1 Cable definition 2 Conductor / wire 1 Undefined 3 Conductor / wire SH SH In row 3 a shielded conductor with the potential type "SH" is defined at the same time as the shield. The shield name is taken from the Color / number field of this conductor. When the device is inserted into the graphical editor, the following objects are made available in sequence: Object 1. Cable definition Display at the cursor Properties 2. Conductor 1 Color / number: 1, Potential type: Undefined 3 Shield Name of shield: SH 4 Conductor SH Color / number: SH, Potential type: SH 338 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

339 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Device Selection Device selection for wires It is now also possible to run a device selection on wire parts at a connection definition point with the suitable "Conductor / wire" function definition. During this type of device selection, the data of the particular wire (Color / number, Cross-section / diameter, etc.), are transferred from parts management to the connection. Benefit: When wires are selected from the parts database, the data is applied directly to the diagram. This reduces the amount of manual input and results in standardization of the wires used. Notes: Connection definition points placed on an autoconnecting line via Insert > Connection definition point, show the "Connection, general" function definition by default. To select a different function definition for a connection definition point, in the properties dialog, on the Connection definition point tab, click the [...] button located next to the Function definition field. Then, in the subsequent dialog, select the "Conductor / wire" function definition. When connection definition points have the Cable connection property activated, it is not possible to make a device selection. This is the case, for example, with connection definition points placed on the respective connection lines when drawing a cable definition line. Extensions to parts management Previous versions of EPLAN's parts management have already allowed you to create parts belonging to the "Wires" product group. But for a device selection to be based on these parts, the data for the wires had to be extended. EPLAN NEWS

340 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 This is why the Function templates tab is now also available to the wire parts. The following column headers are available for the "Component (wires)" product group in the Device selection (function templates) table: Row Function definition Color / no. Cross-section / diameter Potential type Intrinsically safe. For device selection to be successful, it is essential to specify a function template for each wire. To do this, click in the relevant cell of the Function definition column and then click [...], to go to the Function definitions dialog. Use General // General special functions // Connection // Connection definition to select the "Conductor / wire" function definition. The Wire data tab has also been redesigned as part of these extensions. As the conductor cross-section and the color are now entered in the function template, the fields of the same name have been removed. To allow even more, specific data to be entered for the wires, the Conductor type, Voltage, Min. bending radius, Copper weight, Cable weight (kg/km), and Short-circuit proof fields / check boxes have been added. 340 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

341 Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 Extensions to device selection The Wire tab has been added to the Settings: Device selection dialog, so that selection criteria for existing function data can also be defined for wires. The following properties can be used as the criteria for wire parts: Color / number Cross-section / diameter Potential type Intrinsically safe. Filtering by potential type works in exactly the same way as for cables. If the Potential type check box is selected as the selection criterion, then device selection does not check the potential type at the connection definition point, but at the associated connection. If the conductors / wires have potential type "PE" or "SH", only parts with the matching potential type (that is, "PE" or "SH") are offered. If a conductor / wire has a different potential type (such as "N"), the device selection Main parts list will also include parts with other potential types (such as "L", "N", etc.). EPLAN NEWS

342 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel The following sections contain further information about the functions of the new "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on. Here is an overview of the topics: Navigators for the 3D mounting layout (see page 342) Creating and opening layout spaces (see page 348) Placing mounting panels and enclosures in the layout space (see page 349) Placing components on mounting surfaces (see page 354) Changing the 3D view of a layout space (see page 359) Editing objects in the layout space (see page 363) Macros for the 3D mounting layout (see page 370) Editing the device logic of 3D objects (see page 374) Inserting and updating model views (see page 378) Creating and editing outlines for extrusions (see page 381) Device structure for mechanical devices (see page 384) Online numbering for mechanical devices (see page 385). Navigators for the 3D Mounting Layout Logical structure in the layout space navigator The layout space navigator maps the logical structure of the placed part. There are hierarchical dependencies between all the items. If a superior item (such as a mounting rail) is moved or deleted, the devices that are placed on it will be moved or deleted as well. This logical structure can also be included in reports. 342 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

343 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel The layout space As well as the logical structure display, there is also a graphical 3D display area that shows the placed device. This display is independent of any project page. The 3D model is displayed in a layout space that allows the 3D objects and their editing to be viewed. It is therefore a basic requirement for working with 3D components that a layout space be first created in the layout space navigator. This is the environment / workspace for the 3D data and the functional logic that connects it. The layout space shows a 3D view of the 3D model with shading (body surfaces filled with color and shaded differently according to the angle). Devices displayed in the layout space navigator The layout space navigator displays all devices that exist in the layout spaces of the opened project. The new Layout space menu option is provided on the menu bar for calling the navigator and creating layout spaces. Simply select Layout space > Navigator to open the layout space navigator. Tree view The layout spaces form the top hierarchical level in the tree. Beneath a layout space, the devices it contains are arranged in hierarchical order: Starting from the mounting panel or the superior enclosure, all devices are displayed beneath the item on which they are placed. You can modify the way the tree is displayed by selecting Popup menu > View and selecting one or more configurations from the menu that appears. The default setting is Item designation in which the item designation is displayed with the grouping sign. The grouping sign is always displayed first, regardless of which view is selected. EPLAN NEWS

344 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel If you have placed a mounting panel in the layout space, for example, the grouping sign "MP<mounting panel number>" is inherited by all the items arranged beneath it and is prefixed before their designation text. This ensures that it is always clear which part placement belongs to which mounting panel or enclosure in the navigator tree. Example: The illustration below shows an open project with multiple layout spaces in the layout space navigator tree (left) and an open layout space in the 3D view (right). In the layout space navigator's tree view, different icons illustrate the types of component and their status: Icon Icon Meaning Shown Hidden Layout space Enclosure Frame profile 344 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

345 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Icon Icon Meaning Not selected List view Selected directly Wall panel Door Mounting panel Mounting rail Wire duct Part placement Restricted placing area Mounting surface This display shows all devices that exist in the layout spaces of the opened project. The view and sorting of the devices depends on the selected column configuration. Popup menu The popup menu for the layout space navigator contains menu options that are used specially to create and display layout spaces (e.g., New layout space, Open layout space, etc.). It also contains other functions for editing in the 3D area, such as Update main elements, Update part dimensions, etc. Project structure in the 3D mounting layout navigator The 3D mounting layout navigator is used to list the devices available in the project so that they can be placed in a layout space. EPLAN NEWS

346 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel To open this new dialog, follow the menu path Project data > Parts / Devices > 3D mounting layout navigator. This has the following options: All devices to which a part is assigned are listed. The view in the 3D mounting layout navigator is always identifierbased. Parts without a device tag are grouped on a separate tree structure level. Devices that have already been placed are identified by an additional icon. Multiple entries may be selected in both the tree view and the list view. These selected devices can then be placed on the mounting panel at the same time. It is also possible to select a node in the tree view. All devices that are affected by this selection are placed together. Filters in the navigators As is normally the case in the other navigators, in the layout space or 3D mounting layout navigator you have the option of limiting the quantity of data displayed by using a filter. To filter by unplaced parts in the 3D mounting layout navigator, the criteria selection dialog includes the new Number of units / quantity (unplaced, 3D) <20509> property. In the criteria selection dialog for this navigator you can otherwise select project properties and / or grouping elements as filter criteria for function definitions (function definition, function group, etc.). Quick input filtering These navigators also have a new field Value: <Property> beneath the filter. You can use quick input in this field to quickly modify the value of a filter criterion for a defined and selected filter. 346 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

347 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel To do this, a new Quick input column has been added to the Filter dialog, which you can open by clicking the [...] button and use to define the filter criteria. The Quick input check box can only be selected for one filter criterion. This then activates the Value: <Property> field for the relevant navigator. For a value entered in the Value: <Property> field to be taken into account, the filter must be activated by selecting the Active check box. Value: <Property>: To enter a new value in this field, click in the field, type in the value, and press [Enter]. The display in the navigator changes accordingly. The value entered here is then accepted as the value of the filter criterion in the filter scheme. Depending on which property you selected as the criterion (e.g., structure identifier), you can click [...] in the Value: <Property> field and select a different value for the filter criterion from the dialog that opens. To enter multiple values in the field, add a semicolon as a separator between the values. This is evaluated as an OR operation. If quick input is not selected for any filter criterion in the Filter dialog, quick input cannot be used in that navigator. The Value: <Property> field is grayed out. EPLAN NEWS

348 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Creating and Opening a Layout Space Creating a layout space Select Layout space > New to create a layout space in an open project. The Properties (components): Layout space dialog opens. If necessary, change the layout space name suggested in the Name field. Click [...] to open the Structure identifier of layout space dialog for editing the structure identifier. Enter a descriptive text in the Description field; this is also displayed in the 3D mounting layout navigator tree view. Click [OK] to close the properties dialog and open the new layout space in the graphical editor. 348 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

349 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Delete layout space You can delete a layout space selected in the layout space navigator by selecting Popup menu > Delete in the navigator dialog. Opening a layout space Select the layout space in the layout space navigator, then select Layout space > Open. The selected layout space is opened for further editing and is displayed in the isometric 3D view to southeast by default. If a layout space was already selected, it is closed and no longer displayed. To open a layout space in another, separate 3D view window, select the Open layout space in new window menu option from the popup menu. Close layout space To close the 3D view of an open layout space, select the associated layout space description in the layout space navigator, then select Layout space > Close. Otherwise the 3D view behaves just like another window in the graphical editor and can be closed by pressing the shortcut key [Ctrl] + [F4]. Placing Mounting Panels and Enclosures Placing mounting panels To place a mounting panel in an open layout space, select the Insert > Mounting panel menu option. The "Mounting panels" product subgroup is displayed directly in the "Mechanics" generic product group in the Part selection dialog that opens. Select a mounting panel part and click [OK]. EPLAN NEWS

350 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Tip: You can also use the Pro Panel toolbar to place mounting panels, enclosures, mounting rails, and wire ducts. Click the (Mounting panel) button, for example, to switch to part selection, where you can select a mounting panel part. The mounting panel hangs on the cursor as a transparent preview. The size is as defined for the part. The four possible handles are marked by gray squares. The current handle is displayed in red at the bottom left. Click the [A] button to change the handle clockwise from the "Bottom left" position to "Top left", "Top right", "Bottom right". Select Popup menu > Placement options to call up the Placement options dialog. This dialog allows you to set the options for the placement of parts in the 3D mounting layout. Left-click to place the mounting panel at the required position. The selected part remains at the cursor and can be placed again. If you want to place the mounting panel in an enclosure or on a second mounting panel, move the mounting panel to the vicinity of a corner point of the second mounting panel or an enclosure profile. A red 3D snap point symbol then appears at the corner point. The mounting panel to be placed snaps in at this point. Click to place it directly at this position. 350 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

351 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Example: In this example, a mounting panel is connected to a mounting panel that is already placed. The red rectangle illustrates the snap point. Placing free mounting panels For quick and easy design and configuration, it is possible to place an individual mounting panel in the layout space without surrounding enclosure profiles and without selecting from parts management. The free mounting panel has the same properties and editing options as the mounting panel associated with a specific part. The device selection allows the mounting panel to be retrospectively assigned a part. When you select the Insert > Free mounting panel menu option, the Properties (components): Mounting panel dialog opens. EPLAN NEWS

352 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel On the Mounting panel tab, enter values for the width, height, and depth of the free mounting panel, or accept the suggested values. The dimensions must not be left blank, otherwise the free mounting panel cannot be placed. Enter a designation text in the Designation field, or accept the suggested "Mounting panel". Click [OK] to close the properties dialog. The free mounting panel then hangs on the cursor in the defined size as a transparent preview and you can place it in the 3D view. In all other respects this placement operation is the same as for placing enclosures and mounting panels from parts management. Placing enclosures with mounting panels The EPLAN parts management contains various predefined series of enclosures; you can select enclosures from them to be placed. Some of these enclosures (e.g., from the TS 8 series) already have a predefined mounting panel and one or two doors. Mechanical components (mounting rails, wire ducts, etc.) and devices may be placed on the mounting panels and on the doors. When Insert > Enclosure is used to place enclosures, the part selection dialog is again opened with a filter set automatically. This ensures that you only see parts from the "Enclosure" product group. When you have selected the required enclosure part, the enclosure hangs on the cursor as a detailed preview with the height, width, and depth defined for the part. The currently selected handle is displayed in red, and is also identified by a red square as a snap point. Click [A] to change the handle. Every time you click the [A] button, the handle changes clockwise from the "Back left" position to "Back right", "Front right", "Front left". 352 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

353 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Example: The illustration below shows how to change the handle for an enclosure. Select Popup menu > Placement options to call up the Placement options dialog. Here you can define an offset between the handle and the cursor position, and enter spacings for arranging multiple enclosures in series. Left-click to place the enclosure at the required position. When you insert it, the enclosure in the layout space navigator automatically receives its grouping sign "S<Enclosure number>", and this identifier is inherited by all individual components of the enclosure and all components placed in it. All enclosure add-on parts placed with the enclosure are grouped logically. When you move an enclosure or an enclosure add-on part, all the components placed on it are moved as well. The selected part can be placed multiple times; it remains on the cursor until you cancel the action. EPLAN NEWS

354 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Tip: You can also use the Options > Placement options menu option or the (Placement options) button from the Pro Panel options toolbar to open the Placement options dialog. Placing Components on Mounting Panels or Mounting Surfaces Once you have added mounting panels or enclosures to your layout space, you can insert various mechanical components, such as mounting rails, wire ducts, etc. These components are normally placed on mounting panels or on the mounting surfaces of enclosure profiles. To place devices correctly on mounting panels, mounting rails, doors, walls, etc., the required mounting surface or item must be identified for placement. The Layout space - <Project name> navigator dialog contains the following options for this: Activate mounting surfaces automatically Suitable for all surfaces and items that are not covered by other components. Activate mounting surfaces directly Suitable for accessing the mounting surfaces of covered components or components that are at the back. This is not possible in the graphical display without hiding the components that are covering other components. The viewpoint is toggled to the front view. All components that are not involved are hidden. 354 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

355 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Activating mounting surfaces / items automatically If you want to activate an item or mounting panel automatically, first select the required component in the layout space navigator's tree view. Select Popup menu > Go to (graphic). The selected item and the components arranged on it are then displayed. Now select a device or a mechanical component for placement (e.g., Insert > Mounting rail). When you have selected the required part, move the cursor over the surface to be activated or over an item placed on it. The surface or item beneath the cursor is highlighted in color. Once you have found the surface or item onto which you want to place the component, hold the cursor still for around 1 second without clicking or keyboard input. The surface or item beneath the cursor changes color. The surface or item has been activated. It is now only possible to move the cursor on the activated surface. Move the cursor to the required position, and left-click once to place a device. When you insert a mechanical component, left-click twice to define the start and end points of this component on the mounting surface. To activate another surface or item, select Popup menu > Go to (graphic) again in the navigator and repeat the operation described above. Activating mounting surfaces directly For direct activation, first select the required mounting surface in the layout space navigator tree, then select Popup menu > Activate directly. The selected mounting surface and the components arranged on it are then displayed in the front view. All other components contained in the layout space are hidden. A grid is displayed on the mounting surface. EPLAN NEWS

356 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel The hidden components and activated mounting surfaces are identified by special icons in the layout space navigator (e.g. hidden mounting panel: ; activated mounting surface: ). Now select a device or a mechanical component for placement (e.g., Insert > Mounting rail). It is now only possible to move on the activated surface. Then place the required device or mechanical component. To activate another mounting surface, select Popup menu > Activate directly again in the navigator. Cancel direct activation To release the directly activated mounting surface once more, select the Popup menu > Cancel direct activation menu option in the navigator. You can now work with automatic activation once more. Placing mounting rails and wire ducts Mounting rails and wire ducts are normally placed on mounting panels or on the mounting surfaces of enclosure profiles. To place them, select a suitable option from the Insert menu (such as Insert > Mounting rail). The correct tree structure level will then appear directly in the opened part selection. When you have selected the part, you will once again be able to change the handle on the component in the preview by pressing [A]. You can also access the placement options from the popup menu when placing these mechanical components. Mounting rails and wire ducts can be inserted in two different ways that differ in terms of the method used to specify the length: Length variable for placement This is done by entering the start and end points; the length is defined by the distance between the two points. The points / length can be defined by left-clicking or by entering the data in the input box. 356 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

357 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Placement with accepted length This is done by accepting the length of an item that has already been placed. To do this, select the part, then select the Adopt length option from the popup menu, and then click another mechanical component that has already been placed. The new component to be placed adopts the length of the component you clicked and hangs on the cursor. It should only move with the cursor in parallel to the item you clicked, and can then be placed by left-clicking, for example. With this method, the component can also be automatically positioned centered between two items that have already been placed. Once you have adopted the length, select Popup menu > Place centered and then left-click a second wire duct or mounting rail. Inserting devices as defined devices As in the EPLAN platform, devices can be inserted as defined devices in the normal way. This can be done as follows in an open layout space: via the Insert > Device menu path via the Popup menu > New device or Popup menu > Place menu paths in the 3D mounting layout navigator using drag & drop from the device list using drag & drop from the navigators (such as the device or part master data navigator). Note: Mechanical devices (enclosures, mounting rails, etc.) are not displayed in the device navigator. For this reason, it is also not possible to create such a device as a defined device via Popup menu > New device in the device navigator. A defined device can only be inserted if either the device-specific dimensions (width, height, depth) or a macro is stored for the selected part. If this is not the case, then an appropriate message is displayed. EPLAN NEWS

358 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel In parts management, the Mounting data tab contains the Width, Height, and Depth fields and the Technical data tab contains the Macro field for updating this data. If the conditions are fulfilled, the defined device hangs on the cursor as a preview, and you can place it on mounting surfaces or mechanical components in the 3D view. The automatic activation or direct activation options help with accurate placement. The defined device's handle can be switched using the [A] key before placement. If the device concerned has already been placed in a layout space within the project, a prompt will appear to this effect. Click [Yes] to place the device again. Defining locked areas Mounting surfaces can be locked for positioning so that no part placement can occur on these areas. This may be necessary if holes are to be subsequently drilled at these points or if the space is needed for devices that are mounted from other sides. This applies to cooling attachments that protrude from above into the enclosure, for example, or to monitors and controls on a door with a larger mounting depth. Locked areas are independent 3D objects drawn as rectangles. Select Insert > Area locked for placing to define a locked area in an open layout space. Move the cursor onto the area to be locked to automatically activate it, or activate a mounting surface directly in the layout space navigator. The automatically or directly activated mounting surface is identified in color. Input is now only possible on this area. Draw the rectangle representing the area locked for placing. Click again to define the locked area. 358 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

359 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Changing the 3D View of the Layout Space EPLAN provides the following ways to change the view of an open layout space: Change zoom section This is done using the View > Window menu or by using the mouse wheel. These familiar functions allow you to enlarge or reduce the layout space displayed in the 3D view or another component displayed separately (mounting panel, mounting rail, etc.). Change viewpoint or viewing angle To do this, the View menu contains the 3D viewpoint and Rotate viewing angle menu options. The 3D viewpoint menu option allows you to set various orthogonal (top, bottom, left, right, front, back) or isometric views (southwest, southeast, northeast, northwest) for your layout space. The content of the layout space display is refreshed according to which view is selected. When you select the Rotate viewing angle menu option, you can change the viewing angle of the graphic by moving the mouse. The content of the layout space is displayed with the selected viewing angle until you select a different viewpoint. Tip: These functions can also be selected using buttons on the 3D viewpoint toolbar. The toolbar is hidden by default. Highlight selection When you click a component in 3D view, this component is identified by a red border. If you move the cursor over a component in 3D view, this component is highlighted by a light border. This also applies when you select a device in the layout space navigator. This makes it easier to identify a component in 3D view. EPLAN NEWS

360 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Show / hide components Components can be shown or hidden either using the respective options from the popup menu in the layout space navigator, or in the 3D view by using the popup menu to specifically hide individually selected components. For more information, see the following sections. Simplify object display To reduce the level of detail displayed on screen for certain placed objects, you can use the Simplified representation option from the layout space navigator's popup menu. For more information, see the section with the same name on page 361. Set colors and / or transparency The colors and transparency level of the mechanical components and devices can as is normally the case in EPLAN be defined once for the entire project using the layer management settings, and then be defined individually using the respective properties dialog. You can also set the colors for the 3D view (e.g., for background colors) in the user-specific settings. For more information, see the section with the same name on page 362. Showing / hiding components from the layout space navigator If you have a layout space open in the layout space navigator, you can select Popup menu > Hide to hide the selected layout space (mounting panel or enclosure) or the components selected in the navigator. Select Popup menu > Show > Selection to show the hidden structure once more. The hidden components are identified by special icons in the navigator to help to distinguish between them (see the section "Devices displayed in the layout space navigator" on page 343). 360 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

361 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel The various submenu options on the Show popup menu option allow you to determine which components contained in the layout space should be displayed: Selection (all items below the selected tree structure level), All, Only mounting panels, or Only doors. Showing / hiding individual components in the 3D view To specifically hide individual components, first select them in the graphic and then select the Hide option from the popup menu. This menu option is not available if you select multiple components. If you want to show the entire 3D model once more, left-click the mounting panel / enclosure in the 3D view and select Popup menu > Show all. Simplifying the object display The Simplified representation function allows you to increase the level of detail of the graphic in the layout space for terminal strips and / or 3D macros. You can define which items are to be simplified in the display using the Apply simplified representation to group box in the Settings: 3D dialog. To access the settings dialog, select Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > 3D. These settings apply to all items already placed and to all subsequently placed items. To simplify the way the placed parts are represented, select Popup menu > Simplified representation in the layout space navigator. 3D macros are then represented by rectangular bodies with the same dimensions as the previously-used items. Terminal strips are combined into a block; the individual terminals are no longer displayed. The labeling for the individual terminals is retained. EPLAN NEWS

362 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Setting colors and / or transparency Layer management allows you to set colors and / or the transparency of mechanical components and devices for the entire project. The "3D graphic" hierarchical level has been added to the tree in the Layer management dialog for this purpose. The drop-down list in the Transparency column allows you to set a different transparency level for the various mechanical components. The transparency can be set in 10% increments. To set the transparency individually for a component, select this component in the layout space navigator or 3D view and select Popup menu > Properties. Then switch to the Format tab in the properties dialog and select a different transparency level from the drop-down list in the Transparency field. Changing the background colors for the 3D view The default colors for the background to the 3D view can be set individually. To set the colors, go to the Settings: 3D dialog (under Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > 3D). Shading - Background 1 / Shading - Background 2: The fields of the Color settings group box are used to define the background colors. Click [...] to open the familiar dialog for selecting a color. If you have selected two different colors, the background will be drawn with a color gradient. The first color determines the starting color in the top of the window, while the second color represents the end color in the bottom of the window. If you have selected two identical colors, the background will be drawn with one single color. Active mounting surface: When activated, an individual mounting surface of a body is identified by a color that is different to the body color. This field allows you to define the color for the active mounting surface. 362 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

363 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Editing Objects in the Layout Space Rotating objects about an axis The Rotate around axis function allows you to rotate one or more objects in the layout space around one of the preselected axes through the centre of the body. It does not matter which viewpoint is selected for the rotation; the object is always rotated centered around the absolute axes. It is not possible to use an edge as an axis of rotation with this function. To rotate one or more objects, select the Edit > Graphic > Rotate around axis > X-axis / Y-axis / Z-axis menu option. The shape of the cursor then indicates which rotation function is active. Select the required objects by opening a frame around them with the mouse, for example. Then enter the angle in the input box. The input box opens, for example, if you enter a number on the keyboard (see section "Input Box for Editors" on page 33). The possible values for the angle may be positive or negative. Press [Enter] to confirm the angle you entered. The selected objects are then rotated. The objects are deselected, but the rotation function remains active and you can select other objects to be rotated. You can use Undo to reverse any individual rotation. EPLAN NEWS

364 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Example: 90 rotation of an object about an axis, and result: Axis Rotation Result X Changing the length of objects in the layout space For mounting rails and wire ducts, the length is defined when they are placed in the layout space. You can also change the length retrospectively in the layout space. You can lengthen or shorten these objects; it is not possible to select multiple objects. To change the length of placed mounting rails and wire ducts, select the Edit > Graphic > Change length menu option. Click the object to be changed on the end at which the change is to take place. A red snap point then appears at the cursor at the selected end. The side of the object that you clicked can be moved in both directions with the cursor. The 3D snap points on the mounting panel are displayed in blue; the snap points of other components appear when the cursor touches them. 364 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

365 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel You can use the following input methods to determine the new length: Change length by mouse click To do this, move the cursor to the point at which you want to lengthen or shorten the object. Click again to set the new end point for the object. Change length by snapping a projection point Move the cursor towards one of the 3D snap points displayed or onto the edge of a mounting panel. The cursor snaps onto the snap point it finds or onto an edge. The red cursor snap point is surrounded by a red square. The object representation is projected as far as the found point, and extended or shortened until it reaches it. Click to align the object at the projection point and display it in the new length. Change length via the input box Depending on the setting, the input box appears immediately when you click the object to be extended or when you enter a number on the keyboard. Enter the value by which the object is to be extended or shortened in the input box. Unsigned values or values with a "+" before them extend the box, while values with a "-" shorten it. Press [Enter] to display the object with the new length. The Change length function remains active until you select Popup menu > Cancel action. EPLAN NEWS

366 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Example: Changing the length by snapping a projection point, and the result: After selection of the mounting rail If you have selected a mounting rail as the element to be extended, the snap point on the cursor is displayed as a red square. Snapping a projection point Move the cursor in the vicinity of a found snap point. The cursor snaps onto the snap point, and the mounting rail display is projected as far as the found projection object. 366 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

367 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Result Click to extend the mounting rail to the found projection point. Measuring distances in the layout space The Measuring function is provided to allow you to check the components mounted on mounting panels and enclosures in the layout space. The distance from points and edges can be measured, and the measurement result is displayed in a dialog. To measure a distance in an open layout space, first select the Layout space > Measuring menu option. Then select the first point required or the first edge of an object by clicking it. When the cursor touches a measurable edge, it is highlighted. If the cursor touches a measurable point, it is displayed as a highlighted square. When you have selected the required second point or second edge by clicking again, the Measuring result dialog opens. The measured points and the end points of measured edges are displayed in the layout space. A connecting line is drawn between the measured points. EPLAN NEWS

368 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel The Measuring result dialog displays the measured coordinates and length values. The following options are available: Elements are on the same mounting surface If the two measured elements are placed on a single mounting surface, the coordinates and distances thus determined are related to the zero point of this mounting surface. Distances in the Y direction (dy) are ignored and set to "0". If the Parallel to mounting surface check box is deselected, the Y distances are also displayed. Elements are not on the same mounting surface If the two elements do not have a common mounting surface, this option is not available for selection. The Parallel to mounting surface check box is grayed out and deselected. In this case, the coordinates and distances thus determined are output in relation to the zero point of the layout space. If you click the [Re-measure] button, the measuring results are discarded and you can start another measurement. Example: Measuring points and edges: Selection Measure point (1) / edge (2) Result 368 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

369 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Displaying mounting clearances Parts management can be used to define a mounting clearance in terms of width, height, and depth on the Mounting data tab in the part properties. This mounting clearance ensures that the permitted thermal stress on parts placed beside or on top of one another is not exceeded. During placement, the defined mounting clearances of parts already placed can be shown for checking purposes. To do this, select the View > Mounting clearances menu option. A transparent body is displayed around the part placements that have a defined mounting clearance. When you insert devices, you can also relate the handle of the part underneath to the defined mounting clearance. The With regard to mounting clearance check box is included in the placement options for this purpose. Example: Mounting clearances for multiple part placements are displayed in a section of a mounting panel. Selection The Mounting clearances menu option is activated Result EPLAN NEWS

370 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Macros for the 3D Mounting Layout The macro technology in the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on is largely oriented towards the normal way of working in the EPLAN platform. The following applies to 3D macros: 3D macros are managed in a macro project. 3D macros can be created and used as window (*.ema) and / or symbol macros (*.ems). 3D macros are always created with the "3D mounting layout" representation type. Both creating and inserting with this representation type is only possible in a layout space. The 3D macros can be assigned to the parts in parts management. As a result, the part is displayed in detail and very realistically. If there is no graphic macro for the part, the graphic is implemented as a cuboid by entering the height, width, and depth. If a 3D macro is assigned to an enclosure, then the graphic of the enclosure is not generated automatically during placement; in this case the content of the graphic macro defines the graphic. Importing a 3D graphic You can import 3D graphic data from external CAD systems to create your own items and 3D macros. The graphic data must be provided in the common international STEP format (STandard for the Exchange of Product Model Data). To do this, open the project into which the data is to be imported and select Layout space > Import 3D graphic. In the selection dialog that opens, switch to the directory containing the STEP files (*.stp, *.step, *.ste). Select the required STEP file and click [Open]. The 3D graphic data is then imported into a new layout space. The name of the STEP file is used as the layout space description. 370 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

371 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel After being imported, the graphic data can be edited (Rotate around axis and Unite functions) and assigned functional logic. The imported data can then be used as enclosure items, devices, or 3D macros. Uniting objects in the layout space An imported 3D graphic or an open 3D macro (thus a layout space in a macro project) may contain multiple individual bodies. The Unite function is provided to allow you to unite all the components of the layout space such that, when it is used, a 3D macro is handled in the same way as a single item. To unite individual 3D objects in an open layout space, select the Edit > Graphic > Unite menu option. Use the mouse to drag the frame around the desired objects. All the objects within this frame are selected. Move the cursor over the selected objects and click the snap point intended to represent the insertion point of the united item. The selected insertion point is stored in a new object. If you generate a 3D macro from this object and subsequently insert this macro, then this is the point to which the cursor is moved during insertion. Note: United components can only be undone immediately after the action. United items cannot be separated again later (e.g. after insertion as a macro). Managing 3D macros in the macro project You should create a separate layout space for every macro in order to manage 3D macros in a macro project. No macro boxes are used for this. You should therefore define the data for a macro to be generated using the following layout space properties: Macro: Name <11018>: Enter the file name and file type (*.ema or *.ems) of the macro. EPLAN NEWS

372 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Macro: Description <11019>: The text entered here becomes the description text of the generated macro and is displayed in a comments field when the macro is inserted. Macro: Version <11025>: This property is used for version control of your macros. Macro source / reference <11026>: Here you should enter the source from which the macro originates. Macro: Variant <36019>: Use the drop-down list to define the variant for the macro to be generated. These properties are available for a layout space in the "Macro" Category in the Properties table. If the properties are not displayed, you will have to select them first from property selection. When 3D macros are generated automatically from the macro project, this data is used to generate a macro from every selected layout space. If you would like to view each 3D macro on a page to improve the organization and clarity of your macro projects, you can place a model view on the required page. Popup menu > Open 3D view allows you to jump from the view into the respective layout space. Creating 3D macros 3D macros are always created with the "3D mounting layout" representation type. You have the following options for creating 3D macros: Manually by saving selected objects To save specific objects in a layout space as a macro, use the Edit > Create window macro and Edit > Create symbol macro menu options as you would normally do in the EPLAN platform. If the selected objects are imported 3D graphics from STEP files, it may be necessary to prepare these graphics further (unite, create device logic, etc.) before you can save them as 3D macros. 372 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

373 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Automatically from a macro project Select Utilities > Generate macros > Automatically from macro project. A 3D macro is generated from the layout spaces of a macro project, according to the selection you made. Automatically from imported STEP files Utilities > Generate macros now contains a new From 3D files menu option for this purpose. 3D window macros (STEP) are generated directly from individual or multiple *.ema files. Inserting 3D macros The 3D macros are inserted using the Insert > Window macro and Insert > Symbol macro menu options as you would normally do in the EPLAN platform. You can only place these macros in an open layout space with the "3D mounting layout" representation type. When you insert a 3D macro, the currently selected handle is identified as a snap point by a red square. Press [A] to change the handle. Move the 3D macro towards a mounting panel or another object. As when you place devices, the mounting surface or mounting rail beneath the cursor is automatically activated. 3D snap points are also displayed. Click at the required position to place the 3D macro. Changing the rotation angle when inserting 3D macros When you insert a 3D macro, you can rotate the angle of the macro in 90 increments at the handle. Up to 40 different mounting positions can be implemented with a single 3D macro by changing the handles. These options also apply to devices whose parts have been assigned a 3D macro. To change the angle during insertion, press the [Ctrl] + [Shift] + [R] keyboard shortcut. The position of the 3D macro is rotated by 90 counterclockwise. Every time this keyboard shortcut is used, the macro is rotated by a further 90. EPLAN NEWS

374 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Tip: You can also use the Options > Change rotation angle menu option or the (Change rotation angle) button from the Pro Panel options toolbar to change the angle. Editing the Device Logic 3D objects that are to be used as mechanical or electromechanical devices in the 3D mounting layout must have a range of properties that allow them to be used in the mounting layout: The objects can be placed in the layout space and on other objects. Other objects can be placed on the 3D objects. The placed objects fit in with the logical structure of the items. All these properties in their entirety are known as the device logic. There are various functions for creating and editing the device logic (see section "Defining the device logic" on page 375). Interactive points, lines, and areas in the device logic The functions for defining the device logic work with interactive points, lines, and areas. If necessary you can attach additional user-defined points to 3D objects that were imported as STEP files. These interactive points allow you to modify the placing options for components or influence the levels of freedom associated with rotation and alignment of the components with respect to one another. Interactive points always consist of two corresponding parts: Handles: Interactive points of this type look for associated mounting points. They define points or areas which can only be moved and placed on the corresponding mounting points. 374 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

375 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Mounting points: These interactive points only allow the associated handle to be snapped onto them, to be moved, and to be placed. Mounting points may be points, lines, or areas. You can display defined interactive points when you are editing 3D macros in a macro project. There the points are identified with the following colors: Interactive points Handle (user-defined) Handle (default) Mounting point (user-defined) Mounting point (default) Display Orange cuboid Red cuboid Green cuboid Blue cuboid You can define mounting points when you edit the device logic. This involves defining points, lines, or areas on 3D objects as mounting points. These are the objects on which other components can be placed. Mounting points can have a direction and a rotation, which means that placement of the 3D objects can be controlled using a set of rules: The direction determines the direction in which the object to be placed on the mounting point should be aligned. The rotation also allows the object to be placed to be moved around the selected direction axis. Defining the device logic Once you have imported a logic-free 3D graphic, you may want to edit it further. This is when you use the various functions for editing the device logic. To ensure correct placement it is necessary as a minimum to define a placement area; the other logic functions are optional. EPLAN NEWS

376 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel The Edit > Device logic menu path offers the following options for defining the device logic. Mounting surface Defines individual areas of bodies imported as 3D data as mounting surfaces. These are areas on the item on which other components can be placed. When you click the required area, this area is defined as a mounting surface. A mounting surface entry is generated beneath the object concerned (e.g., logic item) in the layout space navigator. You can continue to select areas as mounting surfaces until you press [Esc] to cancel the action. You can delete mounting surfaces in the navigator using Popup menu > Delete. Handle Defines a handle for placing a 3D macro. There is always only one handle in the macro. Click the required point. The handle is identified by an orange cuboid. To change the position of the handle, simply insert it again. Define mounting point Defines points, lines, or areas on 3D objects as mounting points. Other components may be placed on these interactive points. To do this, click a highlighted point / edge / area on the 3D object. For mounting points of the type "Point" and "Line", then select the direction in which you would prefer the mounting point to act by moving a blue direction arrow in the required direction. Click again to open the Properties: Mounting point dialog. Here you can enter the Name and Description and set the Direction and Rotation for mounting points of the type "Point" and "Line". Once you have selected a mounting point, you can remove it using Edit > Delete, for example. 376 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

377 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Placement area > Define Defines an area in the 3D object that is used to place the object correctly on other 3D objects. The position of the placement area also determines the mounting depth to which the 3D object is positioned on a mounting surface. Nine handles are then automatically generated on the placement surface. You can use these for positioning. When you have found the required area, simply click it. Any area that projects beyond the limits of the selected area will appear transparent. Handles are generated at the corners and centers of the outer edges. Example: The illustration shows a 3D macro with a placement area beneath the base plate. The handles are at the corners and centers of the edges. Placement area > Turn around / Move / Rotate You can use these menu options to further correct the position of the placement area. If the placement area is incorrectly aligned, for example, you can turn it around using Turn around. To move or rotate the placement area, enter the relevant values directly in the input box. EPLAN NEWS

378 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Model Views for the 3D Mounting Layout The model views allow you to place standardized, three-dimensional displays of a layout space or important components thereof on a project page. Model views are used to create documentation and production documents. Additional information for the 3D mounting layout can be drawn on the model views using standard functions such as dimensioning, texts, graphics, etc. A model view can be inserted in any page type. Multiple model views are also possible on each page. Updating allows the content of the model views to be adapted to modifications in the layout space (see page 380). Example: The illustration below shows the model view of a mounting panel that was placed on the title page of a project. 378 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

379 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel So that you do not have to reset the model views in every new project, you have the option of saving the items to be displayed in a selection scheme. In this way you can use a scheme to specify that all mounting panels should always be displayed in the model views, for example. The item labeling in a model view can also be summarized using a scheme. Inserting a model view To place a model view on an open project page, select the Insert > Graphic > Model view (Pro Panel) menu option. Then place the corners of the model view by outlining an area. The Model view dialog opens. Create the data specific to the model view on the View tab of this dialog. For example, enter a unique name for the model view in the View name field. You cannot have multiple views with the same name. A model view can always be created for only one layout space. Select the layout space for which you want to create the model view from the Layout space drop-down list. Define what is to be displayed in the model view in the Basic items field. You can also further restrict the content of the layout space that is displayed. Click [...] to open the 3D object selection dialog and select the objects to be displayed in the model view. Determine how the model view is to be displayed from the Style dropdown list. The following styles are available for selection: Wire frame model: The selected items are displayed in the model view without calculation of the hidden lines. It is thus possible to view even the hidden items in the enclosure. Hidden lines: The selected items are displayed in the model view after calculation of the hidden lines. Shading: With this style, a bitmap of the required items is generated in the set view. EPLAN NEWS

380 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel You can also use other settings (Selection scheme, Viewpoint, etc.) to determine what and how it can be seen in the model view. Click [OK] to confirm the settings you made on this and other tabs (Display, Rectangle, Format). The model view is then generated. Updating the model view If the content of the layout space referenced by the model view is changed, the Model view not up to date message appears over the top of the model view when the page is opened. The model view must be updated to match the contents of the layout space and model view. To do this, select Utilities > Reports > Model view. A tree view of all the model views that exist in the project is displayed on the left-hand side of the Model views - <Project name> dialog that opens. Your selection from the tree will determine whether all the model views in the project, all the model views in a specific layout space, or only specific model views are updated. Click [Update] to run the update. The display in the selected model views is matched to the current status in the layout space. Tip: You can also update a model view by selecting the associated page in the page navigator and selecting Utilities > Reports > Update. This menu option will update the pages selected in the page navigator that have model views and / or reports. Similarly Utilities > Reports > Generate project reports will update all the model views and reports for a project. 380 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

381 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Modifying the contents of the model view Two other functions allow you to modify the position of the graphic of a model view in the graphical editor. The Move contents function, which is available in the popup menu for an inserted model view, allows you to move the graphic of the model view to a new position. If you want the graphic to be displayed in the center of the model view once more, then mark it in the graphical editor and select Popup menu > Center contents. A graphic that is no longer centered may occur because the display in the model view was changed by changing the frame size or using the Update function. Outline Editor for Extrusions The "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on provides another editor that you can use to draw and edit geometrical outlines or contour lines for bodies. The "outline editor for extrusions" is used to manage 2D outlines that can later be used to model a 3D object by extrusion. The outline drawings created for customized mounting rails etc., can include multiple outlines that do not intersect. The outline editor is opened via Utilities > Master data > Outline (extrusion), in the same way as plot frames and forms. The functions and submenu options (New, Open, Close, and Copy) of the outline editor are also the same as those of the plot frame and form editors. The outlines are managed in a special directory. A new Outlines field has been added to the Settings: Directories dialog (under Options > Settings > User > Management > Directories). Here you can define the default directory for storing the outlines in EPLAN. EPLAN NEWS

382 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Creating outlines To create a new outline for extrusions, select Utilities > Master data > Outline (extrusion) > New. In the Create outline dialog that opens, define the file name and directory for the new outline. The "outline extrusion" outline type is saved with the file extension *.fc2. Click [Save] and the Outline properties - <Outline name> dialog opens. In this dialog you specify the most important properties of an outline. Click [OK]. The new outline is saved according to your input and is displayed in the outline editor. The origin of the coordinate system is highlighted by a red circle. This can be moved. In the page navigator tree view, an open outline is identified by the icon. The properties of an open outline can be edited retrospectively by selecting the outline in the page navigator and selecting Popup menu > Properties. Editing outlines When you create a new outline, the first editing step is to draw the 2D geometry. To do this, select from the graphical elements listed under Insert > Graphic and the editing functions listed under the Edit menu option. The following conditions apply: Draw on a 1:1 scale. Use the line, polyline, rectangle, circle, and arc graphical elements. Make sure that the elements making up the outline are closed at all the transition points. 382 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

383 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Opening outlines It is also possible to apply the editing steps listed above to existing outlines. To open an outline, select Utilities > Master data > Outline (extrusion) > Open. The master data for the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on includes a number of outlines of the "outline extrusion" type. You can use this master data as templates for your own outlines. To be able to use a finished outline in the 3D mounting layout, save it with a suitable part in the parts management dialog (e.g., from the "Mounting rail" product subgroup). This is done in the Macro field on the Technical data tab. Importing and cleaning up outlines The outline editor for extrusions also allows you to import outlines that were created with other programs. The DXF and DWG file formats are supported. Before importing, first create a new, empty outline with the required outline properties. Then import using Insert > Graphic > DXF / DWG. Select a DXF / DWG file and make any settings needed for the import in the next dialogs, then use the mouse to position the graphic on the current outline. After importing, you will have to "clean up" the outline manually. This action removes all unwanted elements from the outline. These include ellipses, splines, and 3D elements. Blocks are automatically broken up. To do this, select Utilities > Clean up. Elements reported as "unacceptable" are removed and the blocks are broken up. Finally, confirm the prompt in the Clean up dialog by clicking [OK]. EPLAN NEWS

384 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Checking outlines The Utilities menu contains the Check outline option for checking an outline at any time during editing. This carries out the following geometry checks: Use of illegal elements Existence of at least one closed outline All existing outlines are closed and do not contain any duplicate elements No nested inner outlines. When the outline check is complete, a message appears to tell you whether the check was successful or not. When you have finished editing an outline, the outline check is carried out automatically when you close the dialog. If the outline check is unsuccessful, you cannot use the associated outline for extrusions in the 3D mounting layout. If this is the case, you should correct the outline. Device Structure for Mechanical Devices The project structure of the EPLAN platform has been extended to allow you to define your own identification structure for the mechanical devices in your projects. Benefit: You can assign a separate identification structure for mechanical devices. To do this, use the new Mechanical devices drop-down list on the Structure tab in the Project properties dialog. This drop-down list shows all user-defined and pre-defined identifier schemes for mechanical devices. Click [...] to open the Device structure dialog, where you can create, edit, and manage schemes. If there is a change of standard, the Structure tab now also has a Mechanical devices drop-down list. 384 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

385 Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel Online Numbering for Mechanical Devices The mechanical devices are included in the online numbering, just like other devices. When you insert mechanical devices into a project, EPLAN can number them automatically and assign a suitable device tag. The numbering formats for online numbering have been extended accordingly to allow unique identification / numbering of the mechanical devices. To this end, the Numbering formats dialog now contains a new General mechanical devices field on the DT tab. There is already a default DT format in this field. If the check box beside the field is deselected, the mechanical devices are not automatically numbered on insertion. You can also specify for mechanical devices that the preceding sign should be automatically set in the visible DT on insertion. A new General mechanical devices check box has been added to the Set preceding sign group box in the Settings: DT dialog for this purpose. If this check box is selected (under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > DT), the displayed DT will be displayed with the preceding sign for mechanical devices, e.g., -U1. The identifiers stored in the master data are used for online numbering in relation to the current identifier set (see section "Master Data: Identifiers" on page 437). EPLAN NEWS

386 Special Topics EPLAN PPE Special Topics EPLAN PPE Compressing and Reorganizing Projects The EPLAN platform functionality is now used for compressing and reorganizing EPLAN PPE projects. For this purpose, the Clean up project menu item in the PPE submenu has been removed and replaced by the EPLAN platform compression function. A possible menu path here is: Project > Organize > Compress. The [Compress project] button that you used to reorganize your EPLAN PPE projects in the past has also been removed. If you want to reorganize a PPE project in the new version, one way to do so is by selecting Project > Organize > Reorganize. Redesigned Import of Loops and Consumers In EPLAN PPE, the functionality for the import of loops and consumers has been extensively enhanced, and the import user interface has been adjusted to suit the EPLAN platform. You can now import PCT loop functions, hook-ups, and references to macros into your PPE project from an external data source. Benefit: The redesign makes importing from other data sources easier and more intuitive. The import of large amounts of project data (e.g. from the preplanning stage) to other engineering systems allows for seamless transition to EPLAN PPE. 386 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

387 Special Topics EPLAN PPE The import function has been made more user-friendly as a whole. This function can be accessed via Project > PPE > Import > Loops or Consumers. Type of data source: After you have selected the type of data source in this field, it is no longer necessary to set up an ODBC source (e.g. for frequently used applications, such as Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel) using the ODBC administrator. The option to select an ODBC data source is still available for the "ODBC" type. EPLAN NEWS

388 Special Topics EPLAN PPE Data source: For the Data source field, click [...] and select the data source in the dialog that opens. The dialog that opens depends on the data source type selected. To output the column names from a data table (e.g. Excel table) to the External field column of the assignment table, select the Column names in the header row check box. This check box is not available for all types of data source. When you have selected the data source, the data source table fields are read in and displayed in the External field column. Scheme: All import settings (field assignments and object assignments) can now be saved in a scheme in the usual way in EPLAN. Assignment tab On this tab, the external fields and the EPLAN properties are assigned to each other. To assign a property, click in the EPLAN property column and then on [...], and select a property from the dialog that opens. Define which are identifying properties during assignment by selecting the relevant check box in the Identifying column. Filters are now defined on the Assignment tab via the Filter column. If only one value is entered here, it is filtered for uniformity. You could also enter "> 100". Tip: If the external field designations and the EPLAN property designations are identical, field assignment can be carried out automatically using the [Automatic assignment] button. 388 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

389 Special Topics EPLAN PPE Assignment tab On this tab, you can specify other import settings. At the time of the previous import, the Order and PI code drop-down lists and the Override errors, Overwrite, Test import, and No new loops / consumers check boxes were part of the Import settings dialog that followed. Including Parts from EPLAN PPE for Bills of Materials Parts that have been scheduled via specifications / hook-ups in EPLAN PPE can now be included in the EPLAN platform "Parts list" and "Summarized parts list" reports as well as in the bill of materials export. Benefit: This allows you to create a complete bill of materials for a project. Parts from the preliminary and basic planning stages can be added to the bill of materials in EPLAN PPE, giving you an overview of the required items and project components even in the early stages of a project. This allows you to monitor components with longer delivery times or technically demanding specifications, and continuously manage all project data throughout the term of the project. For this purpose, the two EPLAN platform settings dialogs Settings: Parts and Settings: Labeling were extended in the Include parts group box by the Specifications (EPLAN PPE) and Hook-ups (EPLAN PPE) check boxes. When these check boxes are selected, the parts from EPLAN PPE are attached to the lists to be output. For these parts, the device tags are empty. If the check boxes are deselected, the part from EPLAN PPE is not included. EPLAN NEWS

390 Special Topics EPLAN PPE Note: Objects whose parts have already been included using engineering in the EPLAN platform are ignored in EPLAN PPE to prevent parts from being output more than once. New Identifier for Measurands without Supplementary Letters EPLAN PPE projects now have the new identifier "m". This identifier stands for the measurand of the PCT loop without supplementary letters. This is used to display and report the measurand without supplementary letters for the power station identifier system (KKS). Labeling and Scripts for EPLAN PPE P&ID The two utilities Labeling and Scripts are now available with the relevant functions for EPLAN PPE P&ID. Benefit: Using the Labeling utility, you can now export item data for labeling based on the plant overviews created with the EPLAN PPE P&ID add-on and transfer information easily and quickly to downstream engineering processes. You can automate recurrent tasks by creating scripts. Time-consuming, manual work processes are avoided. 390 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

391 Special Topics EPLAN View Special Topics EPLAN View User Settings for Multi-user Operation The settings for User code / address are now also available in EPLAN View. This dialog, which is accessed via Options > Settings > User > Display > User code / address, is used to save user data for multi-user operation. Benefit: If an EPLAN View user has opened a project and this results in a conflict in multi-user operation, the other users in the net will now immediately see who has locked the project. Note: As rights management is not used in EPLAN View, the Logon name field in the Settings: User code / address dialog remains empty. EPLAN NEWS

392 New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on Note: The "API Extension" add-on is available as an option for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional, for EPLAN Fluid, and for EPLAN PPE. A unified, and especially high-performance, programming interface (API, Application Programming Interface) is available for EPLAN platform products. This add-on the EPLAN API allows you to develop your own customized solutions in collaboration with EPLAN or other partners. The sections below describe the new features in the EPLAN API: Direct access to parts management data Access to function templates (see page 394) All revision control functions are available (see page 395) Other new features in the EPLAN API (see page 396). Direct Access to Parts Management Data The latest version of the EPLAN API provides direct access to EPLAN parts management data. For this purpose, the EPLAN API has been extensively enhanced. Benefit: Direct access to parts management data in the EPLAN API allows for communication with external ERP systems. Parts can be created, edited, or deleted in the ERP system and synchronized with a central EPLAN parts database to which all users have access. This allows you to seamlessly integrate EPLAN into your individual system landscape and open up all potentials for efficiency improvements throughout the engineering process. 392 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

393 New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on Depending on the add-on, there is a new API DLL (Eplan.EplApi.MasterData.dll) and a new namespace with the same designation. Numerous new classes have been created in this namespace that usually start with MD (for MasterData). The new classes enable use of the following and other functions: Generate new database To generate a new database for parts management, use the CreateDatabase method from the MDPartsManagement class. Read all parts from the parts database All parts that are in a parts database can be read using the Parts property from the MDPartsDatabase class. The part is then sorted by its part number. In the EPLAN API, each part variant displays its own object. For example, if a part occurs in three variants, then it will have three objects of the class MDPart in the EPLAN API. Read filtered parts from the parts database To read filtered parts use the GetsParts(filter) method in the MDPartsDatabase class. This filtering option corresponds to the fieldbased filter in parts management. Define any part property The Properties property from the MDPart class is used to define parts management properties. There is a common properties list MDPartsDatabaseItemPropertyList for the different data from parts management (part, construction, connection points, customer or manufacturer / supplier). Create and remove parts The AddPart and RemovePart methods in the MDPartsDatabase class are available to you for this purpose. Analog methods (AddCustomer, RemoveCustomer, etc.) are available to create and remove customers, manufacturers / suppliers, etc. EPLAN NEWS

394 New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on Copy and paste parts The Duplicate method from the MDPart class is used to copy parts. There is the option to create a new part as a variant or as a new part with its own part number. Querying selected parts The SelectedPartDatabaseItems property from the MDPartsManagement class can be used to determine the part that a user has selected in parts management or in the part master data navigator. Note: An object from the MDPart class stands for a part from the parts database. An EPLAN API object from this class is not related in any way to parts stored in the project (API object: Article). Only the property names are for common use. The enhanced functionality means that the following data can now be processed in the EPLAN CPM program variant via the EPLAN API: Function templates Data on customers and manufacturers Construction and connection point data. Access to Function Templates The new version of the EPLAN API now allows you to access function templates. Benefit: If you create a device using the EPLAN API, you can now also place auxiliary functions or edit them as unplaced functions. 394 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

395 New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on The PlaceAt method from the Function class can be used to place function templates and functions on schematic pages in a particular representation type. The new FunctionTemplates property from the same class allows you to query the function templates of a main function. The PlaceAsConnectionDefinitionPoint method from the Connection class now allows you to place function templates for connections as a connection definition point in the schematic. All Revision Control Functions are Available In the new version, all revision control functions can now be accessed via the EPLAN API. Benefit: You can now control the entire revision process using the EPLAN API. You are using the enormous rationalization potential of the EPLAN API by standardizing and consistently automating your engineering processes. For this purpose, the following methods have been added to the Revision class: CompletePages: Saves the revision modifications of the selected pages in the current revision project. CompleteProject: Saves the revision modifications in a project. CreateRevision: Generates a new revision of the source project. GetUncompletedPages: Provides a list of unchanged and uncompleted pages in the current revision project. RemoveWriteProtection: Removes the write protection from a revision project. EPLAN NEWS

396 New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on Other New Features in the EPLAN API New methods for placeholder objects It is no longer the case that only a graphical character is used for placeholder objects; now an appropriate symbol is also used (see section "Properties dialog and new symbol for placeholder objects" on page 240). Because of this new feature, the new SymbolVariant property has been added to the Eplan.EplApi.DataModel.Graphics.PlaceHolder object which means that the symbol can be changed. Transferring objects to an action Using the two new GetContextParameter and SetContextParameter methods from the ActionCallingContext class, you can now transfer any object to an action. Opening part selection The new ShowPartSelectionDialog method can now be found in the EplApplication class. This method is used to open the Part selection dialog. To preselect a part, the part number (parameter: strpartnr) and the variant number (parameter: strvariant) are transferred. Creating a progress bar for your own offline program Users of the EPLAN API can now create a progress bar for their own offline programs. A new IEplProgress interface is available for this purpose. Launching the API offline program There is a new launch dll in the EPLAN API that is used to search for and load all EPLAN API DLLs. The EPLAN version must be specified before calling the Eplan.EplApi.Starter.dll. All API dlls from the BIN directory are then loaded using the AssemblyResolver class. Converting components into graphic The new Group SymbolReference.ConvertToGroup method allows you to convert components into objects in the EPLAN API. 396 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

397 New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on Adding user-defined property arrangements The EPLAN API allows you to save or add user-specific property arrangements for symbols under a specific name. The new Add method has been added to the SymbolReference::PropertyPlacementsSchemasConfiguration class for this purpose. Switching project options to transparent In the EPLAN API, you can now set deactivated project options to transparent. The new IsTransparent property has been added to the Option class for this purpose. Moving elements into the foreground / background The new BringToFront and SendToBack methods are now available in the Placement class of the EPLAN API. These are used to move placed elements into the foreground / background. Developing new interactions using the EPLAN API You can now use the EPLAN API to develop your own graphical interactions for the graphical editor. These interactions can be used to draw new graphical elements. For this purpose, the new Interaction class has been added to the Eplan.EplApi.EServices.Ged namespace. Specifically locking individual objects You can now use the EPLAN API not only to lock objects for the entire project, but also to lock individual objects for multi-user operation. The following methods are available for this: LockDevice: This method from the Function class locks all objects associated with a device. LockObject: This method from the StorableObjekt class locks the current object. EPLAN NEWS

398 New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on SmartLock: This method from the StorableObjekt class (and classes derived from it) locks the current object and the associated objects (for a placed object the entire page may be locked, for example). Deleting all message management messages The new Clear method in the PrjMessagesCollection class allows you to delete all message management messages. Updating parts database The new UpgradePartsDb method in the PartsService class can now be used to update parts databases of an older EPLAN version to the latest version using the EPLAN API. Note: If you work with several EPLAN versions then we recommend using the latest EPLAN version when editing and managing the parts database. Determining window macro variants The EPLAN API now allows you to determine all variants of a specific representation type for a window macro. The new GetVariants method in the WindowMacro class is available for this. Enabling / disabling actions The new IEplActionEnable interface is used to enable or disable actions. If this interface is not used, then the relevant action is enabled by default. If you implement this interface for an action class, you can then disable the respective action. If you implement the action for a menu item or a symbol button, this interface element will accordingly be disabled (and grayed out). Retrieving information on project-specific settings The ProjectSettingNode class in the EPLAN API can now be used to retrieve information on project setting nodes. 398 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

399 New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on Retrieving a trade function definition The MainGroup property has been added to the FunctionDefinition class in the EPLAN API. This property allows you to retrieve the name of the trade (e.g. Electrical engineering) in which a function definition has been classified. Retrieving window macro insertion points The new Location property in the WindowMacro class allows you to retrieve the position of the window macro insertion point. Tracking potentials and signals The new TrackPotential method can now be found in the ConnectionService class. This method allows you to use the EPLAN API to determine all connections that belong to the same potential. Accordingly, you can use the new TrackSignal method to determine all connections that transmit the same signal. Name of menu item as multilingual string The AddMenuItem method in the EPLAN API Menu class has been enhanced. This allows you to add the name of a menu item as a multilingual string. The menu item will then be displayed in the specified dialog language. Deleting all pages in a project The new RemoveAllPages method in the Project class allows you to delete all pages in a project in one go. Retrieving all page macro placeholder objects You can now use the PlaceHolders property in the PageMacro class to retrieve all page macro placeholder objects. EPLAN NEWS

400 New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on Multilingual project properties The type of the PROJ_TYPE (Project: Type <10031>), PROJ_PARTFEATURES (Part features <10033>) and PROJ_REGULATION (Regulation <10036>) project properties has been changed. These properties can now be created as multilingual character strings. Retrieving file names when exporting image files There is now the option in the EPLAN API to retrieve the names of the created files when exporting the entire project or individual pages in image file format. Two new methods GraphicProjectEx and GraphicPageEx in the Export class are provided for this. Retrieving filtered project data In the EPLAN API DMObjectsFinder class, there are now several new methods (Get<ProjectData>WithFilterScheme) available for the retrieval of filtered project data. These methods, such as GetFunctionsWithFilterScheme, return the filtered objects that are left over when using a filter scheme for the respective navigator (device navigator for the method described above). Exporting filtered bill of materials The new ExportPartsListWithFilterScheme method in the PartsService class allows you to export all filtered project parts data for the bill of materials navigator. 400 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

401 New Features in the Master Data New Features in the Master Data Enhanced Information in the Master Data Editor For the new version, the information displayed when editing master data has been enhanced and the structure improved. When you create, open, or copy a master data type (symbol library, plot frame, outline, or form), the following properties for a selected file are listed in the info area in the right-hand side of the dialog: for symbol libraries: Symbol library description, creation date, created by, company code, last editor, modification date, number of symbols. for plot frames: Description, company code, created by, creation date, last editor, modification date. for outlines: Description, outline type, company code, created by, creation date, last editor, modification date. for forms: Description, company code, created by, creation date, last editor, modification date, form handling. The designation of the property is shown first and this is then separated from the value by a colon (e.g. Created by: ROE). If the text for a property is too long, an automatic line break is inserted in the info area. EPLAN NEWS

402 New Features in the Master Data Example: In the Open form dialog, you have selected the F01_001.f01 form for the "Parts list" form type. The text that appears in the info area looks like this Description: Parts list..., Created by: mka, Creation date: , etc. Master Data: Symbols Note: The following pages show numerous illustrations of new symbols from different symbol libraries. The illustrations show variant "A" of the respective symbols in multi-line representation (except the symbols from the SPECIAL symbol library). The name and number of the symbol are shown underneath the symbol. IEC, GOST, and GB standards The following new symbols have been added to the IEC_symbol, IEC_single_symbol, GOST_symbol, GOST_single_symbol, GB_symbol, and GB_single_symbol symbol libraries (the respective symbols are shown in multi-line representation): PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX // 330 _LEFT // 331 _LEFT_PLUG // 332 _PLUG // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

403 New Features in the Master Data PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX _LEFT_PLUG_1 _PLUG_1 _LEFT_PLUG_M _LEFT_PLUG_FEM // 334 // 335 // 336 // 337 PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX QL3_7 K_3 _PLUG_M // 338 _PLUG_FEM // 339 // 1198 // 1251 K_4 // 1252 KS3 // 1253 KS4 // 1254 KST3 // 1255 KST4 // 1256 S_EL // 1261 O_EL // 1262 XU2 // 1265 XU2S // 1266 F_SNH_1P // 1281 F_SNH_3P // 1282 F_AB_1P // 1284 QLIM11_1 // 1286 QL3_8 // 1290 W3_SWR_2 // 1291 W3_SWL_2 // 1292 EPLAN NEWS

404 New Features in the Master Data W3_SWB_2 // 1293 W3_VES_2 // 1294 W3_NES_2 // 1295 W2_OU_1 // 1328 BW3P // 1372 BW3SW // 1373 BW3D // 1374 X1_NB // 1410 X1_B // 1411 X2_NB // 1413 X2_B // 1414 X2_B_2 // 1415 X3_NB // 1417 X3_B // 1418 X3_B_2 // 1419 X4_NB // 1421 X4_B // 1422 X4_NB_1 // 1424 X4_B_1 // 1425 X4_B_2 // 1426 X6_NB // 1428 X6_B // 1429 X6_NB_1 // 1430 X6_B_1 // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

405 New Features in the Master Data X6_B_2 // 1432 X8_NB // 1434 X8_B // 1435 X8_NB_1 // 1436 X8_B_1 // 1437 X8_B_2 // 1438 SSNS1_ST // 1440 SONS1_ST // 1441 SLS_ST // 1442 SLSAC_ST // 1443 SLSDC_ST // 1444 SLEDC_ST // 1445 SLEAC_ST // 1446 SSUS_ST // 1447 SOUS_ST // 1448 NFPA standard The following new symbols have been added to the NFPA_symbol and NFPA_single_symbol symbol libraries (the respective symbols are shown in multi-line representation): PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX // 330 _LEFT // 331 _LEFT_PLUG // 332 _PLUG // 333 EPLAN NEWS

406 New Features in the Master Data PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX _LEFT_PLUG_1 _PLUG_1 _LEFT_PLUG_M _LEFT_PLUG_FEM // 334 // 335 // 336 // 337 PLC_S_CBOX PLC_S_CBOX QL3_7 K_3 _PLUG_M // 338 _PLUG_FEM // 339 // 1198 // 1251 K_4 // 1252 KS3 // 1253 KS4 // 1254 KST3 // 1255 KST4 // 1256 S_EL // 1261 O_EL // 1262 XU2 // 1265 XU2S // 1266 F_SNH_1P // 1281 F_SNH_3P // 1282 F_AB_1P // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

407 New Features in the Master Data QLIM11_1 // 1286 QL3_8 // 1290 W3_SWR_2 // 1291 W3_SWL_2 // 1292 W3_SWB_2 // 1293 W3_VES_2 // 1294 W3_NES_2 // 1295 W2_OU_1 // 1328 BW3P // 1372 BW3SW // 1373 BW3D // 1374 X1_NB // 1410 X1_B // 1411 X2_NB // 1413 X2_B // 1414 X2_B_2 // 1415 X3_NB // 1417 X3_B // 1418 X3_B_2 // 1419 X4_NB // 1421 X4_B // 1422 X4_NB_1 // 1424 X4_B_1 // 1425 X4_B_2 // 1426 EPLAN NEWS

408 New Features in the Master Data X6_NB // 1428 X6_B // 1429 X6_NB_1 // 1430 X6_B_1 // 1431 X6_B_2 // 1432 X8_NB // 1434 X8_B // 1435 X8_NB_1 // 1436 X8_B_1 // 1437 X8_B_2 // 1438 SSNS1_ST // 1440 SONS1_ST // 1441 SLS_ST // 1442 SLSAC_ST // 1443 SLSDC_ST // 1444 SLEDC_ST // 1445 SLEAC_ST // 1446 SSUS_ST // 1447 SOUS_ST // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

409 New Features in the Master Data Fluid power and process engineering A new symbol library for the "Lubrication" trade has been created: LUB1ESS. F15.5_14 // 238 F // 254 F15.3.1_01 // 255 AG10.1.1_03 // 307 AG10.1.1_02 // 308 AG10.5_02 // 326 V_BT_058 // 845 V_BT_059 // 846 V_BT_060 // 847 V_BT_061 // 848 AG10.1.2_04 // 856 V_BT_057 // 857 V_BT_053 // 861 V_BT_054 // 862 V_BT_055 // 863 V_S_011 // 871 V_S_012 // 872 V_S_013 // 873 V_S_014 // 874 Z_ZUB_16 // 1060 EPLAN NEWS

410 New Features in the Master Data Z_ZUB_15 // 1061 V_ZUB_03 // 1063 V11.3.1_01 // 1068 PM13.3.4_01 // 1069 F15.5_31 // 1070 GS_EA_06 // 1071 V_BT_077 // 1077 V_BT_078 // 1078 Z14.1.2_17 // 1079 Z_ZUB_31 // 1080 VERB_11 // 1101 VERB_12 // 1102 VERB_13 // 1103 VERB_14 // 1104 VERB_15 // 1105 CON_04 // 1106 VERB_16 // 1107 V11.1.2_15 // 1108 V11.5.3_09 // 1109 ANZ_12 // 1110 ANZ_12_01 // 1111 ANZ_12_02 // 1112 ANZ_12_03 // 1113 ANZ_12_04 // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

411 New Features in the Master Data GSEA_ RV_01 AG10.5_03 ANZ_ZUB_03 // 1115 // 1117 // 1118 // 1120 ANZ_ZUB_04 F15.5_26 F15.5_27 V _02 // 1121 // 1122 // 1123 // 1124 ANZ_ZUB_09 ANZ_ZUB_16 STG_01 STG_02 // 1126 // 1135 // 1137 // 1138 STG_03 // 1139 STG_04 // 1140 V_RV_09 // 1143 V_RV_10 // 1144 F_13 // 1149 ST_01 // 1152 PM_17 // 1153 GS_SCH_01 // 1154 EPLAN NEWS

412 New Features in the Master Data GS_SCH_02 // 1155 PM_ZUB_14 // 1157 PM_ZUB_16 // 1158 PM_ZUB_17 // 1159 SCHG_1 // 1162 SCHG_2 // 1163 SCHG_3 // 1164 SS_03 // 1165 SS_04 // 1166 SS_05 // 1167 BS_01 // 1168 PM_ZUB_15 // 1170 SI_01 // 1171 SI_02 // 1172 SI_03 // 1173 SI_04 // 1174 DS_04 // 1177 P_04 // 1180 SV_06 // 1182 SV_01 // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

413 New Features in the Master Data SV_05 // 1184 SV_07 // 1185 V11.5.3_08 // 1186 GS_MIX_01 // 1187 GS_MIX_02 // 1188 GS6.1.7_04 // 1192 GS6.1.8_04 // 1193 GS6.1.8_02 // 1194 GS6.1.8_03 // 1195 GS6.1.7_02 // 1196 GS6.1.7_03 // 1197 PM_EL_05 // 1198 VERT_VZU_01 VERT_VZU_02 VERT_VZU_03 VERT_DOS_02 // 1201 // 1202 // 1203 // 1207 VERT_VKB_01T VERT_VKB_01 VERT_VKB_02 VERT_VKB_02.1 // 1210 // 1212 // 1213 // 1214 EPLAN NEWS

414 New Features in the Master Data VERT_VKB_03 VERT_VKB_03.1 VERT_VKB_04 VERT_VKB_04.1 // 1215 // 1216 // 1217 // 1218 VERT_VKB_05 VERT_VKB_05.1 VERT_VPB_03 VERT_VPB_04 // 1219 // 1220 // 1221 // 1222 VERT_VPB_05 VERT_VPB_06 VERT_VPB_07 VERT_VPB_08 // 1223 // 1224 // 1225 // 1226 VERT_VPB_09 VERT_VPB_10 VERT_VPK_001 VERT_VPK_002 // 1227 // 1228 // 1231 // 1232 VERT_VPK_003 AG_02 VERT_VDR VERT_VDR_02 // 1233 // 1235 // 1239 // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

415 New Features in the Master Data VERT_VDR_03 VERT_VDR_04 VERT_VDR_05 VERT_VDR_06 // 1241 // 1242 // 1243 // 1244 VERT_VDR_10 VERT_VDR_12 VERT_VDR_14 VERT_VDR_ZUB_01 // 1245 // 1246 // 1247 // 1248 VERT_VDR_ZUB_02 VERT_VDR_ZUB_03 VE_DE_01 VE_DE_02 // 1249 // 1250 // 1251 // 1252 VE_DE_03 VE_DE_04 VERT_LEIST_2 VERT_LEIST_3 // 1253 // 1254 // 1261 // 1262 EPLAN NEWS

416 New Features in the Master Data VERT_LEIST_4 VERT_LEIST_5 VERT_LEIST_6 VERT_LEIST_8 // 1263 // 1264 // 1265 // 1266 VERT_LEIST_10 VERT_VKB_06 VERT_VKB_06.1 VERT_VKB_07 // 1267 // 1271 // 1272 // 1273 VERT_VKB_07.1 VERT_VKB_08 VERT_VKB_08.1 VERT_VKB_09 // 1274 // 1275 // 1276 // 1277 VERT_VKB_09.1 VERT_VKB_10 VERT_VKB_10.1 // 1278 // 1279 // 1280 The following new symbols have been added to the HYD1ESS and HYD2ESS symbol libraries: GS7.1.7_04 // 212 V11.5.4_12 // 213 GS7.5.1_02 // 214 GS7.1.8_02 // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

417 New Features in the Master Data F15.1_07 // 219 AG10.1.1_03 // 307 AG10.1.1_02 // 308 AG10.5_02 // 326 Z14.1.2_17 Z14.1.3_17 V _01 GSVA8.2xx_17 // 371 // 372 // 664 // 665 Z_ZUB_36 // 673 Z_ZUB_37 // 674 Z_ZUB_38 // 675 Z_ZUB_39 // 676 Z_ZUB_40 // 677 Z_ZUB_41 // 678 SV_006 // 681 SV_007 // 682 SV_008 // 683 SV_009 // 684 SV_010 // 685 SV_011 // 686 SV_012 // 687 SV_013 // 688 SV_014 // 689 SV_015 // 690 EPLAN NEWS

418 New Features in the Master Data SV_016 // 691 SV_017 // 692 V _03 // 695 V_BT_062 // 849 V_BT_063 // 850 V_BT_064 // 851 V_BT_065 // 852 AG10.1.2_04 // 856 V_BT_057 // 857 V_BT_056 // 859 V11.5.3_07 // 860 V_BT_069 // 869 V_BT_070 // 870 V_BT_049 // 890 V_BT_050 // 891 V_BT_051 // 892 V_BT_052 // 893 Z14.1.2_08_1 // 897 Z14.1.2_09_1 // 898 Z14.1.3_08_1 // 899 Z14.1.3_09_1 // 900 V _51 // 939 SPIST_01 // 1090 SRLT_01 // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

419 New Features in the Master Data SRLT_02 // 1092 SRLT_03 // 1093 SRLT_04 // 1094 SRLT_05 // 1095 SRLT_06 // 1096 SRLT_07 // 1097 SRLT_08 // 1098 SRLT_09 // 1099 SRLT_10 VERT_VKB_07.1 VERT_VKB_08 EA_BT_44 // 1100 // 1274 // 1275 // 1309 EA_BT_42 // 1310 EA_18 // 1311 EA_19 // 1312 EA_20 // 1313 EA_BT_43 // 1314 EA9.1.4_02 // 1321 EA9.1.4_03 // 1322 EA9.1.4_04 // 1323 EA_21 EA_DS_P_ANA EA_DS_P_DIGIT EA_DS_P_EL // 1324 _3x3M // 1331 _3x3M // 1332 _3x3M // 1333 EPLAN NEWS

420 New Features in the Master Data EA_DS_G_ANA EA_DS_G_DIGIT EA_DS_G_EL EA_DS_F_ANA _3x3M // 1334 _3x3M // 1335 _3x3M // 1336 _3x3M // 1337 EA_DS_F_DIGIT EA_DS_F_EL EA_DS_L_ANA EA_DS_L_DIGIT _3x3M // 1338 _3x3M // 1339 _3x3M // 1340 _3x3M // 1341 EA_DS_L_EL EA_DS_S_ANA EA_DS_S_DIGIT EA_DS_S_EL _3x3M // 1342 _3x3M // 1343 _3x3M // 1344 _3x3M // 1345 EA_DS_T_ANA EA_DS_T_DIGIT EA_DS_T_EL EA_DS_W_ANA _3x3M // 1346 _3x3M // 1347 _3x3M // 1348 _3x3M // 1349 EA_DS_W_DIGIT EA_DS_W_EL EA_Z_G_ANA EA_Z_G_DIGIT _3x3M // 1350 _3x3M // 1351 _3x3M // 1364 _3x3M // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

421 New Features in the Master Data EA_Z_G_EL_3x3M EA_Z_T_ANA_3x3M EA_Z_T_DIGIT_3x3M EA_Z_T_EL_3x3M // 1366 // 1376 // 1377 // 1378 EA_G_ANA_3x3M EA_G_DIGIT_3x3M EA_G_EL_3x3M EA_T_ANA_3x3M // 1394 // 1395 // 1396 // 1406 EA_T_DIGIT_3x3M EA_T_EL_3x3M // 1407 // 1408 The following new symbols have been added to the PNE1ESS symbol library: GS7.1.7_04 // 212 V11.5.4_12 // 213 GS7.5.1_02 // 214 F15.3.1_03 // 215 F15.3.1_04 // 216 GS7.1.8_02 // 217 F15.1_06 // 218 PM // 261 EPLAN NEWS

422 New Features in the Master Data AG10.1.1_03 // 307 AG10.1.1_02 // 308 AG10.5_02 // 326 Z14.1.2_17 // 371 Z14.1.3_17 // 372 V_BT_026 // 461 V_BT_019_X2 // 575 V_BT_046_X // 576 V_BT_047_X // 577 V7.1.2_33_08 // 657 Z_ZUB_36 // 673 Z_ZUB_37 // 674 Z_ZUB_38 // 675 Z_ZUB_39 // 676 Z_ZUB_40 // 677 Z_ZUB_41 // 678 SV_006 // 681 SV_007 // 682 SV_008 // 683 SV_009 // 684 SV_010 // 685 SV_011 // 686 SV_012 // 687 SV_013 // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

423 New Features in the Master Data SV_014 // 689 SV_015 // 690 SV_016 // 691 SV_017 // 692 V_BT_062 // 849 V_BT_063 // 850 V_BT_069 // 869 V_BT_070 // 870 SPIST_01 // 1090 SRLT_01 // 1091 SRLT_02 // 1092 SRLT_03 // 1093 SRLT_04 // 1094 SRLT_05 // 1095 SRLT_06 // 1096 SRLT_07 // 1097 SRLT_08 SRLT_09 SRLT_10 VERT_VKB_07.1 // 1098 // 1099 // 1100 // 1274 VERT_VKB_08 EA_BT_44 EA_BT_42 EA_18 // 1275 // 1309 // 1310 // 1311 EPLAN NEWS

424 New Features in the Master Data EA_19 // 1312 EA_20 // 1313 EA_BT_43 // 1314 EA9.1.4_02 // 1321 EA9.1.4_03 EA9.1.4_04 EA_21 EA_DS_P_ANA_3x3M // 1322 // 1323 // 1324 // 1331 EA_DS_P_DIGIT EA_DS_P_EL EA_DS_G_ANA EA_DS_G_DIGIT _3x3M // 1332 _3x3M // 1333 _3x3M // 1334 _3x3M // 1335 EA_DS_G_EL EA_DS_F_ANA EA_DS_F_DIGIT EA_DS_F_EL _3x3M // 1336 _3x3M // 1337 _3x3M // 1338 _3x3M // 1339 EA_DS_L_ANA EA_DS_L_DIGIT EA_DS_L_EL EA_DS_S_ANA _3x3M // 1340 _3x3M // 1341 _3x3M // 1342 _3x3M // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

425 New Features in the Master Data EA_DS_S_DIGIT EA_DS_S_EL EA_DS_T_ANA EA_DS_T_DIGIT _3x3M // 1344 _3x3M // 1345 _3x3M // 1346 _3x3M // 1347 EA_DS_T_EL EA_DS_W_ANA EA_DS_W_DIGIT EA_DS_W_EL _3x3M // 1348 _3x3M // 1349 _3x3M // 1350 _3x3M // 1351 EA_Z_G_ANA EA_Z_G_DIGIT EA_Z_G_EL_3x3M EA_Z_T_ANA_3x3M _3x3M // 1364 _3x3M // 1365 // 1366 // 1376 EA_Z_T_DIGIT_3x3 EA_Z_T_EL_3x3M // EA_G_ANA_3x3M // EA_G_DIGIT_3x3M M // // 1395 EA_G_EL_3x3M EA_T_ANA_3x3M EA_T_DIGIT_3x3M EA_T_EL_3x3M // 1396 // 1406 // 1407 // 1408 EPLAN NEWS

426 New Features in the Master Data In the PPE_SYM symbol library, the function definition for the symbol B73 // 73 ("Symbol name" // "Symbol number") has been changed from "Analog temperature sensor, 2 connection points" to "Analog sensor, general, 2 connection points". Special symbol library A new symbol for net definition points has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library: NDP // 312 // Net definition point (triangle) NDP A new symbol for potential definition points has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library: PDP2 // 313 // Potential definition point (triangle) PDP2 426 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

427 New Features in the Master Data A new symbol has been created for placeholder objects in the SPECIAL symbol library: PLHO // 323 // Placeholder object PLHO A new symbol for insulated wire terminations has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library: NCI // 100 // Wire termination, insulated NCI A new symbol for wire terminations that are not connected has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library: NC // 101 // Wire termination, not connected NC EPLAN NEWS

428 New Features in the Master Data A new symbol for deleted objects has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library: DO // 300 // Deleted object DO A new symbol for outline definition points of outlines of type "Extrusion" has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library: ODP // 290 // Outline definition points for outlines of type extrusion ODP A new symbol for connection definition points of type "Coiled pipe" has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library: CDPST // 472 // VDP, Coiled pipe CDPST 428 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

429 New Features in the Master Data The following new device connection points are available in the SPECIAL symbol library: DCFP2OL2 // 59 DCPP3 // 408 DCPPJIC // 409 DCPPOJIC // 410 DCPPO // 411 In addition, the following symbols for complex devices have been added to the SPECIAL symbol library: D2DCP // 412 D3DCP // 413 D4DCP // 414 D2DCPFEM // 415 D3DCPFEM D4DCPFEM D2DCPJICFEM D3DCPJICFEM // 416 // 417 // 418 // 419 EPLAN NEWS

430 New Features in the Master Data D4DCPJICFEM // 420 D2DCPM // 421 D3DCPM // 422 D4DCPM // 423 D2DCPJICM // 424 D3DCPJICM // 425 D4DCPJICM // 426 D2DCPNG // 427 D3DCPNG // 428 D4DCPNG // 429 D2DCPP3 // 430 D3DCPP3 // 431 D4DCPP3 // 432 D2DCPPJIC // 433 D3DCPPJIC // 434 D4DCPPJIC // 435 D2DCPPO // 436 D3DCPPO // 437 D4DCPPO // 438 D2DCPPOJIC // EPLAN NEWS 2.0

431 New Features in the Master Data D3DCPPOJIC // 440 D4DCPPOJIC // 441 S2DCP // 442 S3DCP // 443 S4DCP // 444 S2DCPFEM // 445 S3DCPFEM // 446 S4DCPFEM // 447 S2DCPJICFEM S3DCPJICFEM S4DCPJICFEM S2DCPM // 448 // 449 // 450 // 451 S3DCPM // 452 S4DCPM // 453 S2DCPJICM // 454 S3DCPJICM // 455 S4DCPJICM // 456 S2DCPNG // 457 S3DCPNG // 458 S4DCPNG // 459 S2DCPP3 // 460 S3DCPP3 // 461 S4DCPP3 // 462 S2DCPPJIC // 463 S3DCPPJIC // 464 S4DCPPJIC // 465 S2DCPPO // 466 S3DCPPO // 467 EPLAN NEWS

432 New Features in the Master Data S4DCPPO // 468 S2DCPPOJIC // 469 S3DCPPOJIC // 470 S4DCPPOJIC // 471 In the SPECIAL symbol library, the width of several symbols for PCT loops and PCT loop functions has been reduced to 10 mm. This relates to the following symbols: PID6 // 346 // PCT loop Process computer On-site PID7 // 347 // PCT loop Process computer Measuring station PID8 // 348 // PCT loop Process computer Control room PID15 // 355 // PCT loop function - Process computer - On-site PID16 // 356 // PCT loop function - Process computer - Measuring station PID17 // 357 // PCT loop function - Process computer - Control room. General In the IEC_symbol, NFPA_symbol, GOST_symbol, and GB_symbol symbol libraries, the appearance of contactor contact image symbol variants has been changed in several symbols (change-over contacts and contacts with delay). This relates to symbols with the number 3, 4, 5, 6, 270, 1011, 1012, 1013, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1062, 1063, 1106, 1107, 1126, 1127, 1128, 1129, 1130, 1131, 1132, and EPLAN NEWS 2.0

433 New Features in the Master Data Master Data: Function Definition Library Numerous new function definitions have been added to the function definition library. For further information on the properties, the basic symbol, etc. of the function definitions listed below in the Function definitions dialog, navigate to the location indicated in the Selection field. Trade: General The following new function definitions have been added under General // General special functions // Connection // Connection definitions: Internal jumper. Trade: Electrical engineering The following new function definitions have been added under Electrical engineering // Electrical engineering special function // Device connection point to the groups listed below: "Device connection point" group: N device connection point SH device connection point. "Device connection point, 2 connection points" group: N device connection point, 2 connection points PE device connection point, 2 connection points SH device connection point, 2 connection points. The following new function definitions have been added under Electrical engineering // Terminals and plugs // Terminal to the groups listed below: "Terminal, variable" group: Terminal, variable N terminal, variable PE terminal, variable SH terminal, variable. EPLAN NEWS

434 New Features in the Master Data "Terminals with saddle jumper, 1 connection point" group: General terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point Terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point N terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point PE terminal with rail contact, 1 connection point SH terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point. "Terminals with saddle jumper, 2 connection points" group: General terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points Terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points N terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points PE terminal with rail contact, 2 connection points SH terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points. "Terminals with saddle jumper, 3 connection points" group: General terminal with saddle jumper, 3 connection points Terminal with saddle jumper, 3 connection points N terminal with saddle jumper, 3 connection points PE terminal with rail contact, 3 connection points SH terminal with saddle jumper, 3 connection points. "Terminals with saddle jumper, 4 connection points" group: General terminal with saddle jumper, 4 connection points Terminal with saddle jumper, 4 connection points N terminal with saddle jumper, 4 connection points PE terminal with rail contact, 4 connection points SH terminal with saddle jumper, 4 connection points. "Terminals with saddle jumper, 6 connection points" group: General terminal with saddle jumper, 6 connection points Terminal with saddle jumper, 6 connection points N terminal with saddle jumper, 6 connection points PE terminal with rail contact, 6 connection points SH terminal with saddle jumper, 6 connection points. 434 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

435 New Features in the Master Data "Terminals with saddle jumper, 8 connection points" group: General terminal with saddle jumper, 8 connection points Terminal with saddle jumper, 8 connection points N terminal with saddle jumper, 8 connection points PE terminal with rail contact, 8 connection points SH terminal with saddle jumper, 8 connection points. "Terminals, 1 connection point" group: General terminal, 1 connection point Terminal, 1 connection point N terminal, 1 connection point PE terminal, 1 connection point SH terminal, 1 connection point. "Terminals, 2 connection points" group: General terminal, 2 connection points Terminal, 2 connection points N terminal, 2 connection points PE terminal, 2 connection points SH terminal, 2 connection points. "Terminals, 3 connection points" group: General terminal, 3 connection points Terminal, 3 connection points N terminal, 3 connection points PE terminal, 3 connection points SH terminal, 3 connection points. "Terminals, 4 connection points" group: General terminal, 4 connection points Terminal, 4 connection points N terminal, 4 connection points PE terminal, 4 connection points SH terminal, 4 connection points. EPLAN NEWS

436 New Features in the Master Data "Terminals, 6 connection points" group: General terminal, 6 connection points Terminal, 6 connection points N terminal, 6 connection points PE terminal, 6 connection points SH terminal, 6 connection points. "Terminals, 8 connection points" group: General terminal, 8 connection points Terminal, 8 connection points N terminal, 8 connection points PE terminal, 8 connection points SH terminal, 8 connection points. The following new function definitions have been added under Electrical engineering // PLC / bus // PLC connection point // PLC connection point, I / O, 1 connection point: PLC connection point, multifunction. The following new function definitions have been added under Electrical engineering // Coils, Contacts and protective circuits // Coil // Coil, 2 Connection points: Coil, auxiliary relay. The "Coil" function definition was renamed "Coil, power circuit breaker". Master Data: Plot Frames GOST standard The following new plot frames have been created: GOST_first_page_scheme_A2_sl.fn1 GOST_next_page_scheme_A2_sl.fn EPLAN NEWS 2.0

437 New Features in the Master Data Master Data: Settings for Messages and Check Runs Enhanced program functionality means that two check run messages in the "Cable" message class are now redundant. For this reason, the following message numbers have been removed: Number: Message text: Identical shield symbols affect identical and differing connections Identical shield symbols affect differing connections. Master Data: Identifiers Utilities > Master data > Identifier In the Suggested identifiers dialog, you can now sort the tables shown alphabetically by either the Trade, Category, Group, or Function definition column, in ascending or descending order. To do so, double-click on the column. In addition, you can assign identifiers for mechanics items in this dialog. For this purpose, additional lines with function definitions from the "Mechanics" trade have been added to the Suggested identifiers dialog. Identifiers can be saved for these function definitions in the IEC and NFPA columns as well as for user-defined identifier sets. Note: After each change, the changed identifier sets must be exported. To do this, select the columns with the changed identifier sets and select Popup menu > Export. If you receive a new function definition library in an update, you need to import your exported identifier sets into the new program version and add the new function definitions. EPLAN NEWS

438 New Features in the Master Data Master Data: Projects and Templates A new "Higher-level function number" page structure has been added to sample projects and templates. In the Num_bas001.zw9 and Num_tpl001.ept templates, the Numbering format setting when inserting symbols has changed from "Identifier + page (three-digit) + column" to "Identifier + counter and device connection points". Master Data: Workspace View > Workspace In the Workspace dialog, the "EPLAN PPE" scheme has been revised. The Documentation dialog has now been replaced by Graphical preview. Master Data: Schemes Two new filter schemes have been created for the terminal strips navigator: Main terminals Auxiliary terminals. A new filter scheme has been made available in the PLC navigator: Address-oriented. The new "UnityPro - Txt" scheme, with PLC-specific formats for Schneider Electric's "Unity Pro" software, is now available for the PLC-specific settings field in the Settings: PLCdialog. The following filter scheme has been created for the field-based filter of parts management: Accessories. 438 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

439 Other New Features and Information Other New Features and Information Customer Queries and Messages Note: Please note that the following EPLAN service is not possible in all countries. A large number of your queries and wishes have contributed to the new version of the EPLAN platform. Please note that not all queries can be listed within the scope of this document. You can, however, query the status of your message ("issue") with us at any time. Login to EPLAN Support on the Internet (software service customers only) and, within our support area, click the Login Call-Tracking hyperlink under Call tracking. The "EPLAN Support Call Tracking" page will now open in your browser. EPLAN NEWS

440 Other New Features and Information You need the following information to log on here: User name (= your last name) The first five digits of your Software service number. After filling out the form, confirm this information by clicking [Login]. In the Issue No. field on the next page, enter the issue number that you were given by support and click [Search]. 440 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

441 Other New Features and Information You will be redirected to your message. This will show you an overview of your support query. EPLAN NEWS

442 Other New Features and Information Validation Code To use this new version of EPLAN, you need a new validation code. This is provided on the delivery note sent with your storage medium. In addition, you can now have the option of retrieving the validation code via the internet (see the following section). Retrieving the validation code online EPLAN now enables you to carry out the final installation step quickly and easily by allowing you to retrieve the validation code required for licensing via the internet. After the required data have been transmitted, the validation code is automatically copied into the license dialog. Benefit: Retrieving the validation code via the internet, makes entering the validation code quicker and easier and you are less likely to make mistakes. Note: Please note that you must be connected to the internet to download the validation code. You cannot retrieve a validation code for network licenses or licenses without a dongle. The Enter validation code dialog has been enhanced to allow you the option of retrieving the validation code online. 442 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

443 Other New Features and Information This dialog opens when you start the application for the first time after installation. Click the new [Retrieve online] button. The Company name and Serial number are automatically entered into the open Set validation code online dialog. This data is needed to retrieve the validation code successfully. Up-to-date information If you would like to receive information in the future (such as our enewsletter), please select the I would like to receive further information check box. EPLAN will then save your personal details (Name, Phone, address, etc.). Internet settings The settings for the existing internet connection are adopted by default. You can also use a proxy server as a network component via the [Settings] button and the dialog that then opens. In this case, enter the relevant data in the Address, Port fields, etc. Contact your administrator for the relevant settings. Returning the validation code Click [Send] to send the encoded data to EPLAN. If your details are already held by EPLAN and are valid, a validation code is created and sent to the license dialog. Then start the application by clicking [OK]. EPLAN NEWS

444 Other New Features and Information Installation and Subsequent Operation Steps Administrator: As the administrator, you must read the sections below on installation, software and hardware requirements before working with the new version. Warning: Data of previous versions generated with the EPLAN platform can still be used in the latest version. However, data edited in the current version may not always be compatible with previous versions due to extended functionalities and parameters. We expressly advise you not to work with mixed data originating from different versions. In the installation wizard directory settings, in place of the previous Database directory field, you will now find two new input fields, EPLAN original master data and System master data. In addition to this change, the installation behavior has also changed. 444 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

445 Other New Features and Information Benefit: Because the original master data is not overwritten when installing an update, the system can be completely reset to the factory settings. The original master data can be copied to the relevant company directories selectively and at any time. Original EPLAN master data For original EPLAN master data (reference master data and examples), the installation wizard creates version-dependent directories (e.g. for forms <Directory for Original EPLAN Master Data>\<Version Number>\Forms\EPLAN). System master data The directories for system master data are version-independent. When installing for the first time or installing EPLAN 2.0 as another EPLAN version, this means the following: Initial installation When installing for the first time, the directories for the system master data are created when the program is started for the first time. A directory with the company code specified in the installation (e.g. <Directory for System Master Data>\Forms\<Company Code>) is then created for each master data type (e.g. forms) below the relevant master data directory. The master data from the directories for the original EPLAN master data is copied into this directory. Installation of another EPLAN version If the directory for the system master data and the company code are unchanged during the installation, the previous system master data remains unchanged. The new master data will for now only be installed in the new version-dependent directory for the original EPLAN master data. EPLAN NEWS

446 Other New Features and Information Notes: To update your company-specific master data in this case, perform a synchronization of the system master data (see page 449). If you install EPLAN 2.0 as another version of EPLAN, a dialog opens when you start the program for the first time in which you can opt to use the settings of the previous version. For more information on this, see section "Automatically importing the settings of the previous version" on page 448. Directory structure after installation The precise appearance of the directory structure for the installed data depends on the operating system used and the setting you have specified for the application in the installation wizard. If you selected the Anyone who uses this computer option, the system master data is stored in a public folder. If you select the Only for me option, then this data is stored in the user-specific area of the user currently logged on. Note: Please note that this setting cannot be subsequently changed. Windows XP Under the Windows XP operating system, the original and the system master data are stored in the following directory by default: Anyone who uses this computer: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\EPLAN\<Program Variants> Only for me: C:\Documents and Settings\<Your User Name>\Application Data\EPLAN\<Program Variants> 446 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

447 Other New Features and Information Example: Following the installation of EPLAN Electric P8 with the default settings, the directory structure for the forms described above would look something like this: Directory for original EPLAN master data: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\ EPLAN\EPLAN Electric P8\2.0.5\Forms\EPLAN Directory for system master data: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\ EPLAN\EPLAN Electric P8\Forms\MyCompanyCode Note: Please note that to see the application data under Windows XP, you must make the following settings in Windows Explorer: Select Tools > Folder options. Open the View tab and in the Advanced settings field look for the Hidden files and folders folder. Select the Show hidden files and folders option here. The Application Data folder will now be visible. Windows Vista and Windows 7 Under the Windows Vista and Windows 7 operating systems, the original EPLAN master data is stored in the following directory by default: Anyone who uses this computer: C:\ProgramData\EPLAN\<Program Variants>\<Version Number> Only for me: C:\ProgramData\<Your User Name>\EPLAN\<Program Variants>\<Version Number> EPLAN NEWS

448 Other New Features and Information Under the Windows Vista and Windows 7 operating systems, the system master data is stored in the following directory by default: Anyone who uses this computer: C:\Users\Public\EPLAN Only for me: C:\Users\<Your user name>\eplan Note: To see the protected program directory ProgramData, you must enter %ProgramData% in the Windows Explorer address bar. Automatically importing the settings of the previous version If you are installing the current EPLAN version in addition to an existing version, you now have the opportunity to automatically apply the settings of the previous version. The first time you start the program, the Import settings dialog is displayed for this purpose. Benefit: It is no longer necessary to manually import and export the various setting ranges. After installation, you can immediately continue working with your familiar user settings. In this dialog the check boxes of the User, Workstation, and Company settings areas are selected by default. [OK] imports the settings of these areas to the current version, and generates the corresponding settings databases. In addition to this, the settings for Property arrangement, Dialog memory, Column configuration, and External programs are also applied. Note: If the new EPLAN version is started via the W3u.EXE file using the /Quiet parameter, the Import settings dialog is suppressed. In a case like this, the settings are not applied. 448 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

449 Other New Features and Information Synchronization with original EPLAN master data When installing another EPLAN version with unchanged directory settings, the new master data is for the moment only installed in the original EPLAN master data directories. For example, the original forms are copied to a directory with the designation EPLAN that can be found below the new version-dependent directory for the original EPLAN master data (e.g. <Directory for Original EPLAN Master Data>\<Version Number>\Forms\EPLAN). To use the new master data, you must first synchronize the system master data. To do so, copy the original EPLAN master data into your company-specific directory (e.g. <Directory for System Master Data>\Forms\<Company Code>). Create the company-specific directories, which will be used by default, in the Company code field during installation. Benefit: The option of updating master data means you are less likely to make mistakes when transferring data. Errors that previously arose when copying data are avoided and data can be synchronized more quickly. Synchronizing system master data Synchronization of the system master data starts in the following situations: When the program is first started and if you have installed a new EPLAN version in addition to an existing version. When the program is first started and if you later install an add-on with master data. When you open the dialog for synchronizing system master data via the Utilities > Master data > Synchronize system master data menu path. EPLAN NEWS

450 Other New Features and Information In the first two cases, the program displays a prompt asking you whether synchronization should take place immediately. You have the following options in this dialog: If you select [User-defined], the master data is loaded, and the Master data synchronization - system master data dialog opens. You can then use this dialog to transfer specific EPLAN original master data to specific targets. If you select [Yes], the system master data will be synchronized automatically. Old system master data will be overwritten and nonexistent system master data added. If you select [No], you can resume your work without synchronizing. Recommended data backup A security warning is displayed at the same time as the Master data synchronization - system master data dialog opens. This warning reminds you that changes due to synchronization cannot be undone and recommends that you back up your data beforehand. Click [No] to exit master data synchronization and switch to data backup. Click [Yes] to keep the dialog for master data synchronization open and synchronize data without backing up your data beforehand. Dialog for synchronizing system master data Specify which master data is to be updated in your company-specific directories in the Master data synchronization - system master data dialog. 450 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

451 Other New Features and Information Directories: You can select various directories for master data synchronization from this drop-down list. To be able to do this, you must first have saved these directory settings as a scheme. This may be useful if you are using different master data directories for different companies / customers. Click [...] to open the Settings: Directories dialog and create a new scheme for the directories. Source: Select the source for the synchronization from this drop-down list. The list contains all the installed program variants and add-ons, such as "EPLAN Electric P8", "EPLAN Fluid Addon", and "EPLAN PPE add-on". System master data / EPLAN master data: The master data in the company-specific directories are displayed in the table on the left. The original EPLAN master data is listed in the table on the right. Click on the Status, Name, Type, or Modification date column to sort the entries in the tables. EPLAN NEWS